uu
If
P G R A M M A 11
OF THE
CHINESE LANGUAGE.
BY
i^
I
f
iJf. Z. B. S. V; C. M. J. li. G. S. A. S,^c., .jr.
IN TWO PARTS. (j
iir
PART I.
PRINTED AT THK OFFICE OF THE "DAILY PEESS/' HONGKONG.
1864.
23
nil
..I
To
The Honoiable
if. (il^ljomh^,
THIS VOLUME
" IS RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED
BY THE
AUTHOR.
^MlM
PREFACE.
Wlion the author of the present work first arrived in
China, he had ri;reat dlffieuUies in irettirif^; a teaclier who
Avould condescend to speak to him as he would do to his
o«vn countrymen ; and there being not as yet a work })u])-
lished in the local dialect to serve as a safe guide to a
knowledge of the spoken language, he felt that in using
any of the existing Grammars he would act like a mini
living in London and using a French Grammar for the ac-
quisition of English. The Orthography of most of the
smaller works that were aftervv^ards published is only adap-
ted for private use. The intonation has altogetlier been
discarded, which makes the respective works often dan-
gerous instruments to place into the hands of a new ar-
rival.
As to the Orthography to be adopted in the present
work, the author had no hesitation in giving Sir W. Jones'
(whom Dr. Williams follows) the preference. Many of the
diacritical marks now used by foreigners are not required
for natives and may, therefore, soon he done away with.
That will leave a simple and excellent sj'stem of spelling,
such as can he acquired by a native of moderate talent
within the short period of one month.
To invent a new alpliabet, as several excellent scho-
lars have proposed, would leave us in the same "position in
wdiich we now find ourselves in Japan. Siam. Tdjet, Bur-
mah and India, were the lack of a more practical system
of spelling is keenly felt by the stn.deuts of those tongues.
We must well keep in mind, that the further we ad-
vance in ci> ilizatioii. tlie nearer are nations bronght togc-
Ill
PREFACE.
tlier and the more we shall feel the need of a Standard
Alphabet, that will enable a native of Europe to read the
names on maps made by the nations of Asia and Afriea,
and to as(iertain (approximately) the pronuneiation of a
word without any aecjuired knowledge of the language of
the country.
In order to' assist the student in the acquisition of the
written and spoken idioms and to enable him to avoid the
study of unnecessary or useless sentences, the author has
endeavoured to distinguish the book style from the va-
rious dialects. At the end of most of the i)aragra])hs
there will be found a summary of the words in use in the
Canton dialect. Whilst -^the student of that dialect ad-
vances in the Grammar, he should carefully commit to
memory all the sentences and verbs in the Introduction.
A list of Phonetics for writing-lessons will be published
shortly after the second part of this Grammar is com-
pleted, and the author hopes that with the hints thus given,
the student will be enabled to learn to write the charac-
ters of the Chinese language within one year and to re-
meml)cr them throughout his life.
The diftieulties encountered in preparing the present
work have been very great, besides the Provei-bs and
two Reading Lessons the author met with but little help
fnmi existing books. He can, however, not pass over in
silence the .valualde assistance rendered to him by the
late Mrs. Irwin, in looking over the first 00 pages of the
manuscript. He also feels greatly indebted to the Rev.
Mr. Stringer for his kindness in correcting the last proofs.
Simplicity and usefulness have been the sole object
aimed at by the author. He has endeavoured to collect
for reading lessons new and interesting intc'rmation on the
government, religion, manners and customs of the Chin-
ese, so as to ac(piaint the student not only with the lan-
guage, but also with the routine and daily life of the })e()-
])lc, among whom he is anxious to sojourn.
Since the burning of the Factories and the deslnic-
tion of tlic printing office of (he A. li. C. F. M., great dif-
IV
PREFACE.
ficulties liave 1)oen expcriciK^ed in o-ettino a work like the
present tli rough tlie press. The author wouhl, therefore,
ask the indulgence of the reader for defects in the out-
ward appearance of the book. Whilst thanking such jis
have assisted him with their counsel, he shall feel greatly
obliged for additional help for a new edition.
W. L.
Victoria, Hongkong, April, ISGl.
INTRODUCTION.
AJfinity and Difference of liacrs.
Whrn a p-^rson cominof trom Europe and travelling eastward, pas-
ses through a number of states, whose inliiibitaiits differ g'reritly iVoin him
in complexion, cosrume and religion, his curiosity is excited as he ad-
vances ; for the nearer he approaches India, the greater is the similarity
of features with his own, and the closer the affinity of the lang-uaga
S[)oken by the sister states of Europe. The large, sparkling eyes of the
eastern nations, so f\ir as they are unmixed with the IVlongolians from
the deserts of Asia, have for more than 3000 years, revelled in sensua-
lity; but combined with it poetr}', fiction and wit, with which the
graver nations of the west still amuse their children or entertain them-
selves during the long winter evenings.
The gigantic works the}' created for themselves and their gods ara
as many expressions of their character and sentiments, and repres^pnt
them to us as a people anxious to perpetuate their own existence on this
eartlj, or to induce their gods to quit their abodes of bliss and dwell with
man in the workf- of /n's creation.
Crossing the Himalaya how different is the aspect of affairs. Poly-
gamy and its accompanying vices is here exchanged with Polyandry.
The panorama before us is not unlike an encampment of proletarians,
who are living upon the scanty crumbs fallen from the overtlowing tables
of their neighbours. The wings of imagination are clipped. Tied to a
barren soil, hemmed in by mountains and deserts, who wonders, that the
Tibetian's daily song is : "' My home is not here ", that he has created
anotlier world equally poor and comfortless; and that his ciiaritabia
disposili()n hns imposed upon him the task of providing for the necessi-
ties of the citizens of that world.
The language spoken by this people and further eastward to tlie
Paciflc : in China, Cochin China, Siam and Burmalf belongs to the mo-
nosyllabic tongues and is noted for poverty and inflexibility. The pho-
r.etic system introdroduced into Tibet, Burmah and Siam has indeed to
a certain degree assisted in advancing general education ; but this b is
been more than counteracted by the influence of Budhism and the lui-
cient superstition, as received from the Chinese.
China appears to have been the cradle of that peculiar kind
of civilization which distinguishes it from the rest of the world. But;
their ideas petrefied in hieroglyphics before they were fully developed ;
and their advance in literature was marked by tlie Ibrmation of a svstem
of ideography, which being- mute in itse>lf, is pro;iouaced according to
VI
INTRODUCTION.
Jjiff'crenl Dinhcls in China. Peculiarifij of the northern Court Dialact-
the local dialects, liowever miicli they ditfar from each other. Now you hear
a veruiiciilar, which reminds you of Scandinavia; again you fi\ncy your-
self in France ; and again you are overheaped wirh gutturals, more than
in Holland and other parts of the Netherlands. But in spite of the jerks
and unearthly sounds, the result of an imperfect articidation, Ciiiua made
considerable prog-i'ess in civilization, which enabled it to subdue and re-
firm the surrounding b-arbarians, and to exercise a nominal sway from
Central Asia to the Pacilic and down to the Malayan Peninsula. In all
tha.^e states, even in .Japan, the Chinese characters became the medium
ot official communication, and occupy, up to this moment, the same po-
sition that Latin did in Europe during the middle age.
If the dialects in China were reduced to a phonetic system, wo
should have as many different lang'uages as we have in EuropH and
among the aborigines of America. We should find that the Chinese
vernacular is bv no monns a purely monosyllabic tongue, and that theiiir-
ther we advance towards the north, the more similarity we find in the
form of the languiiges b.5t\^''een China, Japan and the American Indians.
Jn the Canton, Ilakka and other southern dialecrs we frecpiently
hear the finals p, t, and k ; further to the north and in what is g»^ne-
rally called the southern Court dialect, these consonants terminate in aa
abrupt sound, in which neither the p, t or k can be distinguished ; again
further north this abrupt sound terminates in a long vowel. Hence the
name of the Governor General of Canton, wlio was captured by the
English, is pronounced yip in Punti ; yap in Hakka ; yl (abruptly) in
the southern, and yeh (long) in the northern Court dialect. The only
iinal consonant left in the latter dialect is the N, and the nasal Ng. The
P. becomes B ; the M — N ; the H or W changes into the guttural Ch. as
it is pronounced in all its finances in Germany, or the X in Greece.
If we now pass over to Japan we find, that if the language be cor-
rectlv written, not a single syllable terminates in a consonant but the N.
All the prefixes and suffixes are, as in China, Siara and Tibet, inflexible
particles, and the possessive " of" stands detached as in the English lan-
guage, as : Mimasaka no kami, the knmi of Mimasaka ; Suruga no kami
the kami of Suruga. It certainly cannot be mere accident that the same
form should be found in many languages of the American Indians.
When in America and called upon to read a few lines in a book ia
■which the Indian language was transcribed according to S[)anish pro-
nunciation, I was struck with the similarity of the sounds with the Ja-
])anese. In opening another book, alsj written in the same language, I
found on the title page the English word ''Acts" prefixed to "Apos-
tehiu,'' i. c, the " Acts of the Apostles." The Nu, Japanese No, had ei-
ther from ignorance or from a desire to europeanize the language, been
affixed to the the word Apostle.
Tiiis threw at once some light on the clnracter of the language and
the probablo origin of the Indians. Their long words, I was sure, were
strunj^ together from ignorance ; lor all the names underneath the por-
traits of chiefs indicate, tliat the language was originally a syllabic (if
not a monosyllabic) one, like the Cianese and Japanese, and that when
VII
INTRODUCTION.
SiviilarUy «f Chinese, Japanese and Avierlcan Indian Dialects.
reduced to a phonetic sj'stem, vLole sentences were reduced to a sinj^le
Avoid.
?ily conjectures were not lonp: to remain without practical proof.
I soon learnt, that the Japanese atnhiissadors. when in California, acci-
dentally asked for c\i chi. the Imiian name for uiilk. This reniarkahle
coincidence led to an inquiry, which resulted in th-^ discovery of six Ja-
})anese names in the California Indian dialc(;t.
I would here remark, that those Indians, who chiefly support them-
selves by hunling- and fishing, speak dialects in sound much more sinu-
lav to the Japanese and Tartars of northern Asia, than in Yucatan, Cen-
tral America, and Mexico. Here where we find the ideographic inscrip-
tions so similar in composition to the ancient Chinese characters, we have
also languages or dialects resemhling more that of northern Cliina. For
i)i these languages (or dialects) wo meet tlie same iireponderance of coni-
})Ound hissing sounds and vowels as in China, and the absence of the R
is no less rennii-kable. Ilitheito however, ihe orthography of the works
]»nblished in the Otorni, Quiche and other languages of Yucatan, Cen-
tral America and ]\Iexico is too incorrect to enable us to decide on any
point without a thorough knowledge of at least one of them. Even the
copies, which Stephen made from the manuscripts of the priests, betray
a lamentable inconsistency of orthography.
American Indians apparenlhj one Face n-iih the Japanese and E. Asiatics.
If we comparo the stature, features, hair and complexion of the In-
dians, we cannot help declaring them to be either Japanese, Chinese or
other cognate tribes of eastern Asia, I have seen women and children^
whom nobody would have taken for Indians, had he found them in one
of the Islands of Japan. In passing accross the Isthmus of Panama
and Mexico, I was struck with the simihirity of architecture between
the Chinese and these peo[)le. Instead of excavating mountains, instead
of making expensive vaults, all the principal edifices are erected on ele-
vated ground. The tiles of the roofs are concave and con' ex, just as wo
have them in China ; the anchors of their boats are the same as we find
them in Japan and the north of China, i. e. with four hooks without a
barb ; and innumerable other manners, customs and peculiarities of civi-
lazation agree exactly with those of eastern Asia, as in no other country
of the world.
We now come to inquire as to how these tribes could reach Ame-
rica. During the summer months, when the sun did not set for one
whole month, the inhabitants of the extreme parts of northeastern Asia,
either pressed by hostile tribes, or from an ini])Vilse of adventure, must
liave crossed over to the Ameiican continent, where either by hunting or
fishing, they could easily su]iport themselves and provide for their wants
during the coming winter. Wave after wave of immigration is likely to
have rolled on ; and if only, at long intervals, a few returned to their
native place, that was sufficient to account for a kno\\l..'dge of a laige
Eastern continent, floating among the Chinese, Japanese and other Asia-
tics.
YIII
INTRODUCTION.
American Iii:lkui< likehjjrom China, Japan and N. E. Aitia.
The large fleets of fishing- boats about the coasts of Japnn and China
are, we know, frequently overtaken by tremendous gales and eitber des-
troyed or carried eastwards. We know of Japanese junks having- betm
picked up beyond the Sandwich Islands and close to the shore of Ame-
rica after an absence of more than nine months. But mnch more.
Larg-e fleets of war junks, sometimes manned by as many as 100,000 men,
have left the coast of China and Japan, and have been scittered by the
N. W. gales, tl)at only few of them ever survived or returned. It is not
tmlikely, that these junks, being well provisioned, have continued in their
eastward course, until, within 28 dej^^-rees N. L. they fell in with the
trade wind, which compelled them to chang'e their course, and carried
them towards Mexico or lower Calilbinia, where they laid the founda-
tion to that kind of civilization resembling- so much the Chinese and
Japanese. Look at the Chinese dress 5 or 6 centuries ago, and you have the
bead — dress of the Mexicans; look at the monstrous uniforms, coats-of-
mail, and the head — dress of the Japanese women, and you will be struck
with theii;. similarity to the Mexicans. As all the kings, cliiefs, and
priests, in one word, all the creators of tiiat peculiar civilizition were
daslroyed hij the Spaniards, we need not wonder at tlie low el>b of edu-
cation of the present race, vvbo are merely the children of peasants and
the lower classes. Were Cliinese who speak the different dialects and
well versed in their own literature, and Japinese of education, well fur-
nished with ancient works, sent with scien'^iHc men to America, v,'e may
rest assured, they would soon decypher the inscriptions now fast going
to ruin.
HammarT/ of Similarity tf the American Indians with the Japanese, Chinexe
and Northern Asiatics.
1. Lamjua-^e. MnnosylUbic, as spokon bv 'be (Jtomi and other tribes. Hiero-
pflypb.? or iden'.^iaphic char;iciers. on the same piinciple ai the Chinese ; absence of
the R (iinrtn:ir those trilies where the ideograi'hic ch^iactei's are found ; prevalence of
hissini? sounds an.l gutturals, and mast words terminating in avowel-2. Polysylla-
bic languas^e of a syllai)ic chat-icter, representini? not sound, but si/llah/rs as in Ja-
pan. Japanese words detected in the Indian languaHjo ; Japanese form of the poj-
sessise cis'-" ; prevalence of the B. and the terniination of every wird in a vowel,
except the N.
2. Ueli;4ion. The nnost ancient religion of the Indians now formina t^e wan-
dering tribes, is the belief in one great Spirit, whom they worship like the Japanese
their Sin JfiijI (spirit) without image. In both places long, hortatory addresses are
delivered to tlie audience, and both exhibit profound reverence of that spirit, and
d.'ep reli'.:i'>u3 feelin!?s. The polytheistic t'orin of worship as found in Mexico &c.,
is, accoriUn< to accu-pted history, the most m ule'-n one and was, if we believe Chin-
e^ie lei»ends. iniroduced by [Judhist and Sh-iman priests about the bei^inninp; of the
Bixth century of oui era, which nearly oincides with the commencement of the Tol-
tecian hi.story, which is put down at A. 0. 596. The dragon or serpf-ut worship
was very prevalent. Tliat the Chinese draizon is norhing but a serpent, can be
proved from the f:ict. that at this moment si^rpcats are kept in temples as renresen-
tatives of the ancient dragon. They resembled the Chinese and (Mudliist) J;ipanese
in their ideis of •'the transmigration of the soul ;" in their monastic forms and dis-
cipline ; -- in their penauccs. ablutions. almsirivinu'S and public festivals ; in ihc wor-
ship of thiur househoiil i:ods, in the devotions of the jirie-.ts to the study f f -istroloj^y
and aitiouyiii) ; m the admission of virgin females to the vows and riles of the cloi»-
TNTIIODUCTIOX.
i^ummari/ of Shiulariti/ ^c. S,-c. Origin of the Written Language.
ter ; in the incense, liturgies and chants of their worship ; iu their use of charms and
amulets; in some of ibeir forms of burnius? the dead, ^nd the preservation of the
ashes in urns, and in the assumption of i ho rii;ht to educate the youth." Amony
other superstitious notions i^ the one of a celestial dragon endeavouring; to devour tha
sun during; an eclijise, and their fondness for the drum, gong and rattles.
3. Customs. — The drai;on standard, banner Imces, as we find them in Chinese
Budhist temples ; eusicrns and banners stuck in a ferula, fixed at the back of a war-
rior. A Kind of heraldry, as we meftt amontj the Japanese. Some of their nuptials
were symbolized by the ceremony of tyiny; the garments of thatwo contracting par-
ties to;;ether. 'I'here was only one lawful wife, thongh a plurality of concubines.
I have already refe'red to the similarity of dress, architecture and anchors of
ships.
Physiologically considered there is not the slightest diflference between tbeso
triljes and thosv of Japan and China, and the tribes among themselves differ no more
from each other than the people of Europe of one and the same stock.
Crossing over to the Atlantic we meet with legends pointing to a northeastern
and eastern immigration. Pictures of bearded men dre here and there found, and
" figures in distress with Caucasian " features have long been preserved among the
Toltecs. Teutonic words are here and theie interspersed among the piratical Caribs,
Makusi and other tribes, and the strange proper names found among the Mexicans,
and of which there are no roots in the same tongue, indicate a very slight influence
of eastern origin, but not sutlicient to change the fundamental Asiatic character of
civilization.
The key to this would be, frequent hostile expeditions along the coast of Europe
and northern Africa being, by storm and the gulf stream, carried into tho Caribic se»,
where the few that survived, were soon absorbed by the natives. But much more
than that; we know that Irish priests arrived at Iceland as early as A.D. 793, or
more than 70 years before the Normans, and certain leaends inform us, that Irish-
men, pressed by Roman and Germanic invaders, crossed the Atlantic even earlier
than the above period and settled in Florida, where they were met with by the ad-
venturers from Iceland. They appear, however to have either been killod or been
absoided by the natives, who on one occasion seized no less than 1 00 whites, carried
them into the interior, and would have murdered them, had not another white, ap-
parently a chief, saved them. Tlie character he gave of the natives was similar to
th it later given by the Spaniards. P'rom thut time (A. D. 1G27) all intercourse
with America is broken off and the land forgotten.
Origin of the lorittan language.
When the ancient Chinese felt t!ie need of a written medium for
commnnicatiati their ideas to one anotlier, they represented them by hie-
rou-lyphics. Thiise were originally nothing but rude outlines of natural
objects, as : — O ^'^e sun. To express morning-, a line was drawn be-
neath the sun (^) indicating that the sun is above the horizon. Other
ab-ttract ideas, having reference to space, were represented in a similar
manner, as: — above_j:__, below "": .The character r^jsresen^edl by sun and
moon, put together (z)j) .si^ifies- brightness, illustration, .illumination &c.
.Ideas having reference to the mind, are expressed by the heart ; quick per-
ception, intelligence, by the ear &c. The classification of the characters
Ufider six heads, i.e., —
1. ^^ Tseung^ O'^^dj hieroglyphics, or outlines of natural objects;
2. tisC f^ 'Ka tse' metaphorical, or borrowed idea's j ^"
3. 'iB ^ 'Cui sz' significative or pointing out objects. ; I
X
INTRODUCTION.
Origin of the Wr'dte.)i Langnnge.
/
4- H -& Ui^ i^ ideogTajibic or combination of Ideas ;
5. iJH^si 'Chun cliii' antithetical or invertino; signification ; '
6 ^^ (Shing jing phonetic, or such as giving sound ; V
Ciin be reduced under two heads : hierogyphic and ideographic characters.
The former representing the radicals, and the latter the compound cha-
racters, must be well distiiigaished from words. Many radicals or primi-
tives may form one compound character ; but one or two such charac-
'ters mr^v be necessary to express one word or idea.
The hieroglyphics were, in their original form, too clumsy and im-
practicable to remain long in use, hence an artificial form was soon sub-
stituted for them,
sun, was changed into p j
i |vv] mountain into jjj .
' <s> eye into g . gij(j philosophy in all its branch<)S
was brou"'ht to bear upon the form;Uion of new characters.
The number of original hieroglyphics, now radicals, is 214. These
are however, not all simple charact-^rs, on wliich account we might even
reduce that small number considerably. Some are very complicated and
belon"" to that class of characters, which we would call phonetics,
Takin"' it for granted, that the spoken language existed before the
written, that it was as monotonous (lack of diversified sounds) and mo-
nosyllabic as it is now, the most practical question that suggests itself
to our mind is this ; What rule guided them in the formation oj the cha-
racters 7 If we are able to ascertain this, we have gained a great step
and shall find it not so ditHcult a task to remember even complicated
characters.
Character of the written language.
The 214 radicals we would call Relatives, and the primitives formed
by a combination of one or more radicals we would call Phonetics. We
must be well understood, that we only deal with those characters, which
we suppose to be the representatives of the spoken language, as it existed
at the time, when the written characters were introduced.
The phonetics were either simple or compounds, i. e. sometimes only
a single radical was required to express the monosyllabic word, whilst
again certain compounds assuming the power of phonetics.
Three piinciples guided them in the formation of characters.
1. the representative ;
2. the ideographic ; and
3. the phonetic.
1. Of tho first class tlie number is not very great. None" of the
characters of which they are composed, has anything to do with the
sound or spoken word ; f. i. rlr. tso- to sit down is composed of ^yan /v»
an, and 't'6 IL, earth. As the author could not find a form which in
mi
xr
INTRODUCTION.
Character of the Written Latujiuige.
Bound corresponded to the colloquial word tso^, he represented two raea
sitting; on the ground.
Yan* ^ to be pregnant, is composed of 7^ ^nai, to be, and 'tsz ~f*
child. None of the characters has any reference to the word yan*, but a
pregnant woman is represented as — being Avitli a child.
2. The ideograi^hic and phonetic principles are in most instances com-
bined ; but not always, f. i. mak, ^g ink expresses the idea of hakj ^^
black, and jH ^t'Oj substance=a black substance.
Yukj ^^ a prison, is composed of two ^hiin, yC dogs, and jin ^,
word, to say, to speak. The author's idea of a prison, therefore, must
have been th;it of a plnce wiiere one is constantlv annoyed as when l)er-
u'oen two dog-^, or where men holil coavcr^.iLioii of u.s vile a character as
that of dogs.
3. ^']_iH^pha,netio principle pvedominatos over every other in the for-
mation of characters. Its extensive ai)pIication almost entiile't^ tt to the
'3'esiguation of the syllabic system of the language. These syllables prove
incontesribly, that the authors of the written language emieavoured to *
invent a mode of representing the language as spoken; but combining
ideography with tliti phonetic SA'Stera, they soon found it superfluous to
Avrito for the ear, as the iJeograjjhic character iully conveyed the mean-
ing to the reader. Henfc» it came, that the language by degrees asstmi-
ed more of tlie monosyllabic character, which progressed with the ex-
tension of letters and general education.
Examples, where the ideographic and plionetic sj'stems are combined.
P'a' 'Ih to be afraid, is compcsed of pak, (Court dialect p'ah) and
heart. As the author brouglit his ])hiIosophical notions to bear on the for-
mation of the character, and that being that of a pale heart when fi-i^iht-
ened, he selected a character possessing both attributes : sound, and the
colour of a frightened man. But as paleness from p';? fright, stands in
intimate relation to the heart, he united them and thus represented idea
and sound in one word.
(Lung ^^ a hole, is composed of /\. iit, a hole, a den, and Hb J""ra
a dragon. The author considering tlui habitation of dragons to be caves,
holes, placed a dragon under shelter in a natural cave, or hole, so that by
seeing the character, one's ideas are at once associated with — a hole,
whilst Jung would remind him of the word in common use.
It would lead us too far, were we to trace this interesting, but un-
profitable, subject any further ; we wouhi, therefore, proceed to the pure
phonetics, or those characters, which rejiresent the language as it in some
parts still is, or was, once, spoken. If the student will pay strict atten- - ,
tion to the phonetics, he will find it comiiaratively easy to learn to write ||
and to remember the pronunciation of a charactei'.
Note. — Under a phonetic system we understand not merely syllables bat a
capacity of dissecting these iiito consonants aad vowels, as is impossible
with the Chinese phonetics.
xrr
TXTRODUCTIO>^.
Character of' the WriHe7i Lanf/uage. The SeUitives.
The phonetics are of a stereotype character and are composed of one,
two or more rel
at'.ves (^raiiicais;, oi
wuicii vueie aio
^i-± now iu geuciiu
use.
The IMatioes.
Formed w
ith 1 Stroke.
28. ^ 'Man
Deflected.
1. ' lat, one; unity.
29. % Yau^
Moreover.
2. 1 'Kw'an,
To pass through.
1 '
3.
Stokes.
3. 3 'Chii
A point, a lord.
4.; P'it,
A left stroke
80. P 'ITau
The moutli.
f). Z, ut,
Curved ; a horary
31- U .Ui
To inclose.
[character.
82. J-: 'T'6
Earth.
(t. ] Kut,
A barb ; hooked.
83. ± Sz^
A schohir.
2. S
trokes.
84. :^ChP
To follov/.
7. 11 i'
Two.
85. ^ ,Shui
To walk slowly.
8. ' ■ .T'au
A cover.
SO. ^ Tsik,
Evening.
9. M A'a^
1 Man.
37. i^i Tui^
Lnroe,
10. jLjYan
A man walking.
88. ix: 'Nu
Female.
11. A Yap,
To enter.
o9. y-'T^z
A child.
]o A Pat,
Eight.
40. ^ ,Min
A cover.
13. D jKwi.ng
A limit.
41. ■»] Ts'iin'
An inch.
14. ^ Mile,
To cover.
40. /h ^Siu
Small.
15. > ^Pin^
Ice.
«. ±itJL
^Wonp- distorted
10. Jl <K1
A bench.
[lame.
l'^- U <H6m
A receptacle
44. P ,Shi
A corpse.
18. 5 IJ.Tc)
A knife.
45. \yi Ch'it,
A sprout.
19- :>^ Lik,
Strength.
4(). iJj ^Slian
A mountain.
20- ^ ^Puu
To infold.
47. ^« jll li
,Ch'un A stream
21, C <pi
A spoon.
48. T ^KuMg
Work.
2i2. E Fong
A chest.
49. B ^Ki
One's self.
23. C 'Hai
To conceal.
50 ifl ,Kan
A napkin.
24. ~\- Shap,
Ten.
51. 1 (Kon
A shield.
25. |>» Puk,
To divine.
55. J^:* 'iu
Small.
20. P a Tsit
^ A seal.
53. /^ <im
Shelter, roof.
27. JT Hon'
A shelter.
54. ^ 'Yan
A journey.
xirr
INTtiODUCrrON.
T//e Jtelutives.
65. ;H' 'Kiing 'J'o join hands.
5(). ~\ Yik, An arrow.
57. ^ fK^nnf^ A bow,
58. ^"^ Kai' A swino's Lead.
59. ^ ^Shara Feathers, hair.
GO. Y Ch'ik, A short step.
4 Strokes.
01.-l\j>t/J\^,Sam The heart.
C-J. JiC <K\vo A spear.
C:3. j5 W A door.
6i. ^ 'Shau A hand.
05. ^ ,Chi A branch.
60. jfejt P^ok, AbW.
67. X^ tMan Letters,
(.58. -n '^^u -A- measure.
69. JV (Kan A catty.
70. y^ .Fong A square,
71. /L/C iMo Without, not.
72. H Yat, The sun.
73. H UC^ To speak.
74. >^ U^i The moon.
75. >K Mukj Wood.
70. :X Him' To owe.
77. ih 'Chi To stop.
73. ^:^ 'Tai Evil.
Weapons.
79. :§! ,Shu
80. fl^ iMo
81. J^fc Ti
82. % ^Mo
83. ft Sl'i^
84. -^ HP
Do not.
To compare.
Hair.
A family.
Breath.
85. :5iC'i' .>f<'Shui.
80. j/C'^'"^ 'I^o Fire.
87. jTV 4* 'Chdu Clawa.
88. 3^ Fu^ A father.
39. ^ ^Ng-iiu lo imitate.
90. 7l {Ch'ong- A Couch.
91. It P'in' A .splinter.
92. ^ »Nga' Teeth.
93. ^f" iNgau A cow.
91. ;/c ^ 'Hun A dog.
6 Strokes.
95. ^ jUn bouibre.
96. ^3E Yuk, A -em.
97. )Ik ,Kwa A melon.
98. K -Nga Earthen.
99. -y^ ,K6in Sweet.
100. i^,8h{ing To produce.
101. IB Yung^ To use.
lOG. ^ iT'in A field.
103. 7p P^at, A roll, a piece.
104. ^ -^^^"^j Diseased.
105 ^"^ ^*"^' '^'^ separate.
106. A ^'^^i White.
107. i^ .P'i Skin.
108. M 'Ming A dish.
109. @ °=°Mnk,Theeye.
1 10. '^ t^i^^i -^ spear.
m 4^ *Ch'i An arrow.
112.-5 Shek, A stone.
113 ^J^ ? ^^^^^ To admonish.
114. ft] 'Yau To creep,
no. :^cWo Grain.
116. yC Utj A. cave,
117. JJL L-^'Pi To stand up.
C Strokes."!
118. iif Chuk, Bamboo.
XIY
INTRODUCTION.
Ultc Jlelativcs.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
12G.
127.
128.
121).
130.
131
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
"^ Mai Rice.
^ ,Sz' Silk.
^ ,Fau Crockery.
^[mJli'Mong A net.
^-^ jYeung A sheep.
^M -l'^ Wing-s.
^ ^Ia> Aged.
rfn ;! And, still.
;^ Lo? A plough.
-^* 'I An ear.
^^ Lutj A pencil.
r^ >] Yuk, Flesh.
•p, iShan A minister.
lan
g Tsz^
"g* Shit
Self; from.
To extend to.
A mortar.
The tongue.
^ 'Ch'un Error.
-^ ^Chau A boat ; a vessel.
^ Kan' Perverse.
^ Shik, Color.
ljJJ|I-^^' cTs'o Shrubs.
/^ J<'u. A tiger.
^ sCh'ung Keptiles.
IqI^ Hiit, Blood.
^^ Jli^nj? To walk.
^ ^ J Clothing.
(^ i^ 'Hu To oversee ; west
7 Strokes.
^ Kin' To see.
^ Kok, A horn.
"^ Jn Words.
>^ Kuk, A valley.
M Tau^ Piilrie.
152. ^< TJh'i
Swine.
153. ^ 'Ch'i
Peptiles.
154. ^ Pui'
155. y}f^ Ch^k,
Peai'ls.
Flesh color.
156. ^ 'Tsau
To run,
157. >£ Tsuk,
The foot.
158. # ,Shan
159. $.,Kii
The body,
A carriage.
160. ^ ,San Bitter.
IGI, )^ cShan Time.
162. ^L-. Cii'c'uk, Motionv
163. a 1^ Yap, A city.
164. 1^ 'Yau Spirits.
165. ^ Piu^ To separate,
166. ^ 'Li A mile.
8 Strokes.
167. ^ ,Kam
168. ^^ ,Qh'
169. Pi ,Mun
170. -^ P Fan
Metal,
eung Long, old
A door.
^ A mound.
171. ^ Toi>
172. #. ,Chui
173. ffi ^0-
174. W ^Ts'iag
175. If ;vi
To extend to
Fowls,
Rain.
Green, azure.
Not ; wrong.
9 Strokes.
176. [:^ Min^ The face.
177. ^ Kak, Skin, hide.
178. :$ ^Wai To oppose.
179. ^, qvau Leeks.
180. g (Yam Sound.
181. Jl Ip.
The head.
1S2. M c't''»ng":
Wind.
KNTRODUCTJON.
'The lielalives. The rho?ietics. The Spohcn Lamjua'je .jr., Ac
1S:1 M cl^'i T<3 fly.
181. ^ Shik, To eat.
]8o. "§""^8)11111 The head.
180. ^^ jlleun!:^ Incense.
10 Strokes.
187. Mj OIu A horse.
188. '^ Kwat, BoH-es.
]S9. jg^Ko Ilio-h.
i:)0. Jp ,riu Lono-h;nr:
191, Pi Tan' To (luarK^l,
] Ol>. ^ Gh'eung' A trag-rant plant,
I'.'o. f^ T^ik, A tripod, urn,
104. %i 'Kwui A demon.
11 Sti'okes.
1 O.J. ^ .tJ A fish.
]0!). % rp
12 Strokes.
201.^, Wong Yellow.
'2iyi. ^ 'Sh.-i Millet.
i^O.3. P Ilak, Llack.
-^^^. lr[^ 'Ch'i To embroider.
].j Strokes.
-05. gg^ ^Min A froo-.
*30G. ^^f[ 'Ting- A tripod.
207. gj cKu A drum.
'2m. J^ 'Shii A mouse. -
11: Strokes. *
The nose.
210. ^ jTs'ai Even, correct,
15 Strikes.
211. ® 'Chi The teeth.
16 Strokes.
212. }^% Xung- A dragon.
213. H^ jKwai A tortoise.
17 Strokes.
21-1. '^ Yeukj A flute.
The Phonclics. The Spohcn language Bcprcscnted hi the Characler.
In looking into a Tonic Dictionary, one must be struck with the
Ln'u-e number ot characters, wliich when separated from their respective
relarives, retain the same sound tliey had in their various combinations,
though their components had no reference whatever to the meaning of
the word. When however, the plionetic has a signification of its own,
it frerpiently conveys the meaning of a whole sentence, and is not only
ideographic, but its components correspond also in sound to the spoken
lanu'uage.
100.
.ft '^'iu
A bird.
107.
[Ij =Lo
Salt.
108.
y^i Luk,
A deer.
100.
^ Mak,
Wheat.
200.
M .Ma
Ilcnij).
riionetie.
Verb.
,JOC 'ts=ii to take.
JjA 'ts'ii to take.
Examples.
IJchitive.
Object. Combination. ■BigniHoation
3C 'ii^' ^ female.
^ ts'ii' / ^" marry, to
( take a wile,
i£'t<uuturim. ®(s'u= f to take to you •
( hoelsj to ruu.
XVI
INTRODUCTION.
Thi^ Spolwn Lay,(/na/je h'epresmlcd hi fhe Chamcter. The rhonrtics.
^ Jcin-, capital (city) t^ jii a lisli. fi^ tk'in^
^ jC <kung to lubour. j] \i\ [with] vigour, ^/j (kung-
a capitiil fish, a
whale, the lar-
gest of mons-
ters.
to perform ac-
tions deserving
praise ; merito-
rious &c.
Xjvung to labour :5: p=ok J ^^^'^fll'^.^^^fe^kung j ^^ "^^^'^^^^ 5
' I o^t, blows ^ ^ "I assault.
to
These few examples show, that the ancient Chinese, after having
(liscar<le<l the hieroglyphics, endeavoured to represent their ideas as ex-
pressed in the vernacular tongue. The further we go to the north, or
the» nearer >ive approaoh antiquity, the greater will be the siujilarity be-
LiA-- tween the sound of the dissected character and the spoken language.
The purely phonetic system, where the sound represents the spoken
language, irrespective of <Jie meaning of the cnn-)])ound, is the most pre-
..^valent, and to this the stndent sliould pav his undivided attention,
^^"'^'^ '■■' " p,-,
Examples of^the Phonetic jlrtj jTHuig.
Add to the relative, —
-^ jkam, metal, the phonetic |^| jt'ung, andy
to \l\ ,shiin.
mountain,
do.
do.
to yK rank J,
wood.
do.
do.
to ti*cliuls,
bamboo,
do.
do.
to #, iU,
fish,
do.
do.
,'ou have copjier, ) /^
[wrilten : j ^*W 5
do. a cavern, written :i''lH) ;
do. a certain tree
do. a tube,
do. a species of fish, ,, ^pj
Examples of Jung ^g.
Add to the relative, —
M ) [phonetic •♦»-'• O •' /yu r; J
to ^ ^shau, arm, do. do. do. M ^'^^S' \ 1" , \ '!'?'
to ^ shekj stone, do. do.
to yl^ mukj tree, wood, do. do.
to "Yf cliuk, bannboo, do. do.
toif '
ear.
do. do.
do.
do.
do.
do.
^ jlung, to rub ;
tij"ng,i'^'^'18'^'"^
° ( enciosnre;
•kail
^ ilung", deafness.
Examjiles of Fu, Fuk, gg ,
the spokes
Add Ip. (Ch'6, a chariot, to I'u or fuk py iQ- you have ippj fuk, •> ^,f-., \.^.}^„,.j
XVIT
INTJ{ODUCTI0i\.
The Phonetics. iSaa'ed Aniwa/s d-c. J/iffhumt JStylf.!* of Wrilinn.
{ a roll of pa-
Add rtl J^an, a napkin, to fu or fuk @ & you have ifg fiik, i ^^^'"J'/''^''"^;
__ ( niaps L^c.
„ 7J\ shP a sig-n of heaven, do. do. do. ^ fuk, happiness.
Sacred A7iimals (fc.
Many an animal has been declared sacred by popular belief on ac-
count of its name beinf^ the same as that of happiness or prosptM-ity.
Hence a bat is a sacred being, because it is called fuk, , the same sound
and tone sifj;nifying- hapimwss. A deer is an animal bringing piosperity
to its master, because it is called lukj , a word corresponding in sound
and tone exactly to luk^ , emoluments of office ; prosperity &c. And the
sixtii day of the sixth month is, by virtue of the double liik^ (G, 6) a dpu-
bly lucky day ; aud officers of high rank, in order to derive the full be-
nefit of it, wash on that day their own clothing.
As the number of characters, that have assumed the power of pho-
netics, is comparatively small, a thorough knowledge of them is of great
value to the student, for it will enable him to remember the most com-
plicated characters without much difficulty. A stock of about 1,500,
learnt at the beginning of study, will make the recollection of the com-
ponents of a character easy, whenever (as is frequently the case with mis-
sionaries) pressure of duties compels him to leave the pen or brush un-
touched in the desk.
In a country where literature has been cutlivated in so high a de-
pree, we must expect to find various styles of writing. Though a for-
eigner has hardly any time to spend on ornamental or running-hand
\vriting, he is often called upon to discuss or name the various modes of
\vriting, on which account we here add the designations of the six dif-
ferent styles.
-, J?^^ ..,,.., ^ .- , , 5^^^ .. •, f the seal cha-
^' ^& sun' jShu, the fanciful style, or ^<-T' sun' tszH racters
2- Tf^W" **^i* n , the plain, square characters used for writing prefaces
3.t^
& 'kai ,, , the pattern style.
4. YTW il^^^^S';; ) a stiff form of the running hand.
h. Jp.^ ^tso „ , the free running hand.
6- yrvW Sung',, , elegant form of characters used in printing.
Colloquial Chinese. Verbs with certain svffixes.
Though it would as yet be very imprudent for a student of the
Chinese language to neglect the study of the written characters, as he
could not otherwise expect to exercise much influence among the edu-
cated classes of China, there is sufficient ground for the hope, that a
phonetic syatem will sooner or later supersede the present characters.
XVITI
I^TKODUCTJON.
Verbs with the Siijjic of, or Ending in, Chid j£ •
; ; ; « —
and lay the fbumi:Uioii of greater development and perspicuity of the
verniicuhr tong-ue, tjs a mediutn of coiiimiinicatinir one's idejTs.
Few verbs are used sing-ly. Some combine with words, whose mean-
ing* differs greatly from their own. We would therefore call the first
word the root, and the second its termination. Words always combining
with this latter form should be called Di.^atjllahic words with such a ter-
mination or suffix.
As this is a subject of considerable importance, upon which is de-
pending the future development, perfection, and scientific treatment of
the language, the foundation u])on which will rest the whole weight of
the possibility of reducing the ideogi-aphic characters to a phonetic sys-
tem, I have collected a considerable number of phfases illustrative of
what is here asserted.
Verlis loith the suffix of, or ending in, chi'i} ^^ .
Tap, chii* fdi' tP Sp ft^'-^lk To tread on that ground.
Mong^ chii' ko' ^t^iu W.ii.M% To look at the heavens.
'Kau chii* ^to ^nin y\ jX^^ Of man}" years' duration.
Tsam^ chii^ 'ki yat, Wft^ 9 To live there for a few days.
,Fan chii^ sz' jhoung yX^ j£ t'-ql i^^P To live separately in four villages.
jT'ung chii^ yat, cli'ii' \^\ ^iE — "J^ To live together in one place.
(Fung clui' mat, ^hoi ^'f!t '^ ^ Seal it and let it not be opened.
'Chi chii^ mi' ^hang iLTE^''~r To stop walking.
^Lau chii' ngoi^ kwok, "^ft:^!*!^ Detain him abroad.
(Kli ehii' 'pun 'kong ^it4^'/^ He lives at our estuary.
'Se chii^ ^cheung 'chi J^ jiy^^j^Ml He is writing a sheet of paper.
(Chil chu* (Chi pat, ^Mttlx^ He holds a pencil in his hand.
Ch6uk, chii' /i fuk, Mii^^^ To put on clothing.
(Yarn chu' ^pui 'tsau '^'fE^ffi To drink a cup (or glass) of wine-
Shik, chii^ 'hau ,iu ^H P ffl To smoke a puff of tobacco.
,Nim chii^ 'pa ,che tAftffiS Carry this umbrella.
jT'oi chip .slung 'kiu ^P ft SIS Carry a chair.
,Ch'ua chtf tui' jliai ^ ffi W^ Put on a pair of shoes.
Tai' chii^ kin' mh' Mftff'I'M To wear a cap or hat.
Tso' chii' 'm;i ,ch6 rI^{i.lB^ To sit in a carriage.
Tsoi' chii' fo' mat, Kft M ^'f^ To store away goods.
,Tan cliii' ch;ui^ -/""S ^^1?Ht^ W To put goods in the godowu.
'iSu chii- uiuu bhiu' ^ lEI i^J^ Luck that dour.
XIX
TN'I'IIODUCTION'.
Verbs ?vith the Sv£ix of, or Endhuj in, Chic' fji .
Jvwfin cliii^ (kai chap^ ^JTEl^lFi^ ^^^' ^^^^ n^^^ oi" barrier,
jWai chii' iSliing .ch'i U^iJii^'/lli 'i'<> siiiiound or besiege a city.
'81iau chii^ ,yi»g clu'ii* Tt'rEl^'5^ '^'^ giianl or hold an encanipmeiit.
,\\';ln clui' t(V ,t'au \iiH.dM"f\ To anclior at the ferry or laiidiiij;
pUico.
Sak, chii' .In'ini,' ,k'ii ^ftiiuiSf To stop nj) a sewer.
,Lan chii^ to^ 16* tt^ftMK^ To obstruct the road.
;i ang cbii' sh5' muk, SfiMH Put it to account, To keep an
account.
Tuk, chii' kok, ba^ ®ft [I3T To live alone in the lower story.
Knng^chii^lau sheung^ ^ftl#_t To live tog-ether in the upper story.
,Li'a chii' noi* ng-oi* iSftp^J^hTo connect the inner and outer
part.
Kap, chii* "leung- ,piu 3feftS^ To pass on both sides.
Kak, chii* ^chung ,kun ftS'fE^^ (^ Partition it.
'Cho chii* 5\vong ,-loi |>fl^fil:y|^ To prevent [people from] passing'
and repassing.
Kan' chii* ch^it, yap, l^'^pLj/V To follow when going out or com-
ing in.
Ku' chii* jts'iu hau- ^, j£ liHl ix ^'^ reflect upon the past and future^
Kan* chii* 'tso yau* ifillES:^ To stay close to a person.
^On chii* ^man ,sam ^j^S-'Ci' To pacify peoples minds.
sNa chii* ts'ak, ^fi :^^MII To apprehend robbers.
Tuk, chii* sz' tsut, ^ft i ^ To lead out troops.
Ch'ap, cbii* ling* tsin' ^U^^ijTo stick the Emperors command
on the back of an officer.
Tai' chii* ^pi'ng 'yung ^ii:^-^ To lead on troops.
'Ch'e chii* ,t'iu ,shing ^|if^/^ To haul a rope.
/r^ing chii* ,ch'e Jun ix^tE^llfl To stop a carriage or cart.
'P'5 chu- jhoi X ffift^52» To carry babies.
Chap; chii- chek, ^shau ^fi^'^ To seize one by the hand; to shake
hands.
'Im chii- ^sht'ung *nguu l^'f£ 5^HPv To cover the eyes.
Hit, chii* tsoi* 'ts'z SJCft^ltt Stop here.
llitj chii* ^shau MXii~r* To rest from work.
Kir, chii* 4iau mft P To be still, to stop eating-.
XX
IXTROPITCTION.
Vcrbx Endlmj in ^hi '/tS ^'^ B<se.
'Seunjj 4ii ^,® To think on,
Ki' „ ^u j> j> recollect, to remember. To call to mind,
Ts.-lcj „ 'iP ,, „ do., to act, to make ; to compose.
Tso* „ :tsx „ do., do., do.
tCluiu „ W^ „ ,, copy.
'Se „ ^ „ ,. write.
Tso' „ rl^ „ „ sit down.
*K'i „ "^h „ ,' Ptand, to stand erect.
Jv'am „ Wii „ » Ipfin over (half standing-).
jT'iii „ jplh „ „ le.ip, to jump.
,Nim „ ici v „ take up with the fing-ers, to carry.
<T'iu „ r1t„ „ take up by the end of a'stick and fling away.
jToi „ 4H „ „ carry fas a chair).
^Tam '„ ^'tf „ „ carry on a pole accross the shoulder.
^Konfi- ,, iflC ,. „ carry on a pole between two.
KwiV ,; lip „ ,; suspend, to hano- up.
Chap, „ ^z „ „ take in the hand, to take up.
^T'o „ 4ifl!/ »> M take up a child from the g-round.
*I<i V T^^ »j » stir, to stir up.
Tiu' ,, ^^) „ „ tie up, to pull up to a beam as m^n when
tortured.
<L:iu „ W' ,y „ hand up ; to take up.
,Pau „ cl », „ enwrap, to envelop..
Tsoi' „ m „ „ fill, to fill up.
,Chong „ ^ „ „ store; adorn.
«Kaa ,, 1^ » >j elect, to choose, to select.
Ap, ,, •j'T » V seize ; to apprehend.
'So „ S^ ,, „ lock, to chain.
'Ch'e ,j tt ,. „ haul, to drag.
'Lo „ ^^§_ „ „ annoy.
I'^at, „ ^^U „ „ brush, to wipe, to dust.
'Kon ,, X^ „ fy persne, to run after.
'Yam „ -pj „ „ drink.
jTui ,, i"^ „ ,, heap up, to pile up.
xxr
INH^^ODUCTION.
Verbs ending hi '■hi ^E .
'Pmig- 'li^ ^^ To hold in the hand.
sShfiig- „ 1^ „ „ ascend, to mount ; to avail of.
'Kiin „ f^ ;, „ roll up (as a screen).
^SuE „ 3II >> yy select, to choose out.
*Tsau „ ^ „ „ run, to hasten.
Kai' „ gy „ „ count, to recou up.
'To „ '^J „ ;, pour out ; to overturn.
*Ta „ ^ „ „ finish, to work, [as in gold, silver &c.]
Ch^ik, „ f^ „ „ startle, to recollect suddenly.
^P'au „ J0^ „ „ throw up, (as a ball in a game).
sFft „ -JTC „ „ assist, to aid, to help up, when fallen down.
'Pong „ ^ „ „ tie, to bandage.
Wd* „ ^^ „ „ speak, to speak oitt, to tell.
_ ^s. J.
'Kong „ i4^ „ „ discourse on, to converse, to narrate.
Pat, ,, ^PC J J ?) pull up; to extirpate.
(Kau (^nau) „ W^ „ „ pull up hy a hook ; to raise, as an anchor.
Wat, „ ^Xi n ;? scoop out, to excavate.
^Ch'iii „ w^ ,, „ pare off, to lop off; to make a hole in the
ground.
Shii^ „ ;^ „ „ erect, to raise (as a standard).
,Ch'apj „ iW ?j ,) insert, to set in ; to thrust into (as a flag
staft).
(Shing ,, 7i 71 7> complete; to raise.
(Shau „ ^% „ „ collect ; to put away as clothing, when not',
nsed.
Ch'au „ ^ „ „ take from ; to lift; to draw out.
T'ik, „ &^ „ „ kick.
^Wan] „ ^ „ „ draw, to pnll up.
,Tau „ ^ „ „ To lift up.
Tai' „ S| ,, ^^ carry, to wear.
*Kii ,, :^ ,, „ raise, to elevate.
*Tiug „ 1^ „ n carry on the head, or top of a thing.
XXII
INTRODUCTION.
Verb.s cndi)},] in 'hi t^B, iHidc, ^P, tb' ^ij and 'to fU .
,Me 'hi |t® To carry on the back; to carry a child pick a pack.
,Ch'6 „ ^^ „ „ pull up, as a flag-.
(I^j'ii „ IS ji 'J l^sli, to whip (as a horse).
Verbs ending in k'cuJc, ^P.
cMongk'euk,TS^'P To iorg-efc.
^^t, „ ^. „ ., do.
^T^r.i „ tffi >• ;> refuse.
sTs'z „ ^ ,; ,, declioe, as an office; to refuse.
I^'^'t, „ IM " ?' P"sh away.
,P^au J, fM yj ). throw away.
'Kam ,, i/:|jj „ „ diminish, to substract : to abbreviate.
^^''^-ii ,, 1^ >j >5 .remove all.
Mat, „ <7/} „ Not allow one to decline an invitation.
,Sam „ ii^ „ To di:^like, to feel averse to.
'^''' " JL " " disdain, to complete and put away
Feros ending in tb^ ^ij .
cChi t6^ ^JI^lJ To know.
Ill' " S* ^> J. estimate, to reflect, to find out
" _SL " " ^^^'^j <=o transmit.
" ?^ " " ^^^^X to bring- or take to [a certain place.]
-^ " Is " " ''''''"^' ^^ ^"'■'''•
• ''^' » m „ „ fear, to be afraid of.
Ngan „ BR; „ ^^ i-each with your eves.
ouau „ -f- ^^ ^^ i.gacii ^-(.j^ y^jj^. ijjjjj^ig^
cChui „ g ^^ ^^ persue, to catch, to reach,
s 00? 'J 15^ „ „ provide, or to guard against.
Verls ending in Ho ^j^.
'T5 M is almost always a termination of the perfect tense.
If the Pronouns :^^ «no-o T f^ 'm' m- YH n f- x i /■
XXIII
IXTRODUCnON.
Verbs en/ling in '■to 'plj and ch'ut^ [ij
I'ak, 'to ^t'in W f^^^l ^"F ^^^ 8'°* ^^"^ whole emi)ire.
Kwai^ „ pai' ^shan ^fil^'y^-i^W ^^^ knoels down to worship the
spirits.
jMin „ ,ch'ong shcung^ 0A;'^Jj[?k Jt To bo sleeping on the bed.
Tso^ „ 'kin 4u :3£ jJPJI'i^^ „ be seated in a sedan.
'Ta „ jshing jch4 'fTijlJ'^jyi „ have reduced a city.
PcV „ p'au' ^t'oi Jl'ffil^fi^ „ have seized upon a fort.
<.'bukj „ ts'akj 'fi •t^^JHSgE „ have arrested a criminal.
Yam^ „ch;W,fono- %M^M ,, have rented a godown.
aVing„4bpuu^ BB#j50'f^ „ have got a partner.
^Alai „ fo' mat, ^''^Ji}^ „ have purchased goods.
Fat, ,, tai^ jts 01 "&» 1^J /C MT „ have made much money.
Kii' „ shii^ mukj ^ffl&J^ „ have sawed a tree.
'J'sokj „ yuk, sheK, ^^Wi ^5 „ have ciit a gem.
Kwat, „ ,kara ,sha ^#lj^# „ have dug for gold.
Tit, „ tsoi^ ti^ ^^J^li^lii =, have fallen to the ground.
,Cii'ui „ lokj 'shui ^#]-J§^7K ^lown iuto the water.
'Hi „ /a jiin ^"^J IzWl 1'<> have made a flower garden.
-Ivi „ Joi 't'ai dcfl/l^iif^ „ have raised one's self to look.
^Tin „ shi" ,fi ?^i^!lji) 'T£^ „ confound right and wrong.
KiiV ,, ku ii ^T"T&jP{illlM ,. have called coolies.
Tsip, „ -shii sun' "WlM ^ip „ have received a letter.
'Lo ,, jkan suan ^^j^J^i^l^ife „ have earned nothing buc
trouble ; to l.iave brought
one's self into trouble.
Verbs cndhiq in ch'ut^ [ij.
Ts(r client, jUian ,ch(''r.ng ^i'iiv tU jX-^ '^^ compose an essay.
'Sc'ung „ 'hokai^ SjliMlt „ invent (originate) a good
piau.
SSe .„ ,san ,rann ^fljij^lffrB ,, write out some news.
Fat, „ 'haucleung iStilPrt n tl^sin-ibute provisions (la-,
tions).
^Ying „ young' seung'UtliMi'H „ reflect a true image, to
tiike a jtliotograph.
'Kong „ to^ -If oi^itM^^M ,, discourse ou doctr' ').
XXIV
INTROBUCTION.
Verbs ending in ch'nt, pj and hli^ ^^
*Sliam ch'ut, jts'ing- sjau
Tai'
'Tsau
Chuk-
'Sau
(pmg -ma
jTnun 'liau
jli^n jjan
& fid
® Hi tra i "^^ fi^<^'l out the cause of an affaii-_
4^ f {4 :^i^ ';> ^^^•^ out troops.
,, run outside.
„ expel (drive out) idlers.
,, discover vag'abonds,
„ find out stolen property.
mmmm
L5^ ch^itj (Sz sz^ ifea-stj-^J^^ '^o divulge secrets.
Tsb^ch'utj hi' ^mengiS jii^iSL To make or invent a?'ticles used in
worship or eatinjz- &c.
Mai^ ch^ut, fo' mat, K Hi ^4^7 To sell goods.
Other words now indefinitely floating among the confused or be
wildered masses, would form prefixes of dissyllabic or trisyllabic words
Examples.
jFan (Shang ^iliE ^o revive, to come to life again.
jPan hiP ^^^ ;; I'eturn.
,Fan 'chiin ^t'au S?^4R ;; ^o-
jTan hii' ,kwai Hillj ?> return home,
[ij-pj „ marvel, to be surprised at.
\j\ ^ „ come out or forward.
pj ^ „ let (as a house).
E fT >' t^'^6 ii walk.
PI Wt y> scheme, to plan.
Ch'ut, jk'i
Ch'nt, cloi
Ch'utj yam^
Ch'ut, chang
Ch'ut, kai'
Lok,
cT'oi
/Kwai
Tifi^
Tai'
,run
jKw'ui
'Shai
hii'
Verh"- terminati'ug in hit -^,
?"^ To descend.
i^ jj „ cf.i-ry to.
Ultj „ „ return. ^
PM h V transfer.
^ „ „ bring to, to carry away.
1^ „ „ move to (or away).
•f/^ „ „ carry to ( do. ).
^ ,y „ sail to ( do. ).
XXV
INTRODUCTION.
Verbs ending in hii -^ .
1
hli'
7<; -^
To move to.
Patj
7J
i^ „
„ pluck up.
Cli'ut,
7?
MJ ,'
71 yo ont.
Yap,
J»
A„
,, enter.
Kon
}>
><Ei; 77
„ expel, to pursue.
.Hoi
'>f
r«J„
77 g-o to.
;M:u
})
*i;,
„ resort to.
cFi
7>
fll!„
77 fly away.
T-iu'
V
ii„
„ ju.mp off.
Tse^
V
#.,
„ lend.
■Kwrd
>)
«„
„ decoy, to kidnap.
T'ok,
)>
=^-t.
„ carry on the shoulder
'Wdn
}•
i^„
„ carry oh the arm.
,Vm
?>
«..
,, push away.
Kwatj
>?
Sfj ,.
„ scrape off.
Chukj
»
51 „
„ expel, to drive out.
"iva
J?
m„
„ take off",
Tut,
?5
'U-iC >7
„ sweep off".
St'ukj
»
tL,
„ })are.
Fat,
»
«.
„ dust.
So'
>J
fer „
,, sweep.
Mut,
;>
^1^ V
„ wipe.
P-'it,
'>
m „
„ clean off".
Kwatj
?'
M,.
„ dig out.
Jvan
7'
m,.
„ follow.
jHang
/?
n„
„ depart.
Tsoi'
7'
^ ,,
,, contain.
Kwo'
7;
M 7.
„ pass over.
,Koag
•7
te„
„ carry.
Fong'
>7
:SSc„
77 let go.
Ok^lt,
77
»„
„ take away.
K?
77
W V
„ send off,
Kip,
77
*5„
„ rob.
^Tsau
J7
^ 77
„ run away.
XXVI
INTRODUCTION.
Verbs emliny in hit -^
\±.-\-
^Chong hii^ %ci: '^^ P^'^^ ^M^
->/^j»
jTs'ia „ l^lj „ V forward, to advance.
Chukj „ i£ „ ,, arrest.
'Ts'ing „ wP3 „ „ be invited.
'Wui „ Wi „ „ destroy.
,Me „ RT '> j; carry on the back.
Kiik, „ ^ „ „ dismiss, to degrade.
,Cliui „ M V » persue.
'Ts'eung- „ ^ „ ,, snatch away.
,Nim „ tfS „ „ carry away.
jNci „ W- V V take to.
,T'au „ iwi ;> » stolen.
Ch'ak, „ ^ „ „ break up.
Kiu' „ f^4 V 'J call away. ,
cTs'ia „ S „ „ move to.
'P'aii „ ^ „ „ race.
'^Sheung „ _t „ j, ascend.
^Tam ,. tM '7 » carry away.
jPan „ ^^ ,. „ return, to go away from,
jCh'u „ ^ „ „ deduct.
Sung' „ 5^ „ „ send to, to accompany one.
,Ch'ang „ ^ „ „ pole.
cT'o „ ^ „ .; ^"li''^^^^ to drag.
jT'o „ 3S j; V abscond.
Fi'?'Z/5 ending in vuU ^Rg .
Ts'iit, ^xn(\\ -lii^C^M To abbreviate, to curtail.
,Sh:in „ P^ „ „ sbut up.
'Iin „ im „ „ close.
SShinng „ _h „ „ put up, lay up.
Jvwan „ Ffl „ „ bar, to lock up.
,L6 „ W » >> i"ix-
Wan^ , Ji^ )' ?? •"i'^'> to lluow into confusion.
,T'in „ i^ „ „ fill up-
XXVII
INTRODUCTION.
Verbs cjidhtg in mdi J^i
Chap, sinui W:)^^ To pick up.
J Hung „ ff ,, „ get aside.
^'L'i „ ^^ „ ,, stand aside.
Tso^ „ ^l „ „ sit by.
]''aii' „ ^pj „ „ sleep with, or close to.
,Lai „ ^j^ „ „ pull away.
,iMu ;> ^ jj V wl'f^P up-
,Niru „ :;pj^ „ „ take away.
*'''^^ ;j tSI >, „ put away.
,Siiau „ ||5C ,, ,, store away, to preserve.
sTs'iia „ ^ ,, ,, preserve.
'Chii „ ycf „ „ store up.
1".~,ik, „ ^^ „ „ accumulate.
*Ki'iu „ U „ „ twist.
Oi'iin' „ ^ „ „ connect with, to string- together.
*Kon „ Xta; „ ,) force one into one's plan ; to leave no
way of escajje.
jT'iin „ '1^ „ „ collect into one, to make one lump of it.
^Pong „ ^^ „ „ tie up.
sT'oi „ to » '7 carry aside.
^Tui „ i# „ ;, heap up.
,T'iii „ t6^ „ „ push aside.
'Pi „ i$ n ;; gi^e all.
^K^ai „ ik „ „ keep.
Hup, „ "n „ „ join together,
^Ch'e „ "T^ V V close,
jChai „ -p^ „ „ put aside.
Chip, „ \% „ „ fold up.
sT'ung' „ fSJ ,, Tog-ether with.
j.nn
'Pai „ fiu „ To put away.-
(K"^ciu „ f ^ „ „ mix with.
P'ak, „ ^*P ,, „ put closa.
Tso- ,, is „ „ finish.
XXVIIT
INTRODUCTION.
Verbs ending m mat
Pile, cTHiii JtM.-^ J? Pi'<^ss upon,
Yriung^ „ ^ „ „ give up ; to yield.
Chnn^ „ SS ,. „ gain all.
Sliing^ „ ^U „ „ save [to leave over).
^Lam „ YMi „ „ g'-'^^sp.
^Ch^ang „ ^^ „ „ shore up.
Pang^ „ 1^ „ „ lean upon.
Kifi' „ ^H* ») » call together, to assemble.
Talc, „ ^^= „ „ get the whole.
sTs'ong „ ^ „ „ conceal.
jWau „ "ft „ „ anchor.
So' „ m „ „ sweep.
'Tang „ ^ -,, ,1 wait together.
^Li'm „ f^ „ „ gather.
PiV „ ^ ,; „ encroach.
'To „ fl? .; „ hideaway.
'Tsau ,, ^ V V run away.
,Kira „ 3ft „ n P^it in together.
,Clui „ @ ,y V g'l^asp.
Shukj „ ^fS „ „ contract, to shrink, to cuddle up.
Chu' „ ii. ,, „ live with.
T'ikj ,, i^ „ „ put things in their proper places.
Yap, „ A '> V P"<^ i^-
Ki'pj ' „ ^ „ „ clasp.
'Kiin „ f^ „ „ roll up.
,Ai „ f^ „ „ lean upon.
jLiin „ ^ ,, ^, unite.
(Tau „ Ynl '> jj get the whole,
P^it, „ 1^ „ „ collect together.
,T'au „ fifl) „ „ obtain loy theft.
Verhs Terminating in J,oi tJ^ to come.
'So dof 58^ To write.
.ChViu „ O ,., „ copy.
XXIX
INTRODUCTION.
Verbs ending in Jot.
,Nim Joi tfi^ To bring".
/ram » 'TH " " cany (on a pole accross the shoulder).
jT'oi » -JO " J' cany (between two).
Chun- ,» f? " ;> I'ovv.
Cbuk, ,7 •wc " V seize.
Chakj „ li§ V .V pluck.
^Lo }, ^^|| V jy t'etcli, to o-et.
^T'o „ ^^ ') „ diag- alono-.
^Senng „ ^ » „ meditate.
-Miii „ fl " " purchase.
^Ch'an^ „ ^ „ „ pole (a boat).
'Ts4ng •, 1^ 5' 'J iuvite.
Ti'iP n *r^ V >7 bring.
Ki' >, ^f >> ;' send (to have received).
-Shuung ?» Jl » >5 ascemi.
-Hj^ v \^ " >> descend.
Ch'ut, »; p4 " ?> come ibrth, or out.
'Fun '> -^M >' " return.
TIang V i^ }> 7j come, to approach.
Lokj >} yig- '? ?' come down.
'Hi V ^ 57 " rise.
'Tsau J? ;^ >.< » run.
'Kon }' ^ V '; persue.
^She " pjK " " buy on credit.
Chun- V iM " " niake money in trade.
Sung' )} i^ V V make presents, or bring- with,
,Kong V iX " " carry.
'Shai r ft '? " sail.
'Sing „ §t^ „ „ awake.
Tsoi' ») ^ j> >; contain, to store.
'Fau » ^B " " gallop.
rhmses slowing the use oj Verbs terminating in Joi ^f^.
'Se -ho Joi TfiKf^ To write nicely.
XXX
INTRODUCTION.
Fhra.se.s shonnm/ the use of Verbs ending in Joi.
'Seunir ^chan Joi ^,^^ To consider thoroughly.
Ch^an' ^li' v ^t^ " " come at this time.
'Koii 'kau „ ^^ ?> " ^'6 in hurry.
Fong' chak, „ ^"[pj] " ;" P^t on one side.
Tung^ %4 „ ^^ " " P^'ice it erect.
,Cha shatj jj JSW " " ^^^^^ ^^ ^''^^^•
Tso- 'wan j> :^^^ ?' " sit down safely, to be firmly seated.
'Tsau'hi ;, ^^ » r »"""•
Tan 'chiin >. lEft " " *^"'^ thing's over.
cHang-Sheung » ffJl " " '^'^"^^ "P*
^Ha hii' - „ ~P^ v ,7 '''>"i^ down.
,Punyap, v ^A " " move inside.
'Lo ch'ut, .J tUtli " " ^"''''^'^ ^^^^•
Kiu= ^kHi V ^4tS '» " call him.
,Ivan -ng-o ;, S^^ >j ;; ^(Jll^w' ii^e ; to come with one.
'Shaicvan „ f$A ?' „ send a man.
liV sun' V Wi^ " " ^^^^'^ ^ letter.
jOhui to' }> :x^^i] }} 'J I'each or obtain by persuit.
'Ts'eung; 'to „ |^f^j >> ?? have obtained by robbery;
'Ch'ui ching-' ;, ^iE ?? >' P^'t things aright.
^Chong- ,ch'a „ ^^ ;> '> P'^t things in wrongly.
Sat, 'san >, ^fjcl^ » v «et things loosely.
,Fan Jioi v ^IM " " ^^i^itle, to separate.
Tit, lolc, „ ^^ „ „ fall down.
^Sliai jnai „ I^^H „ „ sail to.
'Ching- ting^ ;, ^>£ j? m have things ready.
^Ts'ui chii^ j, fSft " " P^"*^^^' *° constrain, to hurry.
sC'ha k'ok, >, S^ " " examine thoroughly.
'Tim cheuk, „ '^'p^^ >> " lij^'lit it up.
'Ta sun' ;/ ^T^ v » calculate.
^ISlim.ts'ai „ "^^7^,, „ bring- together.
'Mai tak, „ ^ ^^ „ >> obtain by purchase.
Yu^^manhak, 1[^'.y(EM Evening. Night.
XXXI
INTIiODUCTIONT.
Defect of Ihc hi^si Dictionar)j. The learned not always the popular men.
The preceiliu;;' «xiiupl3s wiii suliicij r,o iudicute the way, which will
lead to au intelligible phonetic language. If a ruler as intelligent as
Kanglii could be induc(!d to appoint a commission of three or four men in
each province, to classify the verbs according to their prefixes and suffixes,
to make a collection of the com])oiinds of nouns and other parts of sneech
to have books written witii this newly arranged material and iutrod-
duced into the schools, — one generation would be sufficient to ojjen the
eyes of the leained and to convince them of the benefit the nation mu»t
derive from a phonetic sys^^em, which men and women could ac(|uire
within tlie short time of a couple of months.
The sentences which I have collected, are constantly on the tongue
of the natives, and I am sure, will he known to most foreign scholars of
the Chinese language. But, how many persons use them in tbeir daily
conversation? Very few indeed; and such as do, do so perhaps twice,
Avhen a native, speaking to his country men, would use them ten tiiu.3S.
Were we to look into *Dr. Williams' Dictionai'y and select all the com-
Linations of the class of which I have given examples, we should hardlv
find 20 per cent of them.
As Dr. Williams' Dictionary is by far the best that has ever been
publislied in Chinese, and yet contains so small a percentage of the com-
mon colhxpiial, need we then wonder at the constant cry over the diffi-
culty of the Chinese language ? ! More than 50 per cent of what scholars
learn is not'current colloquial ; hence they talk to the poor and ignorant
and are not understood, not because the}^ cannot read and write works in
the Chinese language, but because they never assenibleit around the hi-e-
place, where father, mother and children open their hearts unrestrainedly
and convei-se in a tongue, which will give to future generations the ma-
terial for a polished and intelligible vernacular.
This conviction which has forced itself upon my mind as often as I
have sat among a group of native men, women and children, I can no
longer conceal. Profound Chinese scholars, who are all the year round
sitting" with a loquacious teacher, who almost knows what they mean to
sa}' before they have expressed half their ideas, have frequently sneered
at the idea, that the (jhinese languag-e could ever be reduced to a nhono-
tic system and that the ideographic characters could bo dispensed with.
I^ut could they ever hold easy converxation with an uneducated native?
I frankly declare they could not ; and during the last war we had an
instance of a firstrate scholar of the Chinese language having to give the
])recedence to a neophite, a novice in the Mandarin dialect, because the
learned man could hardly talk "vith any body but his teacher.
Thei-e is another feature of the Chinese colloquial requiring to be
pointed cut. Certain words, like the English verb to get, pass cha melon-
like through the language, meaning to strike, to buy, to extract, to ojien,
by &c., and are frequently heard in very vulgar or common colloquial.
As e. g. 'mai -mai, to purchase rice, would to the ear be almost tar.tology,
the Chinaman substitutes 'ta to strike, for to jiurchase. As such idionuitic
peculiarities are frequently met with, I would here add nearl}^ 130 sen-
XXXII
INTRODUCTION.
Examples of ike use of 'id, to strike.
l^
tences with Ha, to strike, as another illustration of the g-reat difference
between the written stvle and the colloquial.
Examples of the use ofHd ^J to stiihe.
tT®M To grit the teeth.
>, dvefs.
» phiit the cue.
; walk. To come hv land.
*Ta ngit, 'c\\'i
U-
»-■ pun-'
•' (?'"
,. 16^ jloi
J. tsing- shikj
,) timg-
„ t'iim'
'» 'ching
,> '^h jt=au
» ti^ (P'o
„ jCh^ang
>, 'sheung-
„ kau'
,, fat,
» ch'nt, jHgan
» siin^
J' ting^ 'chii i'
„ '\i
„ (kun ^fu
» (kun (Sz
>, J an
J. ^hai 'cheung
» (P'o k^oi'
» (Shii fp'i
j» 'nau
J. 'nan '£
» chi'ii'
» (fa
J. 'tsai
» kau^
le-
1^^
f?
» eat rice without seasoning.
„ move.
» spy out.
„ mend.
» cheat. To practice usni'y.
>, sleep on the ground.
„ lean upon.
» reward.
» save (rescue) one.
„ dispatch.
„ pay the costs of a hiw suit.
„ calculate, to reckon.
,3 have come to a resolution.
„ manage.
,> summon one.
do.
» force one to write an order for money,
» sole shoes.
» make the bed.
» bind a book.
,> sew on a button.
„ make a button hole.
>, fix the price.
» pay debt in kind.
,, get (seek) flowers,
>, [ilant.
„ make an estimate, to make a sketch.
XXXIII
IKTliODUCTION.
Examples of the use of^td, to strike.
Til ko' kit, tlfllo ^ o "li^l^e a Imtton.
„ sok, » y^ » make robes.
» sDgti » 1!^ » extract a tooth.
„ ^mai » /^ " purcliase rice.
» ^shi „ tp » g'o to the market.
„ 'kill jloi „ ^^ „ come by chair.
» mai^ {nv}) „ pMi " give a riddle to guess.
„ ,tang- mai^ » !^p^ » guess a riddle, that is written on
» hiim' lo^ „ P^^l- " gape, to yawn. [a lantern.
» makj lo^ „ ^m " do.
» (ts6 „ i^E M wear coarse stuff.
„ jfan ftsz „ ^MJ^ » sneeze.
» p^an^ t^ai' „ P^^ » do.
-■ hak, ^ch'i „ ff£g| „ do.
» Ian* „ 7;^ „ break.
» sui' „ ^ „ smash.
» p'o' „ ^t " split ; to open by force.
» (Pang „ J3 „ break like glass.
» ^chiin „ ^p. » turn over things.
„ 'pin „ ^ » beat flat.
„ cp'ing » ^ » level.
» flit, „ ^ " let fall.
„ cch^am ,shun „ i)£llS " ^^"^ ''^ ^^^1'-
„ 15' so' " niake dirty, to soil.
,. ch4k, mok, » ^^J » take ofi:' one's clothing.
„ (hoi ^mun „ ^j f 1 " open the door.
» (ko yeuk, „ '^^ „ a\)\dy a jdaster 01' ointment.
,fui jShii „ J^ij^ " nitike a chunam floor.
„ shekjcWOjCh^eung „ '^/^^^ >> make a threshing floor.
„ 'shui „ TJC » <li'iw water.
„ 'fo ,> ^^ » strike lire,
„ chenk, To » iS.*^ " ^^o.
» u 'fo » j^ij/'C " extinguish fire.
XXXIV
INTRODUCTION.
Examples of the vfte of Ha, to strike.
'Til shek, -fT-S A stone cutter.
» cDg-an ^sz fu- » ^^^rfJlW -^ master silver smitli.
chekj cUg'an ^hiin » "^^j^ To make a silver ring- for tlie neck.
To cleanse cotton.
A black smith.
To ring- the bell.
„ tune an intrument.
>, beat the gong-.
j> play at cards.
do.
„ perform mass.
do.
„ play a comedy,
5. forge.
„ engage or induce by presents.
A pilferer 5 a thief.
To live like a parasite.
A beg'gar.
To commit onanism.
Boisterous weather.
Gentle N. W. wind.
A game.
To feel the pulse.
» paint one's lace. ..
do.
„ strike some body.
„ strike,
„ wound.
» strike so as to occasion swelling'.
„ jmin (f4
.. m,i^
» t'it,
-m
„ jChung
„ ^
„ sin'
..'m
„ Jo 'ku
„ ^s^
„ 'chi jpSii
,.mm
„ ,f in 'kau
..^%
„ tsiu'
"il
„ ^ch^ai
•■*!•
„ Y^ hi'
-mm
„ jwang- '^shau
■■m=f-
„ pui' 'shau
..'jt^
„ pakj chong^
.. eii
» fan- (ts'un
.. mM
» (tsau (fung
„ 'shau ch^ung'
..^^
„ ^ftmg p6^
..a*
„ (Sai pak,
.. Bi:lti
„ cUgau jf^ai
.. 4-Jf
:.. mak,
.. «
„ 4an
" 'K'
„ min-
" &il
» cyan
..^A
^Au 'tvi
K^T
'TA, jSheung"
tHi
» 'chung
.. M
s'M kau' -k^u Hi'i
Pg^tElT
T/w'm^to
tTPg'fi]
„ 'shau 'ohenng
.. ^-»
„ yat, fpu ^cheung
..-Ci^
Not hit it.
To give one a blow with the hand.
A slap of the hand.
XXXV
TNTRODUCTION.
E.miiipirs of the use of'ta, to strike.
^T:i ^sz jjan meng-^ -J^Atfi To kill one
(Scung Ha
'Ta ,kuu
» ,ku%
« elieung-
» tP (foug-
» eying
J, ,sliii
par
Tu Ho 'ho ,to ,t4u ,lian tl^j jf ^ flS^S '^o flog one until it leaves
„ Hsui ^pa fTP^Q To box one's mouth. [maiks.
„ t(V chHit, hiit, „ ^IJlijilfL Tc strike one until the blood runs out*
Pin Hu ^.TT Jo whip one.
'Ta ^sz tr^ To kill one.
# Tc
3'0 'fT To stiike one another.
tr^ To fight.
» 1§^ To fight (civil war).
„ f^t To fight (general war).
" %>V* To invade a territory.
" Wii To g'ain a victoi-y.
„ ^fiij „ suffer a defeat.
„ J4 " tlo.
f^tr^ffiii The boxing master.
'iTT^Si To cane one.
„ |p| To discharge a gun.
" ^^t* To throw shmg stones.
» JS-'frflM To commit high wny robbery.
,, ^ do.
» ^fl X. To commit burglary • to surprise villages.
» ^P f^ To commit highway robbery.
„ "W To go a fishing,
» 'TjC " thresh.
» mt " go a hunting.
» "^■^'' Jth To go a tiger hunting.
" H.$,^ " sliont birds.
„ ZL. To labor for wages.
„ 9f^ „ row. • .
„ iilS- To wlieel about.
„ IS^f!] " turn about madly.
-^i- To wedge in.
make an obevsance.
>, jkHin
Kuu' H^i ,sz fu^
^Ta kwan'
„ p'i'iu'
» /i ,t'o
„ ki'mg^
5, jming '^fo
„ keukj kwat,
5> rWO
» lip,
» %'fu
» fs'^eukj -fliu
-^ >, (kung
» Hseang
» ^fan jcli'^e
>, ftin 'to
„ ,tsiin
J' kunu-
XXXVI
INTRODUCTION.
Ortliography .
To reduce tbe Canton dialect to a simple, phonetic system, has been
a subject of considerable discussion among- the junior students of the
Chinese lang-uag-e ; and the different modes of spelling show, that as yet
few have agreed ou that point. This diversity is in a great measure
owing to the lack of a comprehensive, practical mind, able to look beyond
the few years of his own existence ; but no less to a disinclination to
make a few concessions to a rival and to sacrifice one's own preconceived
oi)inion to better counsel, having for its aim the interest of the less
instructed and less talented of the native and foreign students. But we not
iinfrequeutly find that the greatest stumbling black in the way of a per-
fect agreement is the fJict that men make it a matter of Convenience : —
Englishmen will write according" to the pronunciation ef their own lan-
guage (if there is such a thing as a general rale); the French will follow
theirs, &o. So long as they write for their private use only, not much is
lost to others or to themselves ; but when they present the results of their
labour to the public, matters stand quite differently. As public men
sent out for the extension of science and civiliation, they should study
simplicity, should analize every sound and represent it, as much as
possible, by simple vowels and consonants, or at least by such diacritical
marks as might save future generations from the scandal of spelling tis
many now too frequently do amongst the lower classes of England, France,
Germany, and the United States of America. They should above all
fiiithfully represent the essential points of the various dialects of China,
such as are the tones and aspirates, or give no pronunciation at all. For
it is much better to leave the student of the Chinese language to himself,
than to misguide him by an assumed authority, and to induce him to
peisue a course of study which he afterwards, perhaps when too late,
regrets, v.'hen health and other circumstances may not allow him to
retrieve his lost ground.
A Standard Alphabet, such as has been proposed by Professor Lep-
sius is a great desideratum in the newl}' opened countries of tlie far East,
and we should have adopted it, had we not a dictionary now in general
use by the students of this dialect, the orthography of which is so simple
iliat it will not soon be superseded by a better one. The only defects of
Dr. Williams' orthography are the use of the U to represent three, the
E two sounds, and th:it he requires a diacritical mark to express the
broad sound of the diphthong ai. The ii should be represented by the o ;
the e by the a; the ai by the ei ; and the ai by the ai.
Having in the present work strictly followed the orthography
adopted by Dr. "Williams, I will here add his system, as exhi])ited in the
table p.p. XVI and XVII in the Introduction t;ohis "Tonic Dictionary."
1. a as in quota ;
2. a as in father j
3. e as in men ;
4. e as in say ;
5. i as in pin ;
XXX \ II
INTRODUCTION.
Orthograj)hy.
6. 1 as in machine ;
7. o as in loiip-, lord ;
8. o as in so, lioe :
9. u as hull ;
10. u as in school ;
11. li as in Giite;
12. u as in turn ;
13. ai in while ; '
14. ai as in aisle, ayej
15. au as in now;
16. au as in howl (only pi'onounced hrnader and lonpor) •
17. eu as in Capernaum;
18. iu as in pew ;
19. oi as in hoy ;
20. ui as in Louis ;
21. ui as in cooing ;
22. sz' this is an imperfect vowel sound, unknown in European lan-
guages ; if in pronouncing the word dizzy, the two letters di be changed,
to s, this sound will be made.
23. 'm or hm, is spoken with a cleared mouth, like a voluntnry half cough.
24. 'ng is a nasal sound, made by stopping the nose when it is spoken.
The consonants need no illustration, as the}' are uniformly pronounced as
in English : —
ch as in church ; ng as in sing ;
f as in fife ; p as in pap ;
h as in have ; s as in sea ;
k as in king ; . sh as in shut ;
kw as in quality ; t as in title ;
I as in lame ; ts as in wits j
m as in main ; w as in wing ;
n a?! in nun ; y as in yard.
The nhove comprise all the vowels, diphthongs and consonants, found in
the Canton dialect.
Tones and Aspirates see p. p. 1 and 2.
(1)
Grammar ov the Chinesr Langvaqe,
1. Difference of Intonation.
Any person anxious to acquire the Chinese language as it i«! spoken
by the natives, should acquaint himself: —
1. — With the tones;
2. — With the aspirates ; and
3. — With the vowo] sounds.
1, THE Tones.
The Mandarin or Court dialect distinguishes 5 tones ;
TheHalcka(5; and
ThePuntiS.
1. In the Court dialect they are expressed without any modulation
of the voice; are marked as represented in the following square, and re-
peated according to the number opposite each tone,
3 8
(1)
The 251 ^ cp'ing- ^shing ( marked 1 on the left below ), is the
simple even tone ;
The Y g shang^ ^shing ( marked 2 ) is the upper tone, and i3
always uttered with a shrill voice ;
The ^ ^ k'ii' ^shing (marked 3) is the departing tone ; and
The 71 g jih, ,shing (marked 4 ) is the entering tone. In its
pouthefn variations it always terminates abruptly ; but ends in a long
vowel in Chili, Shansi &c., &,g.
A lower (or jflfth) tone is recognised in the cP'ing ^shing only.
2. More modulation of the voice is observed in the Hakka dialect ;
but the intonation differs so much from the Pimti, that those who wish to
'acquire both, must take great care not to confound them.
The tones of the Hakka dialect are represented in the following
squares
2
3
' '2
3^
and
are
called
1
4
.1
4,
1. Shong' (P'ing ^shing
2. Shong' (Shing
3. K'i' ,shing
4. Shong' nyip, <shing.
A hovizontsil stroke being added to the hook of the p'ing and nyip
shing, they represent the lower tones, as seen in the precedmg square.
^According to the modulation of the voice r i -d +•
the k'i shing of the Hakka resembles the Ugh p'ing shmg of the Punti ^
the shong „ „ l^^ " "
the p'ing „ „ ^^ ^^__ !i____
Note— 1 When a Chinese is anxious to ascertain the tone of a word,
he always commences with the p'ing shing, then passes over to the
Phang (P. sheung -, H. shong), k'u and jih,, on which account they
arc often enumerated in the manner represented m the square.
(2)
Grammar or the Chinese Language.
Intonation.
3. The tones of the Punti dialect are pronounced,
1. cP'ing- (Shing-
2. 'Sheung- ^shiug
1.
Upper Tones
1 . Y ai Shcung- cp'ing- (Shing
2. J- J- ;, 'sheung- „ '2~3,^
3. J-^ „ hii^ ,, \ 4:,
Hii' (Shing and
4. Yap, (Shing-
2.
Lower Tones.
1 • ~]^^ ^^' sP'ing- calling
2. ~T^ I- „ 'sheun
3. -p.^ „ ,hii'
'8 >>
1 4l
yf»p>
The cp'ing ^shing- is uttered with a peremptory voice, e. g. Go !
The ^sLeung- ^shing- or rising tone is uttered with an interrogative mo-
dulation of the voice, e. g-. Is it mce ? Is the weather fine ?
The hu' (Shing is the optative or wish form, e. g. Bo love me.
Theyapj „ terminates in the Punti and Hakka dialects always
in a p, t or k ; hence it is easily distinguished.
The 1. 2. & 3. tones of the Punti are nearly represented in the fol-
lowing scale.
High tones
Lovi' tones
How are the four tones called ?
'f0|SSff4l^-fa;SB/B ^«' «2' csliing kiu= tso^ mat, ,meng ,ni.
They aie called cp'ing, 'sheung, ^hii^ and yap shino-.
^fX^lj^A^ ^i^' ^^^' ^P'i^S'. 'sheung, hti\ yap! lok,.*
Mark the upper tones ,f (^'^J^ITUg 'Tim ko^ sheung-^ sz\shing
Mark the lower ^ones, 'l^fg "J^^g ,Tim ko' ha^ sz^ ^shing
What tone has this character ?
5S®^#'l2*K'fi5f cNi ko^ tsz^ hai^ mat, =ye ^shing a\
Has it the high or low tone 1
1^_t^1^^'T*fi Hai^ ^sheung wak.hai^ hu^ ^shing.
Eear! these characters with me.
'M)
i^4r.
, Jgj -^ sT'ung ^ngo tuk^ ^ni ko^* ts2-
HiGH Tones,
Chin, 'chin, chin', chit, ^Jgf^|^ hlanket; to unroll; to fight ; to break.
,Kam, 'k^m, kam^ tap, I^J^J^g ^ to seal; to contract; amirror; armour.
Low Tones,
Xin, -lin, lin' lit, j2 Jj^-|$^|j to connect, to remove ; to select ; to arrange.
IWan Svan, wan^ wut, -2i:jt:m^ To .ay; to grant; to revolve ; sliopery
A^firaled words seldom have the Inqlier tone in the .fing shing or
the hirer tone m the MC shbifj. This peculiarity in the Punt/ is worth
noticmg, as it vail considerably assist the student's memory.
(3)
Grammar of the Ciuxese Language.
2. Aspirates. 3. Vowel Sounds.
How the tones frequently change the meaning of words, may be
seen from the followino: examj)les.
( ,U An interrogative
■gr^ ) ^ particle ; ^ f cWai, to do ; to be; rr j" 'Ho good.
in** ) U' to hate ; ^ \ WaV on account of. J^T ( Ho' to love.
( Okj bad, wicked.
A glance into Dr. Williams' " Tonic Dictionary " will convince the
student of the necessity of paying strict attention to the pronunciation
of the aspirates.
1. Examples.
Tap, ^
To' ^Ij
Pik, M
,Chiii ^"^
to carry
„ answer
„ arrive at
„ oppress
„ abstain from
,T'am
T'ap,
T^o'
P=ik,
,Ch^ai
to covet
a pagoda
to vomit
a prince
a commissioner
In the preceding examples the sound and quantity of the vowels
are the same, the tones are also identical, the distinction of meaning
being conveyed by the aspirates.
3. The Vowel Sounds.
The following examples diifer in the sound of the vowels, by which
the difference of meaning is conveyed to the ear.
Examples.
Narrow or Common Sound.
1.
Ai'
Ak,
'Am
Kau
Ai'
2. Broad Sound
fe a pass, a defile
/^ a bracelet
Am ^ an unopened flower
to teach
Long Sound.
to strangle
„ grasp Ak,
„ cover with the hand
„ save to rescue Kau' ^ _
3. Difference in the quantity of Vowels.
Examples
Short Sound.
,Sam j\j> the heart <Sam ^ three
,Kam ^ gold metal Ivdm ^ to inspect
Proper attention paid to these distinctions at the commencement
of study, will enable the student to avoid many errors so frequently fallen
into by persons unwilling to follow the advice of experienced scholar!?.
4. Phrases.
4. Is this word aspirated or not ?
B)61H^^®^PJ£ .Ni ko' tsz^ ^yau hi' =m6 ,ni.
How is this word pronounced ?
S#SB^1H^PJS 'Tim yeung^ tuk, ,ni ko' tsz^ ,ni.
It is kau' in Pimti, ;$till^>|fe Punti' tuk, kau\
(4)
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
Phrases. Dialectical Difference.
And this chcracter ? B^fi^B^ ^i ko' tsz^- ,ni.
It is read kau' ^WM. ''^S^ ^^^^ ^^^''
Ira ^'^ -sV.
What difference is there in the sound? ^151 2^ . . .
Ko' (Shing (jam 'tim ^fan pit, ^ni.
The difference of sound is in the A,
10^^ a'^l"! ko' a^ tsz^ jam pat, ,t'ung.
By kau' cyan I rescue a man from peril.
^>^ABi^:feK^ '^'go kau' ,yan cVut, ,u ,ngai ^him.
By kau' cyan I instruct men how to act.
^^A-Sfite'TTS "Ng'o k^u' jan Him yeung^ ^hang cwai.
4. Dialectical Difference.
1. The written Chinese heing ideographic and merely intended for
the eye, there is no need for long- words of diversified sounds, in order
to convey the meaning to the mind. Hence the rule, " speak as you
correctly write, and lorite as you correctly speah,'' is in no way applica*
hie to the written Chinese language of books. The student, therefore,
should he careful what characters he commits to memory, and should
always ask the teacher to write down for him the compound used in the
colloquial, without wliidh he cannot possibly make himself intelligible.
With the exception of Dr. Williams' " Tonic Dictionary of the Canton
Dialect '■ there is not a single work containing such a collection of com-
pounds used in conversation as a student might commit to memory
without reference to a competent teacher. Besides the necessity of
learning compounds great care should be taken to ascertain the parti-
cular word used in the dialect we wish to acquire, as also the peculiar
construction of sentences. Thus in treating the Chinese language as if
the ideographic characters did not exist, and by paying- strict attention
to the respective idioms, vie soon discover that the various dialects of China
differ as much from each other as German does from English, Dutch
Swedish, Danish and other cognate tongues.
2. Examples of Dialectical Difference.
I do no. see [it] or JP-" ff|^ 'T'ai > kin=.
I cannot see ) Hakka ^Ha :j^\\ K'on' /m tau'.
( Court ^^Mi K'iin' puh, kien .
P. fST^iPgiB^ ^Ni hii' c'm hii' ,ni.
Will you go? ^H. -^i-Pg ^Nihi^'m.
I^ir^i: '^'i k'ii' puh, k'ii'.
Go- r: * , ""''
^ 'Tseu !
Grammar of the Chinese Language-
2 Excmphs of DiaU-cliral Dlffh-evce. Compounds.
'rt^J^SlJ 'iNgo > ,chi lb\
1 do not know ^ H. ^J^Pg^B ^Ngai ^'m ,ti.
Ife^^fJ . 'Wo puh, <chl.
5 Compounds.
Compounds are, —
1. Descjiptive :
2. Explanatory ;
3. Synonymous ; or
4. Symphonious.
1. They are mostly of so stereotype a character as to be quite unin-
jlligible if transposed. The only analogy we have of this kind in the
Eng-lisli language is in certain projier-naraes of places. The sentence,
?.g. He comes from Norfolk, would lose its g-eograpliical signification and
bence Itecome unintelligible, were we to say, He comes from the Folk of
the North, because the historical origin of the compound has been for-
gotten by the people.
Examples of Descriptive Compounds,
A. brickmaker ^^^j^jjj ^ ^Chiin ^ng^i ^sz' fu^ lit: A master of biicks & tiles.
A. bricklayer yjg^^fC^jfi'^^Kai'shui „ ,, clay and water.
A. carpenter yKE^ffi'^ Muk,tseung%, „\vorkmanshipinwood.
A weaver lUfi^ffi'^ ^'1^^^^' 'P° " " weaving- cloth.
A spy glass ^ J^^% /fs'ln "ii king', lit : a glass which enables us to
see one thousand miles.
2. Examples of Explanatoi;y Conip,Qjjnds\
Brother, Brethren, ^j^ c^-ing' tai- Jit: elder & younger brothers, brethren.
Sisters ^^^ ''^^^ "^^'^^' » " sisters.
Marriage ^^^0 <^'^^ f^''^° ^^^* f^™^^^ andmnle connections, i.e.
to form such.
Relatives ^>^ Ts'an ts'ik, lit :relalions contracted by marriage.
Children -^^'Tsai or 'Tsz -nii- lit: boys and girls.
Infants ^^ or 52*cYing Jioi or jing ci lit: female and male in-
fantSj or babies.
Sir, teacher :3ti4 -^^'^ ^shang lit : First-born.
A. youth ^$^ ^^^^ J? ?? ^'^^^ °'" after-born.
Surgery ^^^ ^^'g'oi' -fo „ outward [practice of] medicine.
3. Examples of Synonymous Compounds.
To examine w^ cCh'a, ch'dt, both meaning the same.
Fulfilment i^'l^vYifig i^' j> >»
To try ^W Slii' li'i' to try, test Sec.
(6)
Gramjiau of the Chinese Language.
Compouvds. Classifiers.
To heai- ^^'^ .T'ing jman, both meaning to Lear.
To see g|^^ 'T'ai kLV ,, „ see.
4. Examples of Symphonioiis characters used in Compounds.
To see f f M 'T'ai kin', f | ^fai, body, stands here for ij^ ^t;ai to se
These occur chiefly in popular literature and colloquial writing-s, ar
sometimes employed from ignorance, and sometimes for intelligibility.
5. Many compounds in daity use may be transposed without alterin
the seiise, or becoming unintelligible; but great care requires to be take
in such transpositions, lest the sense be lost.
Examples of woids that may he transposed.
To rejoice ^j^-g- cFun 'hi or 'hi ,fun.
To go and return 'fi^ -Wong Joi or ,loi -wong.
Examples of words that may not be transposed.
Lord of a family, -^^ ^k 'chii; whilst 'chii ^ka means to rule afamilj
In the presence of jgj j||j Mln^ jts'in ; cts'in min^ means before us, opposit
A wine cup VPI'^ 'Tsau ,pvii ; whilst ^pui 'tsau means a glass of wine
In conversation ^kung 'ta [^p^^J*] means to assault, to fight
but 'ta Jiung [^XlC] to labour for wages; ^kung .15 [^yf] mean;
merits ; but ^\b (kung [^ JL] toil, toilsome labour.
7. Phrases.
Call the bricklayer ff^t^^K^Sf^^ KiiV ^nai 'shui ,sz' fiV .loi,
"^"'"s^ri at'"' } mm-^'f&.m .^'^S ■•«' ,.l ko- .ts-^ =11 king>.
To be married (said of women) FH^^ Ch'ut ka'.
To take a wife ^'^M Tsii' '16 ,p'o.
When will the teacher come ? ^^^^Hff^ ,Sin ^shang 'ki-^shi ,loL
I want a tea cup ^'^>^tt '%o oi- cch'a ^pui.
I want a cup of tea ^^|^^ 'Ngo oi= ,pui ,ch'a.
Tea is ready ^ ik^l ^^^^''^ P^^' ^^^''
I am ready Ife^lffl^ 'Ngo ,ts'ai pi^ lok,.
6. Classifiers.
A classifier is added to or precedes every noun, whenever it stands
in relation to numerals. Our words herd (in herd of cattle) ; sheets (in
sheets of paper) ; pieces (in pieces of silk) correspond exactly to these
classifiers, which the student will do well to commit to memory before,
he proceeds further.
1 . Ko' jgj is applied to men, as yat, ko' ^yan — 'i^\ one man.
Shap, ko' 'nil 'tsai 'JriS:i^if '-^'en girls.
(7)
Grammar of tub Chinese Language.
6. Classifiers.
Ko' ^ the abbreviated ko' '^ is applied to inanimate objects,
such as baskets, coin &c., Sec.
'Mid neung- ko' Jam Joi HSMfS^I^ Buy two baskets.
'Pi ^Dg ko' 'ping ,kon 'kHif$5^^^g[fljj:t^2jg Give bimiive biscuits.
2. Chek, ^ is applied to boats, vessels, birds, quadrupeds, legs,
arms, eyes &c. In Hahka colloquial it is also applied to man.
Examples.
Yat, chek, -t'eng ■ — "^^ One boat.
„ „ cshiin ^'% One vessel.
Shap, „ ,kai "T^^ Ten chickens.
^Ng-' „ ^chxi 5l^J§ Five pigs.
^Leung- „ 'shau PH^^ Two arms.
Yat, „ %g;in — '^BR One eye.
Exercises,
Call a boat. Embark in that ship. Weigh that chicken. Buy a pi"-;
Raise one arm. Open one eye.
To call B^yR ^^^' £^oi- 2- To embark, to take passage in, ^l? tap,. To
weigh^^ ch'ing'. To buy ^ ^mai. To raise ^ 'kii. To
open tTPQ 'ta Jioi.
3. Tiii' ^fif is applied to things that we use in pairs, as shoes, •
stockings, scrolls, &c.
Examples.
Yat, tui' shai 'aU*^ One pair of shoes.
Yat, tfii' mat, — '^T'fi^ One pair of stockings.
Yat tui' 'tui — 'P't^y* One pair of scrolls.
Exercises.
Make a pair of shoes. Knit a pair of stockings. Write a pair of sceoHs!.
Put on this pair of shoes. T?ke off this pair s^tockings.
To make 5® tso-. To knit -^^ chik,. To write ^ 'se. To put on.
^ cheuk,. To ttike off ^ i'ixt,.
4. jSheung "^ is applied to a pair, a couple, double, &c.
* ♦
Note 2. — In kiu' Joi and similar phrases the object must be put between
the two verbs. Exception : In negative sentences, as ; —
BSfi^VttfflPSfi! cni tik, jau ,cham ,'m ch^ut, orPg-g^
^ttlB^fi^V^ c'm ^chamtak, ch'ut, ,ni tik, .yau,' Cannot
pour out this oil, the particles 6*A'?<!^, yap,, Joi, follow immedi-
ately after the negative or the auxiliary verb.
(8)
Grammar of the Chinese Language,
Glassifiers.
Examples.
^Shenng ^ngan ,fa Jing- ^WCiP.'^^ A two-eyed peacock's feather.
^Slieung" 'hau kirn' ^ P ^^Ij A double edg-ed sword.
5. Trt IS is applied to thing's held in the hand like an umbrella
fan, knife, cfcc.
33XAMPLES.
,Chu ^ni 'pa ,che t^B^ffi^S Hold this umbrella.
(Nino- ko' 'pa ^to Joi ^Mffi>^^ Brmg- that knife.
,noi ,ni 'p6 'so p^BlSffif^' Open this lock:
Yat, 'pa 'ts^o — 'fS-^ One bundle of g-rass.
,Pa ,pa 'pa 'pa ,p'a ,p'a ti^ ^^MMMM^"^ Papa holds a rake
to scratch the ground.
6. ^Cheung ^ is applied to thing-s that are spread out, as a sheet
of paper, bed and table covers. &c.
Examples.
'Pi ^sam (Cbenng 'chi kwo' -ngo i^zilS^W)*©^ Grive me three
sheets of paper.
Tai- Jau^p'6 sbap, (Cheungtsik, yCl^^^ I 5^^ Spread ten mats
in the large room.
Shat, hii' yat, ^cheung--p'i y^-^' — tM'^ I^ost one quilt.
. 7. ,Chi ^1% a brancb, twig, is applied to things which are round
and slejider.
,Nim hit' ,ni ,chi pat, ^|5^1^f x ^ Take away that pencil.
'Sai ^ni ,chi cUga ts'at, ^B^I^SFIS Wash this tooth brush.
8. cT'iu (^ is applied to anything long- and slender, as a cane, a
pike J also to divisions or articles of laws &c. It is more generally used
than the preceeding and chiefly applied to finished objects.
^-Ngo 't'ai kill' yat, .t'iu ,she^||^^ — -^^Mci I see a snake.
-L6ung jti'u lo- ^to hii' tak, Pl^i^iio fiii'f'^ Both roads are passable.
Hii' 'lo yat, ct'iu -ma ,pin 'pi kwo' -ngo i^ — 'f^i^Kf$® ^
Go and f9i^h me a horse whip.
sTs'am s'mcbeuk, ko' yat, jt'iu tai'^P§-:^@ — 'f^'^ I cannot find
that a-irdle. *"
Yat, st'ifi ^sbing '|j^/"f«^ A cord
Tso- yat, jt^ii fu'f^^ — 'wW Make one pair of trousers.
9. (Kan [^ is applied to buildings (for other meanings of this
character we must refer the student to the dictionary),
Yat, ,kau uk, — "I^S One house.
(9)
Grammar of the Chinksk Lanouaob,
Clnsiiificrs.
'K'u 'hi (Sara ^kdn Jcung; 'sho iH^zn jPy ^}^)]' Ke erects three coun-
cil chambers.
Tsoi' ^Heung Mvong- fyau ,sam ^kan ^kung kuk, '^^^M^^W} "^^
There are three arsenals in Hongkong-.
Yat, ,kan kiiV ts(V^fo yeuk, kuk.-^f^B^fJtyCl^/^ ^^^ is called the
powder magazine.
Tai' i^ ,kan kia' tso^ ,kwan ,leung kuk, f^HWi^f^W-'MM
The otber is called the Commisssariat.
Tai^ ,sam ,kdn kiiV tso^ ,kwan hi' kuk, ^Hf^R-'ft^S^^
The third is called the armory.
10. Tso^ J^ is applied to seats, shrines, hills, pagoda's &c.
•Hi jt'an yat, tso^ fe^^ — 'ft Erect an altar.
Yat, tso^ t'lip, — M^ ^"^ pagoda.
11. To* U frequently stands for ]J^ to pass over or through ft pM-
sage\tc.
,King kwo' 'ng to' ,kwan ^^M^SIS Went by five passes.
Jm ,hoi ko^ yat, to^ ;mun;|^^,|^f|'— Kf^ Open that door.
«Hi ,to 'leiing 16* ^k^iu tS ^SMIS ^^^^^^^ two bridges inaddition.
12. Fuk tbm i^ applied to maps, pictures, inscriptions and similar
thino-s, that are roiled up or stretched out like the preceding.
Wak.'ki fuk, .slum 'shui wa*^^ J3g{JL|7]CK i'aiut afewlacdscapea.
Ya^ fuk, jts'eung — ti)'|^ A wall.
13- Chan* |I^ is applied to a gust, a dash, a beam, a pnflF &c.
Yat, Chan* Jung — -P$M, ^ 8"st of wind.
„ ,kwong — P$3fe A beam of light.
,in — 'WM A puff of smoke.
Shik, ,Ioi lok, yat, chan^ 'ii g^^jg:— l^^iji ^"^ ^^^^^^^ ^' '^''^ ^'^^
just now.
Yat, chan* ,ch^an kom' tai* — P^M^tf A As big as a cloud of dust.
> „ yeung*—[$j((0|Ji}'# Like a cloud of smoke.
14. Nap, M is applied to grain, seed, buttons &c.
Yat, nap, tau* kom' ,to — -^ji^pl]'^ So much as one bean.
„ „ ,8hatit,yap,'k'uke'=ng&nnoi*— 5|di:B^^;AlS>'i^SP^p3
A grain of r-and fell into his eye*:.
(jn )
Grammah ok tub Chinese Language.
Classifiers.
15, jCh'eunof :^ is applied in a similar manner asclian^
(No. 13.); but the acts are of a longer duration.
,Sia ,sbi lok, yat, .cli'ouno: tai' ^u :5feH#'^-^^>'cM
A heavy rain feil before.
,T6 siin' yat, ^ch'eung 'ts'oi ^^"^^^ I think I was very luoky.
J 6. Tui^ I^ is applied to a division, group, party, or a company of
people and animate beings.
'K'u 'ta faN 'kl tui^ ,pin- hu' ,shing 'fg^fll|r^^i^
lie sent several dirisitns of soldiers into the town.
T«oi> Sx t'ii" >ii y^^> tui' ^nu ,van ^fJlHW — 'I^^lfe A
There is a party of ladies in the garden.
17. jKw'an ^^ stands for herd, flock &c.
Yat, ikw'an jeung- — '^^^. A flock of sheep.
, „ 'ye ap, — S.lf^l „ wild ducks. '
„ 'shui jngau — '^^TjC'^ A herd of buffaloes.
18. Tat, ^3 is applied to irregular pieces or spots.
Ko' 'pa kini' ^shang yat, tfit, sau' ^tB:©J^~^S^
A spot of rust has come on that sword.
19. FiV ^fj is used as a cla«<sifier of lots, sets &c.
Yat, fu' hi' kii' — '^ll^-^ A set of instruments.
,San chi' yat, fu' .siin ,ehi ,t'oi 'i f/f S^9JSiKt5^
Lately purchased a set of ebony tables and chairs.
20. Kin* "(^ is applied to articlest)f dress, to atF;tir3 of business &c. &c.
sNl 'yau Md ,to kin^ ,i ,sh6ung f/t'^^^^i^^'^
How many articles of dress have you ?
Tsoi' ,ni ch'u' hai* ,sam shap, kiu^ SB^^ SlS^H+f}^
There are thiity articles here.
Ko' kin' ,p'6 Jiin 'hi mP ^ts'ang M#|g5#^^^|*
nave you sewed that robe yet ?
«Ngo V'lu yat, kiu' sz' w^i' kwo' ^ni ,chi ^^ — ^ff^fS'^Mi'SJvn
I have an afl^jtir to communicate to you.
,N5 y.t, kiu' t,.' kok„ hai' ok, mai' nj^— ft^^ff^.^, J|
This sort of goods is indeed difficult of sale.
,»M iu' L-o^ kin^' jung ,sai n§^'®"ff^g5 I do not want that thing.
21. Fai' ^ is applied to pieces or portions of earth, wood, cloth he.
(11)
Grammar of the Chinese Lanctuaok.
Clasfii/iers.
Yat, fdi^chl kom^ pok, — -l^ '^'tftH'-^ -'^^ ^^^^^' ^^ ^ P^^^® of paper.
Ko' fAi' p6' 'pi kwo' ^a-o j;!f ij| ill f^Sf]^ Give me that piece of cloth.
Tsuk, ^mo yat, f.u' ip, )i,^M^^M^M ^^"^^ ^^^^ ^ ^<^^^-
Yat, fai' shek^ — '^^ A stone.
,Sam fdi' jngan Hi^ifi I'^i"®® dollars.
*22. jT^iin ^ stands for lumps, clods, Ami is chiefly applied to
detached substances of earth, dough &c.
Yat, jt'iinjnai — 'l^;^^ A clod or lump of earth. •
„ miu* — Ul '^ A lump of douj^h.
'Ta jmai yat jt^iin ^fj^^ — Si ^ fi^ihting- couimc- on tie ■jvound.
»Ni ke ,p'5 sat, hai' y^t, ,tMin ,nai i^s^M^W^i^ ~'rS^i4
Your idol is but a lump of clay.
23. jT'ong- ^ is appUed to ladders, sails (tc, (it is seldom, used.)
Yat, jt'ong Itj ^che — •*^^"Ml A sun screen.
'X'u S-au 'leung jt'ong- ^man cheung' tS^PllS4^^,S
He has two mosquito curtains.
24:. jHong fj is applied to a rou', line &c.
Ko' jhong- =hiu ^ts^ung kan^ ,hoi ^fa 'Q' ItW ^'f i£ II 'fE
That row ef willows will soon flower.
'Jloi tpin pok, yat, chong cliin' jshun '/^'^^Vm — 'i~t^i>'m
A row of men-of-war are anchored on the sea shore.
25. Ka' 5" A wooden frame, a stand on which things are placed.
/ikiV ^^ Clothes horse.
Yat, ka' 'shui ,ch'e hii' kau' 'fo — ^ ^C$.i|Kj/C
A fire engine went to put out tbe fire.
26. 'To ^^ is applied to flames, flowers &,g.
Yat, 'to 'fo — ^j/^ One flame (N. 8.)
,Ni 'to 'fo sik, 4iu ^^jJC,@j T '^^^^ ^"^ ^^ ^°°^ °"'-
Yat, 'to, ,fa — "T^fS ^ bouquet of flowers.
27. P'iii' }y- A slip, a slice, a bit &c.
Yat, p'in' muV, ,sheung ^k'ii ke' 'shau 'chi — Jr^iStS^^^^lf
A siuall piece of wood injured his Hnger.
Note 3. — ' r5 is frequently pronounced 'til, chiefly so in connecLion witii
flowers. ^
(12)
Ira.mMar or THE Chinese LANftUAOB.
Classifier.'^.
«K:'u yat, p'in' ,?am sz^ sung' ^pi ^ni fg — ')x^^^^Mi^i^
He e"ives it to you from his heart,
28. Tsikj /^ A feast, conversation (Not frequently used.)
Pan'yat, tsik,/tsau ^ts'injv ,yan hak, i$— )SSi# A^
Suread the table and invite the guests.
Ko' yat, tsik, ws? ^— ,JSjfS '^^^^ conversation. •
Yat, tsik, ^ho .sh'in ti' — jg^f |ili-t]l ^ l"cky spot [for a^grave.]
• 29. jPau ^ a bundle dec.
»Mdi jinin rik yat, j)au H^HtE'^'S Purchase a bale of cotton.
Yat, ,pau 'chi — '"^11:^ A packet of paper.
SO- Chat, :^|j Also denoting things tied into a bundle.
Yat, chat, pat, — '^^L^ -^ bundle of pencils.
51. (Fung ^ is applied to letters.
Yat, /ling sun' — '^(^ One letter.
52. ,T6 J} One quire.
Yat, ,10 'chi — yj^]^ One quire of paper.
33. Tun ^^ Acts of play ; a volume S:o.
Yat, 'pi'in hi' — '^^ J| A play in one act.
„ fShii — "^^ ^^^ volume.
Tukj ,ni 'pun ^shii gJ^^TJ^^ Eead this book.
34. T'6' ^^ is applied not to single volumes but to sets of books, and
woiks containing more than one volume.
Yat, t'6' (Shli — '^^ A complete work.
cNi t'6' ,shu shat, 'iiu yat, po^ Pjg.##:^ T — Op
Lost one volume of this set'of books.
*Mai yat, t'5\S:un kwok, Chi' ^ — ^znl^F*
Purchase a copy of the Three States.
3o. Py nli is more frequentl}' applied to a single volume of books
than ^piin (No. J33.)
Yat, p6' (Shii — "nlJ^a 0^6 volume.
Oi* 'kl ,to pu^ ,ni '^^^'ufi'ijj^ ^^'^'^ many volumea do you want f
36. P'at, \]U is ajjplied to horses, boards &c.
Yat, p'at, 'ma — '\J^,% A horse.
Ko' pak, je 'yau Uoung p'at, ,s6 @ fS 3R WSE W
That eldoi'lv mm hvs tivo mu^-taches.
Grammar of tiik Chinese Lanquaoe.
Cla,<<Sffjrr.<i.
37. 'Ha fTp is applied to blows with the hand or stick Jtc.
Yat, 'ha 'shau • — 'flT^^'- One blow ot the hand.
Ta 'k'u shap^ 'ha ^Tj^ -|-'(rfv Give him ten blows.
38. Ch'iin' ^ is applied to things strung- tog-other.
Yat, chHiu' ^heung ^clui — • $ ^^^ One string of fragrant beads.
39. Sheng-^ ^ is applied to chairs and carriages.
Yat, sh^ng^ 'kiu, — -^|g One sedan chair (4).
40. T'iit, 3Si S"i<^s of cloths.
Yat, t'iit, ,i fuk^ — "flSiS flS ^^^ ^^^^ ^^ clothes.
41. 'Ku ^ is used for shares and parts in business, and for heads
and divisions in essays.
Yat, 'ku (Shang i' — '^:^,g^ 0"^ share in a business.
Ko' jman ^Cheung ^fan ,sam tai^ 'ku tsok, '@f^^:^^;;^jj^{'fe
That essay is divided into three principal heads.
42. Kukj ^ is applied to games of chess or chess boards.
Yat, kukj ;k'i — '^^ One game of chess.
43. Kon ni is applied to bamboo.
Chung' yat, ^kon chuk, ^ — '^Yf Plant one bamboo.
44. Chii' j[^ denotes a cluster of incense sticks.
Yat, c-hu' ,heung — "il^i:^ One cluster of insease sticks.
45. To 7p^ is apjdied to parties, companies, bands &c.
Yat, 'fo ts'ak, — 'f^M ^ ^^^'^ o^ robbers.
46. sMan '^ denotes cash.
Yat sraan jts'in — 'X^ One cash*
47. ^Mfm ( P^
J p. The first is applied to pieces of artillery ; the next
I "T, to pistols and revolvers 6;c,
jHam ( }^
'Ni 'yau shap^ ,mnn tai^ ^p'clu j/j^^-hP^^^itg
You have ten pieces of cannon.
'Leung «hau 'sliau ^ts'eung p|^ P"^^ A two-barreled pistol.
Lukj jham ^p'au y>j^^^ A revolver.
48. ,Fong ^ is applied to squares of ink or inkstones; of beef, mut-
ton, pork &c.
NtiTJS 4. — More frequently said ; yat, 'ting 'kiu.
(14)
Grammar of the Chinese LAxouAaK.
Classifiers.
Yat ,fon^ ia^ — '>7 ■§§ ^^^ inkstone.
49. P^at, /£ is applied to cloth or silk.
Yat, p'al, po' — '>(E'U7 -A- piece of calico.
50. "^Fo ;^ is used for heads, pearls and other small round things.
Yat, ^fo ,cLan ^chii — '^^10^ A pearl.
Yap, ts'ak, chai^ ^cham ^shau shap, ,u 'fo AM^^^'if+MS
Went into the encampment of the robbers and cut otf more than ten heads.
51. Tiin^ P^ Parts, sentences, paragraphs &c.
Yat, tun^ (San ^man — "^^ItI^ A piece of news.
„ ti^ — 'l^X^i^ One piece of ground.
53. 'Fun ^^ is applied to sections or articles of laws, treaties, peti-
tions, business, news &c.
Yat, ^fun sz- — '^t^ -A-n affair.
Wo^ yeuk, tai^ luk, 'fun J^O^^^^nT^ The sixth article of the treaty
of peace.
Tsau' jts'ing yat, 'fun ^'\^^^ A memorial.
^Leung- 'fun ^san ^man 'chi pj^l^^JT^^Ki Two kinds of news papers
53. Wai^ ^ denotes persons of rank and respectability.
Yat, wai' hak, — 'ilL^ A gentleman, a visitor.
'Yau 4euug wai^ jan hak, Joi t'am' ^ni ^"ffi 'fe A^^^fS^
Two gentlemen have come to visit you.
54. jUn |§| also written j^ is applied to things round, circular &c.
'Ngo him' -ni jngan shap, tai^ jiin ^'^f>ji§^~PA P
I owe you ten dollars.
55. JJn ^ is applied to officers of governmeut.
^Yau ,kun .yan .s^ira ,un 'sheung pakking '^'^ AHM-ti^t^
Three ofificers are going to Peking.
56. jTs^ang ^ is used for stories of houses &c.
Yat, ,ts^ang Jau — g|g One storied house.
^^- ^?i ^ is applied to strips or leaves of paper &c,
'Ki ip, 'chi ^^^W^ Several strips of paper.
58. TfV ^^ is sometimes applied to men, but chiefly to documents,
commands of the emperor and their imitations used in temples.
(lb)
Ghammar of the Chinese LArrGUAOK.
Classifiers.
'Shai kvvo' ,s&ra to= ,yan hii' ,ts'ui hii f|£:©HSi Aiffif^^
1 have sent; three messeiij^ers to urge you.
Tak,kong-' u^'chi yat, ^o^ ^]^-$^ ^ — '^ Aspecial Imperial command..
59. T'ip, ^j5 ^^ applied to phisters Sic.
'K'ii 'sliau f'ip, vat, t'ip, ,ko venkj tS^fifi-^BfiW^
He has a phister on his wrisl.
.Shau ,mai ^ki t^p, > .Chi X|^iI||Hi|gja&
Received several papers of rou^e.
60. 'Tim ^fi is used for spots, dots &2.
Yat, Him ,sing — '^,^M A star.
„ jshi — '^'l^^O^ A moment of time.
„ mak, — 'ifn^ A drop of ink.
61. Tarn' ^^ :^B A burden, a picul etc.
'K'u tarn* tak, "leung uim' ^mai fHtfiff^ffitf^f ^^
He is able to carry two piculs of ri^ je.
62. jCh'ung- ^^ is used for a series, succes, jion &c.
,King kwo' 'ki cch'ung- jmun iMSffiSPI
Passed througli a buccessiun of doo rs.
63. Lut, ^^ A colloquial expression denoting- rows of things with
interstices between them.
Yat, ]kt, shii=' rauk^ — '-^fJI'^tC ^ ^'ow of tre ts.
*Mui ,pin ^yau yat, lat, Jan ,kon #^^ — | '^l^#1tt
Each side has a balustrade.
64:. 'Hau (3 (see No 47) is applied to thin .gs with sharp edges &o.
ITat, 'hau kirn' — > p f^;fj A sword.
Tai\t6 ,sam 'hau ;^7J^III Three hatchets.
65. Min- ^j is applied to mirrors, gongs, banners &o.
Yat, miu^ keng' — " [Sia A looking glass.
66. (Tsimg -^ is applied to matter, aifaii 'b (seldom used).
Yat, (tsung hni sz^ — -^^.^ A noble affa iv.
'K'ii .tsur.g 'pan sing^ shat, 'shau ok, IlI:^!; Ipj^M^W."^
His whole disposition is bad.
( If' )
Gkammar of the Chii'Iese Language.
Cla.'ii^ifu'rs. 7. Chinese Desig nation of the Parts of Speech.
07. 'Mi j^ \<i applied to fishes &c.
Yat, ^mi ;U — -^^ A iisli.
G8. T'oi !^ I is applied to stages and plays.
jKiii ,nin ,ni ch'ii' 'jaii 'ki ,t'oi hi' tso* ^^^^I^E^-ftS'tlf^
There are several pla^-s acted here every year.
69. 'PiXD ^0 is applied to parties moving in a procession.
^Yau ^ki shapj ^pan ^cli'un shik, liii' jing ^ch'un ^^~p^^ &i
^^^ Several tens of processions have goue to usher in the spring.
Yat, '{)an tau^ fu^ — 't^^P--^ ^ frame of bean curd.
70. ,Chii 7^^ [ Both are applied to trees.
■Kan|gJ ^'
,Sov.g shu' (Sara ,chu ^fsj mfi]^ Three mulberry trees.
71. ^Ki'm ^ is applied to tubes^ which are in China chiefly mide
of bamboo.
Yat, 'kun pat, — ""M*^ "^ pencil.
,siu — ^-jfln A flageolet.
72. 'Tin<^ TM ^^ extensively applied to tilings pointed on the top, as
Chinese caps, hats, sedans &c.
Yat, Hing mo^ — Tl't3 ^ '^^'^P "^ ^^<^-
73. Kii' Tij is applied to sentences, phrases &c.
Y^at, kU' Wf? "rJ^ a sentence.
75. ^Chan ^^ is applied to lamps.
Yat, 'chan ^tang — '^^^t ^"^ Ifimp.
There are a few more classifiers not contained in the preceding list ;
but as they never occm* in colloquial, and but seldom in books, there is
no need for burdening the student's memory with them.
7. Chinese Designation of ihe Parts of Speech.
The Chinese divide the characters or words of their language into
,Hii ts'z^ ^^ Particles or Prepositions &c.
Shat, „ p^-^ Verbs, Nouns &c.
Cho* „ ■9^/^^ Auxiliaries (lit ; words supporting speech) i. tf.
words terminating- sentences and defining their
signification. In most instances they are sub-
stitutes for our puncluatiou.
Chammau of thi! CniNKSK Language.
7. Chinese designation of the Parts of iSpcech.
The Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs are ag-ain subdivided into ur,, tsz*
jind 'sz tsz^ (living- and dead cliaracters). The former com [)rise the Verbs
the latter the Nouns and Adjectives. Figurative or ineta])horicaI expres-
sions are called j^ fff 'ka tso'.
Little attcTition has as yet been paid by foreign students to Chinese
composition. They have read books, con)mitted sentences to memory and
copied Chinese writing ; but few have so far masitered the Chinese ))Pn or
brush as to be able to write a document correctly v/ithout the aid of a
teacher. This is chiefly owing to the facility with which competent
Chioese teacliers can be engug-ed ; and also to tlie impossibility (if a person
does not wish to wasto'his valuable time) of a foreigner writing the Chinese
characters so elegantly, that tbey can be presented to persons of rank-
but no less to the lack of practical works in the various dialects serving
ns competent guides to a knowledge of the written language.
8. Gender, Number and Gate 0/ Nouns, and Moods and Tenses of Verbs.
The Chinese language having no inflexion ot Nouns, Adjectives and
Verbs, these distinctions are represented bj' words used as prefixes and
Buffixes, and by auxiliary Verbs and ])articlos.
9. T/ie Article.
1. The definite article is expressed ))y demonstrative, relative and
personal pronouns, of which the following occur the most frccpientlj : —
Li Looks.
Dem : Pronoun ; ]l'\^ <ts'z and ^ (Sz this ;
^'pi that. In Colloquial. Punti: ^ISStil ,Ni ti^his ;
'i0 and "^ 'Ko that ;
Eel : Pronoun : ^ 'ch6, which ; &
f^ 'sho which and that which. Court D : ^-(jg 'Nii ko' that j and
^i^ Che' ko' this. ■
Pers : Pronoun : iL jK'i he, she, it.
Examples.
Book language in the upper line, and
Punti Colloipiial in the lower.
The man [be- ( n ■ -tt^ _a* j-r
fore me] ) B. K A>t ^/'j^ 'Ts^z ,van fu^ ,chi Jol.
oXsbacL ( I^-B^fi Aa(-5)K?!^ .Nl ko' ,yan fu^ .k^ ,lof.
^'no[" tu-l ^' Wfm^^M: .Sz shh^ pat, kit, ^kwo.
fruit. ( P. PJ&('^KtSr^PS/^a Hr J^i =t'i^ shii= ,t6 ,'m kit, 'kwo.
Note 5.— P. C. lM ,\no to carry on the back.
(18)
C'hAMMAR of tub CniNEPE LANC.rAGK.
Ihe Definite Article. The Iiuhfnite Article. The Koi
Tlie woman Inst f B, fS:§1^^5§{r?l Ti,ts^ni,ts^ing,cL^unsoii^'"no-ar.
w'il'en "'^s'tm ^ "flrSXt^^^ Ko'^nu,vaTisl.eunoMiau\shan-
younV '^' ( :kli&U^& shat, 4iu M ke' Mo >.Ill,^
The man liar-TB. i*: ^^ff^ifliV^^^ Jv'i jan cwai tulv, <sam.
ous intentions. (P. 1010 A®® ^U^ 'I^o k" 0''^^^ ,wai tuk, ,sam.
Lost tlie rest. B. ^^^i Shat, .k'i jU.
The rest is not C _^^f^^ . r-t ^tjw
worth bein--^ B. '^%f^^^^WjVl i^'i ^li pat, tsuk, ,kun Sa-
looked at, (_^
Neither the (cCo]!: ^MMX^^^ Che' ko' jnn^ pat, ^chnn- i- ^^.^
one norj "^i^Jl^i^X^^^ S^ ko' yau^ pat, ,chnii<r p.
llow can the man f R 4^.fl^f]S "^J- ,vaa 'chc ^nio tak, ,on .nang
void of virtue { B. V 7^""^'^ ""
hold an ofiice ? ( V^tA-C%%^ yam^ chik, cU.
10. j?7ie Indirflnde Article.
The Indefinite Article is expressed hy the Xinneral — > yat, and is
filways followed hy tlie classifier applied to tiie lespectivo Noun. It, is
seldom expressed in the literary style; but always in ])opular literatuie,
and in conversation.
I take a room on lease P. ^^ {^ 'p^j)// ^Ng'o .tso yat, ^kan .fonp-.
I n-ave himjC. Hcf^ffi-^Mfc!^ J^ ^^^o 'F^ c^^ayat, ko\sh^ ,11.
'a i.ear. \ p. |^ pfl— 'lij -y.^ J^JitS „ yat, ko' ,slia Ji kwo^
, 1 T (p I?®— ^ ^Mai,shiinyat,chek,or [dc^il.
I jjurchased a ship ■ P- rm /'- ^^
( M "3^® -Mai yat, chek, .shiin.
A good intention P. ^iWM'M^ "'Yau ko' dio i\
The Noun. The Gender.
Thon^li in g-enoral Tsouns have no gender, there are, hesiiles the Ad-
jectives ^i^ {a\\m -nii, male and female, as applied to man, clriractevs
expressing- the gender of each peculiar s[)ecies of animate nature.
1. The male and female, the creative and receptive, the active and
passive, the positive and neg'ative principle of nature is |^)/ and f^/^
OUAMMAR Ol' THE ClflNHSIO IjANaUAOR.
Tlte Gender. The Numler.
jycung- aud ^yam; but always pronounced jam .ycung l^^liJ ('>)i $£i^'
skin fkw'an Heaven and earth, father and luothur.]
2. TJje male and f rri / ,^,
femHleofman. \ >} j5C '^'"^^ '"^'^•
3. Tho male and J ,., ,
famule of" birds. ( /t-lKljllE Jlung- ^ts'z (Sneak Sc write /I's'z chniig-.)
^1^ (I'^ung" 'ino and -^^h| (I'^'inS' '"'^ ^*^-
4. The male and ( ajla.}
female of quadrupeds. ( ^tX^Ij 'J^Iau 'p'an (Sj)eak -p'an ^mau.) (G)
T). The. male and female or masculine and feminine character of in-
animate niiture is expressed bv l^i!^ cKong and .yau (strong- and soft.)
Examples.
It is a man i^ ^ \ Ua? cnam ,yan.
. It is a woman "jj^j^C/^ ;> '"^ »
A coek KiiV Jvai,kung;ahpn|^^,kai W\
A bull ^X-p ^Mau ,ngau. A cow 'if-L^ 'p'an ^ngau.
(Kung- ^ and 'nu j^W; are the general terms used in colloquial for ex-
l^ressing the gender of every species of animate nature except
man.
Is this a cock or a hen-bird? ^)i^^]%^lS.iM& r^i chek, tseuk,
hai- (kung wakj hai* 'n:'i.
Where is the sow? iWMWM''mf^ cChil ^nii tsoi= .p^^^ ^^'ii' c^i- (")
2. Number.
Every noun may express the singular as well as the plural. ^JNgo
ke' jmim ,t'o ^^''i|^ f 1 1x£ niay mean. My pupil, or my pupils- ko' ok^
cyan ^1^0^ J\. may express : that bad man or those bad men. Where
distinctness is required, the characters Hang -^^ jmun if\ piii' J^,
l"i^ fM, sts'5 ^, cts'i'ii ]ll^, jch'au j^ are put after the substantive j kok,
]\oTE 6. — iYam ^yeung are also applied to concave and convex objects
(^•ff- Iw5 jyeung -ii^^d convex Hies; pJ^K jam '^nga con-
cave do. 5 the former covering the latter as heaven does earth.
G. — These characters are also applied to plants.
Note 7. — As these words are seldom used in general conversation,
foreigners find themselves often in a dilemna, when having to
refer to the gender of animals, whilst the Chinaman will al-
ways help himself by speaking of a *' boy dog" and a "girl
doir."
(CO)
GllAMMAR OF TUB CniNESK LANGUAGE.
Words foUon'Vuj the JSoun. Plni-al Nnmher.
^, .cliii If, cbnng' M, sf=^i^ Hs, sliu> {H;,^to fj^, ,kai ^ and ,kai
'f'^,.li;'im )^, yn '^, ^ts'im ;^, man- Jl\, ^tsung- fj, either precede
01- follow the noun.
'Tano- ^^ is the most common character used to denote the plural.
-N"-o 'tan"- ^ T^j "ui 'tang-, 1/]^^ are )ised both in books and colloquial.
^Ng-o 'tang- ^^eung hii' %^^W<^ We wish to leave.
,Nung (fu (kung tscung- Hang- ;^7C-^llE.^f' Agvicultuvists it aitizans.
jMan -mo Jvun ^shciing- jan 'tang .loi ^.^^'g^MA^^ Civil and
military oliicurs and merchants arrivea.
'Tang "^ also denotes a variety of things enumerated under one
head, e. (j. .k^i -mai muk,, -nga, shek, 'tang mat, 3?i^/ivJ.£-^^i[;^
lie purchased timber, tiles, stones and such material.
Plural Aumher.
jMuu ^pj is only applied to man, and used in colloquial as well as
mhooks; e.g. ^T'a cUiuu "flM/ Jn '^^^Y- Its application is more limited
than 'tang '^^j and it is never used but in connection Arith a pronoun.
jTs'o ^, cch'ai 'Pl", and jcli'iiu J^ also denote the plural and are, like
the preceding, only applied to man.
Pui' ^E and lui' ^^ are applied to man, and to objects denoting a
class or genus. Pui' :^ is frequently preceded by an Adjective, which
it change!--- into a substantive of the plural number, e.g. Ok, pui' j^^^^
ths wicked ; P pui' ^^ tlie rigbteous; jt'ung pui' Jo] :^ comrades.
Lui' ^^ frequently denotes a g-enus, as .j^an lui' yv/lM man; jch'ung
lui* iiifS^^ insects : shau^ lui' -^C^ quadrupeds, and is often used for
pui' as : ^fi lui' ||£^ill vagabonds.
Chung' $^ ,chu ig, slui' 15;, ,t^^ ^, .kai^-^, ,kaij^^, kok, #,
.fan jl, ;idi -^, ^ts'im n^, man^ ^, 'tsung If, sik, ^, Mkm ^^,
chiiV 3*^ "1'^'^ '^^ii ^4^ ^'"'^ Indefinite Pronouns, when used without IS^ouns,
and Adjectives when joined to a Noun.
Their position is indicated in the following rhyme : —
Chung' <cbii ,To shrr kok, chi.V .fan ||^iS^lf^#^IS jli
Sik, 'tsung 'kii man^ 'sc .ts'rn jan ^W^^W^^i M lit" A
,K.\i ,t() y\ diam ,ts'ung jan mat, ^MU^tk^i^M^i
Shin^ Tan ■■ts'z tsz^ 'piu 'ho pat,. #:^i{'t^'"^?IM'^
(21)
Grammau of the Ciiinf.sk Lanoijaok
The Noun. Plural Number in I'unli Colloquial. Canes.
Exain])lc'S of siicli of the prt'ceding words as sometimes precede and
Boinetirnes follow the noun. —
Bljing' ,y:ui ,to tsoi^ ,t'in Mc' AlfTi-t^^C All saints are in heaven.
,To Joi qiu ^^1^31'tT All have arrived.
/I'c) s'ni oi' ^"1)P§- '^ I do not like any.
jYan ^to or 'ho ^to ^yan yv^ or jtj'^ A Many men or very many men.
/Fs'im is frequently used without a Noun, as: ^ts'im ap, ;^fH All signed.
3. Plural in the Punti Colloquial.
The phiral in the Piinti Colloquial, is exp?-essed by: —
Ti^ llJlfr, as : =i\,<i-o ti^ f^PJil we ; =ni ti^ W^M you ('tang and ,mun ^
and iH '''■'^ seldom heard).
'Ng-o ti^ yik, hii' |,|[fitli^i We also go.
'Lung 'tsung WJ& AU e.g. 'Lung 'tsung tai' hu ^liu Uly^S^riT
All has been carried away.
Ilam^ p^tng^ lang- PX^^jifP/'^ all, e.cj. Ham' P^'ing^ lang^ ^to hai^ yat,
yeang= ,che ^^^^^^J^^&%—W^^ They are all alike
very good.
Besides these words peculiar to the Punti and Hakka, the plural is
expressed by repetition, as : ,yan cy;^n J\,,/\ every man. jYan ryan hai^
'kom yeung^ w;? AA w'--^ wtfS'j J^^i y^h U H Every day or on
all da^'s.
Muii^ kwok, t% [lil All kingdoms. Pak, ,pan |i:| ^K In every way.
Ke' P|^ added to Pronouns and Adjectives also implies the plural, as :
Hai^ 'ni ke^ #f®Pfyt They are yours. ,Chan hai^ 'ho ke^ Mi^tt^^
The are really good ones.
Cuses.
Court Coll
Genitive.
Punti Coll
Genitive.
Ti^ ^^ (8) and ti'jSl ti^ ^Ml nnd k(? ^U
,Ying kwok, ti^ .shiin ^BJliiii (or S^) iilft An English vessel.
Note 8. — Whenever the character [l^ tik, is used in Canton Colloquial,
the k ought then to be drop])ed. In elegant colloquial writing
Oy ti^ is preferred to '0^ ti^' and ns ignorant teachers h-e-
quently give it its full sound, tho student should take care to
note the difference. (|^»J ^Ti with tho .p'ing ^sliing see com-
parative.)
Gra:«maii of tiik Ciiinesb LA>'QUAGn.
The Noun. The Genitive. Tlie JbcUire.
jWon^ irti' k6' ,kun^- M.'«il^''B>t tlf ^'Jie emnerop's palace,
A\tetPo,^ R'^iixf'S* Fnther's love.
/Jlmng kwok, ti- wu' f-p [^)|^g^ The Cliinese Inngnng-e.
/r'in tP jSing T^flJ^ 1'lie stars of Heaven.
The most common ciiaracter used in literary style is ^chi ^ as : —
FiV ,chi oi- 3c^S^ 'i'^ie fatlier's love.
Sliiii^ 'che ,chi fiik, ^^§''<£'5i^S The happiness of the cood.
.Hang- ^wai ,chi yeiing' -/ S m^'^^fi The manner of doing- things.
The genitive is also expressed b}- position, as : —
eYo ,su kau' !^1],S5^^ The doctrine ol" Jesns.
Kwok, fat, l^i'.^ The laws of a King-dom.
Dat'ice.
''{] %, ,wo ^il, tui' #j", t^ai^ ^, ,chu|f, ,ii 1)\ and ,u "^^are
words denoting the dative. In the Piniti Colloquial it'unjr |^j, kwo' )iH,
kiing- -^ and cmai J ^ are of jnoie frequent occurrence.
Court D'uth.'ct.
Tui^ „ ilftiifl^^ \ ^-^y 0'' ^Peak to liim.
.Wo „ "^wiMi)
Punti Colloquial.
'Pikwo'-k^ii |$JM15 Give it to him.
'i\i si'ung 'k'^ii ^kong f^i^lfijlBrii^ Speak to or with him.
Fong' cmiii kan^ -kMi ^^iSfiltte I'l't it close to him-
The following sontencos can be used in botli dialects.
n'j jk^i tiikj S^SbJ'I liead to kirn.,
'ij 'ng-o jmo jkon M''?-^S"F" It is notbing to me.
^U cyan jmo yik, |!^Af!R?m. ^f""" advantage to man.
Heung' ^tS'i hii' l«] ffii-. Co to bim.
K'apj jts'in 'ii ,kung .yan ^a Ja^^'-^i-yv CJive money to the workmen.
Accusative.
Tlic accnsativ« is easily I'ecognized by the Verb, which in most in-
stances precedes the object. In coll(»(]uial, and in negative senteuc3s of
the ktcrary stylo, the oliject sometimes precedes the "\'erb.
(2;i)
Qrammak of the Chinese Lakciuaok,
TItc Noun. Accusative. Vocaitre. Ablative.
Pnnti CoUoqniah
'Ng-o oi^ ^ni ^J^^f^'t I love you.
^Ngo ,fan fiV 'ni fJ^{I^P#f/J^ I order you.
Court Dialect.
«
jNgan 'tsz ^to faP 'liu ^M'T'W*vl T -^^^ f'l*^ monpy is spent.
-Mk, (Cbii, jTigau, ,t6 ,tseung liii' -liu ii^^g'^^ji;^-^ J They carried
off all tlio horses, pig-s uud cattle.
B. The object before the vei'b.
^Ngo jcbi pat, oi^ ^K'^^^ ^ I ^o ^ot like him.
MP ,chi juang jhang' ^^^H^^y Not able to effect it.
„ ^yau Sa, ^ •^^'tii There is no existence of such a thing.
Vocative.
The vocative is seldom expressed. In writings ^fu P^, 'yii "fjli, sii
||\ and in colloquial (0 [^p[, (ft B^, (tsoi ^, &c. occur most frequently.
Examples.
Fu'- <fu ^cP'f T^ather !
J 'ju Joi ! I^'fe^ Come here, Sir I
^Hingtai^ii X^S^ Brethren!
A talc, ^0 l^t^.^ Atak! or when in distress, jLong- ^kwan ^o
Sl^li^ my husband!
Ablative.
The ablative is expressed in as many ways as in English.
1. By Prepositions ;
2. By words expressing the passive form of the verb;
3. By words assuming the nature of Prepositions ; and
4. By tik, {^^ &c.
1. jYau jing kvvok, Joi ^:9i!^^ He comes from England.
Tbz' jHeung 'kong p{ ^i^ From Hongkong.
-i ,t6 shat, jyan iH7J^\ To kill with a sword.
2. Pi- syau ^sheung fix A"^ Injured ])y men.
3. ^KHi tap, .shiin ,loi tS#)IS^ He came by ship.
^K^li 'ta 1(V ,loi tHtX J§^ He came by land.
4. ,Kam tik, ^f]^ Of Gold.
,Ngaa tik, 01^^ Of silver.
(24)
Grammar op the Chinese LANOvrAOE.
The Noun. Diminiit'tces. Adjcctive-'i. Positive.
The precedintj sentences are vaiiousl}' expressed in tlie Punti Collo-
quial, e.<7.
Hai^ jan ^sh^ung- kwo' "kHi 'j^* .A. 1^)M I B Injured by men.
^Hai jing kwok, ;loi ke^ Pffi^H ^''i^ They come from England.
Yung' (to shiit cyan AN/J^/V Killed witti a sword.
Diminutives are expressed ly 'tsai yY, sai' jjtlH, 'siu /y* and a few
other cliaracters.
;r6 'tsai TJf? A small knife.
Sai\kanuk,^IIlt^^ A small
'^^ V :^f? A little girl. Sai^sLdH Ifflllf A hillock, [house.
Tipi ,. 'iS ff A small plate. ^Siu 'tse /h^fl. A little (young)
^Seung,, j^f'^IT A small box. miss.
Adjectives. Positioe.
1. Adjectives are indicated by their position, as : —
H6 jan ^J\. A good man. (9)
Ko' jan hai' 4i6 i^KMJj^ That man is good.
Adjectives are formed with tik pfxJ, ke' P^, and 'ho ^ e.g.
'U6 tik, ^fi^ Good. Ok, tik, ^J^ Bad.
When tik, ^fy (Punti Coll : ti^ fj^) and ke' P^^ are used without
a substantive, the meaning is not always so obvious ; for tik, \X^ when
following adjectives expressing space, form, colour, quality or condition
sometimes converts the positive into the comparative. It is then pro-
nounced (ti as : —
^Ni.chung i\ni .kan^fong ,ni 'f^t}7,'gB^pa^i^Bl& Do you like
this room.
'Ngo /m .chuno; i> ko' ^kan; oi' ,kan '^siii ,tij oi' (kau tai^ ,ti.
I do LOt like that; I hke one smaller, I like one larger.
jCh'eung ,ti ^ ^\f A httle longer. Hak, ^ti ^^^xf A little darker.
aio ,ti itfi>J A little better.
'Mai ko' pak, tik, p5' ^^ El Hv 'ill Purchase that white calico.
'Ni 'yau pak, ^ti hwh ,ni |$^ Q ^^^B^ Have you any whiter ?
'Yau ping-^ tik, ,yan iiV kin' ^ni ^^^^ AS^Mi^:^ There is a sick
man who wishes to see you.
In another sentence the quality of the adjective is much more ob-
vious, e. (J.
Note 9. — 'Ho jjj* is used as an Adverb ; -K'ii ^hang ,wai 'ho iBfT
>§i(f He conducts himself well. 416 'kau ^^% Very long.
(•35)
GuAMMAIi or TUB ClII.V.ESE LANGUAdn:.
Adjfctices. Positive. Compdvativc.
C. D. T:'ii^ t;ii» tik, ^fono- <tsz ix.'JK.il^ifj^ A very larg-e house.
Tikj [{>J is omitled wlieii two Adjectives are ])ut together, as: i'lV
kwai^ tvan ^ ^ yv -A. rich and honorable ]ierson.
In the Canton Colloquial ke^ P(]^ is more frequently used to express
the Adjective, e. <j.
-Yau ^ts'in k<? jan ^$M^^\ A wonKhy man.
'Kwai kwat, ke' jan WtWi^^f^ ^ crafty fellow.
,'M 'ho ke> shiit, WiV Pg-^i'^kiifS' 5=^1 hmo-unge.
'IIo iV RI ;•§ detestable. 41 o oi^ ke^ Pf ;S'''f^ Amiable, llo han^
ke^jyan "PffS^'iltA A hateful person.
2. Comparafice.
2. Tlje comparative and superlative are expressed by characters
corn'.s[)ont!in^- to our more and most.
J'osiiive. Comparative. Superlative.
'Wo jif Good. Kang'lio M5? Better, ChP 'ho ^il" The best.
-Mi ^ Beautiful. Kang' -mi M^ More beautiful. Chi' or kik, =qu
^ or fi^ Most beautiful.
The comparative is also expressed in the following- way.
^T.'z jan pP 'pi ,ya.i kang-' ok^ lltAJ^tMAMW^ This mau is
worse than that.
^Xgo pP 'ni 'ho yat, ,ti kom= ,to ^kAft^M'^^&^M^' I am a lit-
tle better tliVn you,
'Ng-o pi^ kau' -ni kan-' 'ho ^}^Wjli'S^MM' I am better than you.
*.N-o^ni\seun-tui^ 'nikang-^ 'ho ^kft^WMfi^MM I u com par-
ing ourselves, you are better than I.
Kang^ ^^ ^s sometimes followed by ,ii J^, as : —
,Kam yat, kang' 'ho ,u ,ts'in ,t'm 4^ H M^PsM^ This day is
finer than the day before yesterday.
The character expressing the comparative, omitted, as: —
^.\i pi- st'a ^ko 'f^'^j^tiifci^t You are taller than he.
Note y.— Asa Verb; Ho' ok, 0^ To love wickedness.
„ shin^ ij-^ To love the good.
As a Substantive; -K'ii k6' 'ho ,'m tsuk, 'kong 1&{^^\^^/l.m
ills virtue (g<judnesp) is not worth Sjieuking of.
( '^(5 )
GRAMMAn OF THE ClIINESE LANGUAGE.
A il/fcti ves. Conqjf'rativp.
^Kung tSL'nnt;^ j.P pat^ talc, fining- ,fu ,cbi' yimg' ^Ei^L^f-l^'A
^j'fi The usefulness of" a mechanic is not to be coui|iitre(l
with that of the luisbandinan.
titj fit, ^1^ also expresses the comparative, vlt^ i'di, 4i6 ^ WJ^
Still better.
tit, fai' lit, 4i6 M'l^M W The sooner the better.
Hole, ,shan<^ pat, 'ho pi^ ,sin ,sliang '^^^ PTi^k^^fe^ The pupil
cannot be compareJ with his master, i. e. be is inferior to bis master,
•C. D. Ch6' ko' pi^ 'na ko' yau' 'mi JE^^j^k^fi^tj X j^ This is more
beautiful than that.
AVo hai^ Icv^-ai' ,ii cngau ^H'feia J^® Peace is more precious tliau
silver.
Mi^ 'yau ^nan ^ii Hs'z ■^^Ic-iH.>7n O^L There have never been diffi-
culties worse than tliese.
ij^ ^to ii^ pat, tsuk, ^l^^A-^^^ The more he has, the less he
is satisfied.
^Tau ,sam ii* ii^ ^'^Vj^M^./lil Lamenting- more and more.
U^ fl'ii' ii^ i* '^k^hMMl The quicker the easier.
„ ^ka tts^e-jvam M ^^'^'^f^'/^ Still more dissolute.
„ *kau ii^ cBan ^^^^St The longer the more difficult.
„ lik, ii^ tung^^i ii^ pat' chi= J^.:/j^Wj n^^^Si^M Tlie greater
the exertion and excitement the less the chance of attainiuo- the
object.
.Yau okj ~)ti^ More wicked. ^Yau kwai' TC'S More strange
Yik/ho ^^ Better.
jKiiig 'sz pat, 'ho pui' '\i ^JE'T* ^TW^M Rather die than oi)pose
reason.
^Ts^zpat, cu^pikom'hak, ftt^^Pfi^Pti'M ^ This is lighter than that.
;iJ 'shui yik, ,sbam ji =fo yik, it, iXi'i<>^MM^X\i*XWti If the
"water become deeper and the tire hotter.
Pat, ,ii ^$P, pat, yeukj ^;^, mok, yeuk, ^^"" also express
rather, better.
Pat, ,ii chin' 'sz ^^P^^Jj^B Better die fig-hting-.
„ yeuk, pat, Jni ^^l^'A^T^ Better not come at all.
Mokj yeuk, ^kai h u' -Xr^TTtl'^i* Entber depart altogether.
„ till- (Chi (kung J^y\,^^ No gTcater ^ncrits.
(27)
Grammar of tub Ciiinrsk Langt'Aiik.
Adjcctloes. Compdratioe.
Sentences formed with ,ning ^, pat, jU ^f^J^P, pat, yuukj y^^
and niok, yeukj J^;^ <iie m general i)receiled by others sug-gestiny or
ex()ressiug sentiments of a dirieieut tenor.
The comparative is also frequently exjpressed by ^to ^^ mnny, jii
0]K more, surpluss, fony' iJL more, how much more, 'ch'un yfi\ still
tnrtlier, much more,
Ti ,to sbap, ko' W-3^~l l^ ^^^^ *^^ more, or in addition.
Shiii), ^to juin I ^^ ^^^^'^ than ter^ years.
Tak, -yuu ^ix cyan Q ^p] ^j^J^; /v More than one hundred men.
'N-o shi^ pit, hii', cho fono' hn ,u ^^>jL'i:\m^L%^- I must be
off, how mucli more mu-;t you.
'Ch'an Hrz 'yau .-ts^oi /vJlli-L-W '^ ^^'^"' mucli more is this mnn talented.
Pat, hi? 'ng- ,kan ^ pifc JT^ Not less than five catties,
K6 sliirig' pak, 'p'ui r^lp^ J-| Im Move than a Lutidred times higlier.
Tlie comparative is implied in the following sentences.
^Hi (ko ^sam cli'ek^ /^f^ZZl/v Raise it three feet Ingliei-.
'iVi hai' (ko yat, ch'ekj|/J\ j^ ^ — '/X You are one cubit taller.
<Tun yat, ts'iin' 7^ — 'TJ ^"^ ^^^^ shorter.
In Tunti Collofpiial the following expressions are cliiefly used to
denote the comparative.
'K'ii hi.i^ 'lib kwo^ higo tSjyf iTSIfe I^e is better than I.
^Kom ye'ung^ hai^ iit. fi'it, <h6 ^^^W-WMik^ Mftch better that way.
Ko' neung ko^ ,yan j.in ko' dio ,ni fi| 1^.1^61 A^fi ^J PjS. Which is
the better ol' tlu^ two ?
tjr, man' iit, dib M\W&^ 'I'^'e slower the better. ^
-Ngo jHing 'sz $^^i'ij I would rather die.
^tj is chiefly used in connection with kwo^ as :— -
Tiu' kwo' ji ^ngo Al® (l'>) ^^J^ OMer than I.
]N\)TE 10 — Care must be taken not to confound the meaning of Kwo' )i^,
when used in a different sense from the preceding.
It is used 1. — as a Verb, as: — Kwc^ 'shui }i^4^ To pass through or
over the water ;
2. — as an Auxiliary Verb denoting past time, as ; — Jiang \.\\o^ T} }'^
Passed or has passed along;
3.— as a Particle,, denoting the inipnrative mood, as: — 'Pi kwo' higo |^
GnAMMAK OF THE ClTINKSF, LANOTTAftK.
Adjectives. Suiierhit'tce
o. Superlative.
The Superlative is expressed by
Chi' ^, tsui^ ijj, sham^ ^, ^tsnn ^^ and tsun^ ^, ts'it, ^,
,sham ''^, tsiit, ^, , shii^^l^, Idk, § and a f<i\v others.
Chi' shin= M# The best ; Chi' 4i5 H^J do. ^f^ Chi' talc,
Extremely virtuous. Chi' (kung- i' 3^-^^^ Most righteous.
Kikj hni '|h?.^^ Extremely beautiful.
Shau' yuk, kik, 'I *^^'f^\l^ Very much disgraced.
Tsui' siiiin i^xH^ Extremely difficult.
„ 'kan iu' fi|^-^ Most important.
Sham' -iin -^Ji^ Very far. Sham' ,fi -^^p Very wrong'.
Pat, aning ^chi sham' -ya •^'*^>^-M"iHi Extremely obacnvo.
'Tsun ,ying f^i^ Very proper,
Ts'it, oi' -k'ii "yj'^lH Eoves him extreraeh'.
^Oi tHing' chi' ts'it, ^^M"^ Exceedinjily painful.
,Sham chung' ^{y^Mi. Very im])ortant.
jSham jwai 'ho oi' 'ipjc ^jf Pj 'i!^ Extremely amiable.
,Shu iinh mi' to' ^^?iivB4^^^ Not the least taste.
^Shii shuk, 4io Jin |4t/ii|^1^$ Very lamentable.
'Hoi ts4t, 'hiu ii' ^L KfiMi^iKf Very distinct orders.
/rs'ung- cliung' kau' piui' ■i/tEL:hifM Very severely prosecuted,
-fcj- art
Ki Jra ^f]^ Very severe.
,San lai' ,sbam M W^W^A^ilM ^1^^ new regulations are very rig'(S»rous.
'Han ik, II- 'Ho tak/han if #t4 Very good.
^Lang- tak, 'hau }^ ii=|i^ Very cold.
-Ni 'kom 'han ^sam j/]\|
,To tak, 'han ^\Vf^f<. Very many,
3^^-!^ Crive that to me ;
4. — as a Noun, denoting fault, ei'ror, as: — Tai' kwo' yC>^ A grent
Blunder. Yan^ ^ni kc? kwo' |Sf/J>fyt® Confess your fault;
5. — as an Adjective, as: — 'Yau kwo' ^j^.jiHi faulty j and
6. — as an Adverb, meaning onlij, as ; — Pat, kwo' yat^ .kau ^^)^ '/f*
Only one catty.
K'^^ How harsh you are !
(29)
Grammar of the Chinese liANOUAOE
Adject I ves. Superla t i ce.
1''uP (to J^^ Too much or too many.
5II0 t'ap iiali 'lio Jin i^ /C^.x '^J w How very Tinmorcii'ul !
jMo ^ts'ing t'ai^ sliam' ^:'\ViJ^vB Very unkind.
'lYii^ pat, ^tHmg ;^>PI^ Very different.
s'Tai' yat, miu^ ^ — t^ Most admirable, most excellent.
'Ting 'ho T^^ Very good. Sheung^ 'hb Jlif do.
8hi'ung- ^yatj 'tang JL "^ Of the best quality,
'l' ik, 'mang tik, JC^JSlov Very furious.
'JIo 'kau itf :A and ^Leung 'kau ^^i Very long.
4Iu (to 6^^ Very many.
A curious specimen of the Chinese idiom or Sinicism is 'ho ^^, when
followed by the negative pat, expressing very, e. g.
«Uo pat, jp'ing (On itf ^^^ Very peaceful.
„ 5AV0 muk, Jtr^^n^^ Extremely harmonious.
„ (On lok, ij^^l^ Very pleasant.
„ (Seiing sun' i^T^ffife Very good.
When 'ho jtj is followed by mut„ not, net at all, the meanino- is
different. (11.) _ °
'liomut, jleung^sam Jt{ JxM-^Cj) No .conscience at aU,
chi' hi' ^tJjt'Ui^^ Veryirresolute, no firmness of purpose.
„ to^ 'li 5TixS^^ ^'ery unreasonable, no firmness of
purpose.
Tsiit, -mi 5^^ Extremely beautiful.
it, pat, kwo' ^^>M Extremely hot.
,Yan pat, shing' shtV A-^ W X^Z An exceedingly large nuDiber of men.
Ok, pat, shing' ^>^0 Exceedingly wicked.
sMo 'sho 'ho (ka ^^j^ ^ JJH Cannot be exceeded.
IN'oTE 11. — Giitzlaff and J'reniare s:iy that niut, ^'^ is used in the same
sense as pat, when following 'ho 3tj'. Tint all the examiilws
given by Premare, show the reverse; whilst Giitzlaff" fails to
give a single sentence to confirm his assertion. Both express
^'cery,'' but one gives a i^ositis-e, and the other a negative
meaniu"-.
(30)
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
Adjectives. Superlative. The Prononn.
The Numerals shap, -yj-*, ptik, ^, cts'in ^ and man' ^^ fre-
quently denote the superlative degree.
Shap, (fan ^to tse* 'ni ~jrf}^^mi^ I «"^ extremely thankful to you^
jTsMn m;W pat, jhang- \^^i~X Do it l>y no means (it is ex-
tremely dang-erous.)
A few compounds expressing the superlative degree are here added
of which only one occurs in colloquial.
^Ch'm ,kw^an S^, ,chMn iit^ M.'M. cCh^u ch'euk, Jlip-, cli'6uk,
lap, -^-_LL, ch'euk, tslit, -P-^^, ch'euk, iitj -^;^ and a few others
all express, to surpass, to excel &c.
The following; are tlie most common characters used in Punti Collo-
quial to denote the superlative degree.
Chi' 'un ke' ,shan MS^^LU '^^^^ ^^^^ distant mountain.
-tin tak, tsai' M^^B^ ^'^'^ ^^''' ^^'^'emely far.
Tai^ tak, tsai^ ^#11?^ Far too large.
,K6 kwo' ct'au ^)&.^^ Too high, high in the extreme.
Kik, ok, ke' ^yan S^'^S A Extremely wicked man.
Shin' pat, shing' W^W Extremely virtuous.
Shapj /an /m ^chung i' "T^PaH' W^ I dislike it extremely.
Tai' ydt, 'ho ke' M^~^M^^ Of superior quality (No 1.)
Sheung' ^mai _L3?jv Superior quality of rice.
Sheung' ka' JL |M The highest prii;e.
These examples will suffice to guide the student in the use of the
superlative degree. The redundancy of the Chinese langtiage, as contnin-
ed in books, greatly contrasts with the poverty of the Collor|uinl, on,
vhich account I have 7'e]ieMt.ed the few chftractei-s forming the su])erlu-
tive degree, as we meet with them in the Punti Colloquial.
18. The Pronouns.
1. The Personal "^ronoun.
1. Cham- 1^ and ,\i ~j^ are only used by the emperor foi the roy-
al We, Ourselves:.
*Kwa cyan !^/\. tbelonely, solitary, who has not his equal, We, Ourselves.
J, ^^1—- ^^^^ ^"^^'S lienevolent, virtuous par excenence, We, Oar-
selves.
(81)
Grammar of the Ciiinkse Language,
Tlie Vronuvns. 2he Personal Pronoiin and Substitutes.
The 1. person sinf>ular is expressed by ^ng-o ^^^ jng ^', ^ii ^^
^i[ ~f*, ,m ji]f:, 'fu "hI, kau' fp of which the first three are those
chielij u.-^ed in books and conversittion.
2. kSubstitutes Jbr 1.
jShan ^ used by a minister of state.
-L6 ,fu ;^7C -An aged, venerable person.
'Pun })(V jt'oug- 7j-^ p|>^ I, the governor.
,, jkwan po^ >2)S gij ti" j) I, the hoppo.
„ 'lii -^p/f^ I, the prefect.
„ iiu' ^^/^ I, the magistrate.
„ cshing- >qi^l^ I, the assistant magistrate.
■Chi" h;i- /p f"* I, used by a citizen to his superior.
Kf^oi^ ,slieung ^T iW ^> ^^® foreign mei chant.
,[J tai* ^^^ Ij your humble younger brother.
llokj jsliang- ^*^ I, your pupil.
,Mun „ 11^ I, your pupil.
-M;in „ ii%5c. ^> *^6 humble writer,
Ilau- „ 'W.^ I, the youth.
The last five terms are chielly in use among relatives and literary
men.
'IV4n- ts'ipj rJI^ Ij yo"i" unworthy handmaid.
-1'4 ts'i'p, t^^ I> your handmaid,
Fi'in^ cyan ^li/v ^, the prisoner.
cNo .ts'oi ^yj ^y your slave (used by a Tartar, when addressing
His 31ajesty.)
'J'sui' cyan ^ /V I, the sinner, the criminal, and
-Ngai ffi^ I, the ant, are expressions frequently occurring in
petitions and letters of a similar' tenor,
^Siu ji /J^li The little child, and "
Tatj jsiu A^"^ "^'l^e degenerate one, stand for I, and are used by
sons when writing to their parents.
^Siii -nil A^^^ I. the little daughter (I, your doughter,)
„ ih^ A^^ The little Tauist, f , ir t ,
cP'nn to- 'J^'M. The poor Tiiui^t, /
(32)
Grammar of the Chinese Lanouage.
The Pronouns. The Personal Pronoun and Substitutes.
<Siu ,nai ^h^ I, tlie little nun. ( ^^^^^ ^^^. j^ ^j^^ ^^^^^
jP'an tiiai ^/b I; the poor nun, (
Pul< ^^ man-servant. jNu ^X slave, and
5pc£ ^^ maid-servant, are also frequently used for I by inferior officers
and their families when addressing their superiors.
Plural.
The plural is formed in the same manner as the plural of Nonns, by
the characters ^mun "JH"], 'tang ^, and in Punti Colloquial by the cha-
racter i^iii ti^ with and without 'hau P on the left, e. g.
,Wgo tP "^^ we.
Second Person.
1 1^, -ni f^, Hi ^ and the more obsolete forms Hi 25Cj 'Dili Ty*
yeukj ^^ and -ii $P all express thou or you.
4. Substitutes for The Personal Pronoun. Second Person.
With the exception of -ni Y^\\ these Pronouns are seldom used in
general conversation, and a variety of conventional terms are substituted
for the same. The most common of which are : —
/fsiin ka' .g.,g Sir, ^ Tai^yan >^ A- J^agnf^te* frequently
Sin jShang yC^ Teacher, used by the common people in writing to
o' 1 4;H aV c3- J strangers and relatives, must not he con-
fbcung ,kung4^0<2> Sir. j ,. ° , -.i .u u r i-
, -fm^ : I lounded with the address ot persons ot
Ki? sheung- i^_C Sir. l^rank, when it means Your Excellency.
Tai^ ,hing ^J^ Brother.
A' ,ko ES^ Do.
A' 'tse MS^B. Sister.
^Lo tai^* cyan :^A A a^icl 'I^" *'"' ^^^ :^/t"^ are terms chiefly ap-
plied to venerable persons of rank. ^Lo ,sin ^shang ^^/^
Venerable Sir, or teacher, is frequently heard in polite society.
^Lo t'ai' tHd' ^^fc^fc is an appellation often given to a ven-
erable lady of rank ; it also means venerable superior.
^L6 ^sz ^^1^ Venerable instructor.
fSban fu- fl$3c Spiritual father, is the term by which Eom. Catholic
p)-i<;sts ore adilresscd by tbeh' conveits.
Gcullcmen of le.-pectabilily. of lileiiiry rank, and filling the inleiiuv
(33)
Grammau ok thk Chinese Lancuaoe.
Pro)wuns and i<uhstitutes.
offices of government, aie addressed 'hh ,y6 ^^, Venerable father. A
private secretary to a m:)ndarin, councillors he. are called Sz jVc ffjl^
Instructing father. '
An Assistant District Magistrate T^ai^ .yo ^fc^, Great Father, Sire.
A Prefect, Sub-Prefect and District Mandarin Tai* 'lo je ~)^^
^^ Great venerable Sire.
A Governor General, Governor, Admiral &c. Td? jan ^J^ Your
Excellency.
A King, ^Ts'in sui' je T^^^ Your Majesty.
An Emi^eror, Man^ sui' ^ye ^j ^^ Do .
Shing' ^chii ^3E Sacred or August Lord, Your Ma-
PaiM]:V 1^7^ Your Majesty. fjesty.
^Kwong fiin* ^^S Briglit Pattern, Means vou.
jT'oi fan^ |z| ^Q Exalted Pattern do.
,Ngi'in fan* 8^5S Strict Pattern do.
(Hing c^gi'i^ Jul^M Brother's Countenance do.
cT'oi cngan t^f^M Exalted Countenance do.
,r jUgun milAH Worthy Pattern do.
'L6 st'oi jt^oi "^ jif -^ Venerable Sir • do.
All these terms are substitutes for the second person tJioii and 3/0?*,
and must be used in polite conversation and elegant writing.
5. Punti Colloquial.
In Punti Colloquial -ni f:$ for the singular and ^ni ti^ f>5^?li£ for
the plural are the must current expressions for tho^o and yo7(,. To make
too much use of the plural, is not considered elegant. Whilst the stu-
dent, therefore, should endeavour to acrpiaint himself with all the col-
loquial (or vulgar) terms in use among the people, he should nevertheless
take care to get such a command of the language, as to be able to con-
verse with educated people with case.
6. Personal Pronouns.
The words in general use to express the third Personal Pronoun are
,k4 ^, ,f a fiH, ,i 1^. ,kHi ^, %'ii fg and ,chi :^. ,K4 shut, ^
gJtj He, she or it says. cK4 ^chung Jifp Among them. Wai^ ,k'i
'sho tso^ ^^ffi^l& Made by liim. J i^ and /i ^tang "^^ are
seldom used in conversation and polite literature j they occur more fi*e-
quently in legal papers and edicts.
(34)
GUAMMAR OF THE CHINESE LANGUAGE.
Piononns. 3. Pemmal Pronouns. Possessive Pronovns.
As a Pronoun ^chi ^ is chiefly used in tlie objective case, as : —
(Tin meng- ,chi jZx^i^^ Heaven decreed it.
-Nn'o ^clii fClii ^^3<^ I know it. Tlii^clii -^^ Remove it.
'T:'i ,clu TT^ Strike him. ^Yau ^chi ^^ It is so.
/J's'an pi, fkung- ;§5? .^^'^^ 9^ > '^^ 2* ^^^ ^^^^ S ^i^ndi fre-
quently for it.
^Ts'an jloi ^ij|/|^ He has come (himself). (T'lu 'tsz ^kung- fkang
5^"f^:3§ltt The Emperor ploughs himself. 'Siu ,yan 'fan shi^ /J>A
J)C^ The inferior man reverses it. 'Kong 'che ojgij^ He who speaks.
In Punti Colloquial -IvHi JP. is almost exclusively used to express
the thiid Personal Pronoun.
^K'ii wa^ tHfg He said. ^K'ii 'tim ko' ,tang fg^J^ (0^ He lights
the lamp, ^K'ii 'ts4no; 'nl Joi JBinW^^ He invites you.
^KHi.fun'hi iUfkM- He rejoices. ,Ham =kHi Joi P^fE^ Call him.
Chak, fat, -k'ii ^"^ JS Eeprove him.
7. Possessive Pronouns.
The Possessive Pronoun is expressed by the Personal Pronoun with
or without certain additional particles, as : —
^Ngo 'mb ^ts'an ki' sun' Joi ^"©iSWfSyl^ % mother will
send a letter.
^Njfo kwok, ^1^ My Kingdom.
'Ni A' ,te i^M^ Your father.
^Ngo ti^ cwong shcung- ^p\J^_Ll Our August Emperer.
^Ni ti^ lb' ,shii f3^(J\;^r>^ Your book.
'K'ii ti^'tsz^nii ihtf^'f'^ His children.
Kilt, tak, I^S His virtue.
„ tik, }i^ ^ His house.
8. Substitutes of the Possessive Pronouns.
,Ka fti^ ^JK My, your or their father.
FiV ^ts'an 3cEl My father.
^Kd Jiing ^)u My or our elder brotlior.
'She tai* 'V^Wf Our younger brother.
A husband speaking of his wife, instead of saying : —
^Ngo -lo sp'o ^X^M ^^y w'fe, would say : —
Noi' ^yan p^/v The person within.
(35)
Grammau of the Chinese LA^:^xUAaE.
Possessiee Frononns. In I'unU CoUoquial.
Noi^ shat, (Aj ^ The one within the house.
sTs^ln Jong- fI^Z^ The mean one within the house.
Tak, ^fu i^Trfj The lonely woman.
jShan (ts^ai PJ^^ My clownish wife.
For my relation a Chinaman would say ^Sho ^ts'^an ^^^X/- My house.
Pai' uk, fliicM My vile dwelling.
Pai^ kwok, MH My vile country.
'J's'in^ sing-' H^^i My mean surname.
9. In Punti Colloqinal.
The Possessive Pronoun is formed by kc' n|^ as : —
=N^o ke^ ^t^oi ^P|tffi My ta))le.
'Ngo ke' fu^ ^ts^an ke^ ,sham ?i;P^3c|l.'ft# My father's g-arment.
-Ngo ti' ke' ^la ^iin ^?ti^P^ir£[llI Our flower garden.
'Ni ti^ ke' filing tai^ f>5^'ii!lPi5E }{, ^ Your bret hren.
-K'u ke' sp'^ang- ^yau iH'^'i/L^jJ ^ His friends.
Ling' ^tsiin ir-^ Your father.
^, chiug' '^JUh Your wife.
,. ,t^ono- ^^ Do.
long- '^nl) Y'our son.
Kwai' kwokj m [^ Your honorable country.
Ling' oi' ^^ Your daugliter.
Kwai' (kang H^ Your noble age?
J^ong craing ^^ Y^'our fragrant name.
^\vh sing' i^XX Your lofty surname.
'^Ngo ke' lic^lyi Mine. L\i ko' i'Wf^ Thine. ^vMi ke' fg^j^ His.
^i\go tf ke' ^i^l^ Ours. • '^ tP k<? f^ :i#|?Jt Yours &c.
The first ke' may be omitted ; and should be, where we have to deal
with the better classes of the people.
__10. Demonstratioe Fronouns.
The Demonstrative Pronoun this is expressed by '18*^2 |r|^, (SZ |yf,
s'li^ :^, c^^^^' i£> <^he' i^, cVi ^, ^fu ^ and the Punti -ni ti- f;^
^^ and ,ni' ti' t^|^^ ; that by 'che ^, 'pi i^^fe, 'na M aud ^vo Jig.
Tlie pbiial of the Pronouns is seldom expressed.
(8(>)
Grammar of the Chinese Laxguaoe.
Demunstratice Pronouns,
11. Examples.
'Ts'z jan mong^ jliang itt A^^T This man leads a bad life.
„ 'tang okj ,t'o ft^i^ift This kind of worthless fellows.
„ ^ciii wai^ 7a itk>S!^5ll'llL This is what was said.
Yeuk, ,clii Hs'z ^^t^ilt It He know this.
^ij Hs^z t^it In this place. Tsoi^ ^ts^z '^^t do. ,U 'ts^z ^0
i]^ Like this ; thus. 'Ts'z hau' jt^ ^ After this (henceforth).
Tsz- hau' S^'"^ After this time.
Sz ^Jf is mostly used in I'eference to events previously related.
Sz sshi ^0^ At this time or moment,
,Sz jan ,chi 'tsz ^^ A^^ This man's child.
Tai' yeuk, Si ,^z i^tfy^^W ft/f It is in general thus.
,Szsz^tJf# This affair. ,Ch'iu ,sz ts'ik, ,sz g^lifi^ljf He
is here (at this place) in the morning and evening.
Tsz fung^ ^^^ Received at this moment.
;rsz jSam lit, ^zm^ This third month.
Jvam ,tsz 'T*!^ ]\ow, at this time.
Tsoi^ ,tsz -ihx^ Here, at this place.
jTs'ung(tsz^(^^ From this tinie.
,U shi' i^^ I" this time.
,Tongshi-(Chicslii g ^UE-^^T Atthistirae(referringtocventsjustrelated.)
Shi^ ku' x^Fl^ on this account (hence)
1:2. The pvecedino- sentences are cbiefij' used in books; the follow-
ing are partly Court Colloquial, and partly in the literary style.
Cbe' ko' ^yan ;xM.tlS A This man. Che' ^shi ^0>j- This time.
Che' yeung- is,'^ In this manner. Che' 'tang ia,^" This.
jK'i syan ^ A This or that man. Jv'i ye' S'S That night.
'Che and 'sho ^ and fyX are Pronouns expressing the Demon-
strative and Relative Pronouns in the same character.
The former is only used in the literary style, the latter is ffequently
heard in conversation.
jTs'ung -ngo 'che -yt^-^ Those who follow me.
P 'die pat, 'ho takj jkim ZH/^"^ P] -f^^^ These two cannot be
had together,
Shi^ ^11 go 'sho oi- ,chi ,yan ■^^^J^J]''^ ^ /\, These are those
whom I love (my beloved).
(37)
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
Pronouns, lii'lative Pronouns.
^Ciie ^^ used for that and those, as : —
Han^ ^ngo 'chc ^ngo yik, haii^ ^chi f^^J^ ^fic ^tH^ I hate those
that hate me.
ShP 'ni 'sho tso' tik, ^Hi^ffx^t^ It is that which you made.
Ti ,shi fii^nj At that time.
Ti'ii' sun' .loi ^che shi' 'pi ^fp^^:;^f^ It is that man who
brought the letter.
'Na ,shl hau^ M^^"^ At that time. 'Na ko' jan JR^A That man.
jWai '1^ and jwai jfj^ when combined with jshi Bsf , time, become
Demonstratives, e. _</. cWai sshi ;i^H^ At that time.
(Kam ^nln '^^ This (the present) year. '=Pun iitj 2|^ j^ This montl).
13. In Ctinton Colloquial tins and that are expressed ))y ^Ni ko' ^B
10, ,ni tP PJStiife ko' ti^ iWA and 'ko ko' Hafl, as :-
^K'ii yap, ,ni ^kau .po ^t'au IB AB^I^M^IR He entered this shop.
,iNi kin^ Ve hai^ kik, 4ni ke' B/6 ff if SS^^I^ This is an ex-
tremely fine thing-.
,Ni ti^ ,yan hai^ ,sai kwok, Joi ke= ^fl^AKi^M®'^^^ These
■men are fiom western countries.
Ko' ti^ ^m 'ho iiaiikPaiff That is not good.
'Ko ko' jau hai^ shat, 'shau ok, -fQJg Af^'g^^^ Those men
are truly wicked.
When the Demonstrative Pronouns are used without a substantive,
the plural ti= PJ|U^ is followed by ke^ ^Wu, as :—
,Ni tP k6' B^'ii^^i)£ These; Ko' ti^ ke^ iEIlHiiiPlJt Those,
l-i. Relative Pronouns.
Tliese are 'sho pjx and 'che ^ .
Pit, ^yau 'sho ^sz ^^-^ ryf'S^ He must have something- to think of.
'Sho wai^ shin^ iW^iiS That which is called good.
jYan 'sho lok, • y\.)%|f!c That in which men delight.
'Ni 'sho yuk, fS^J^S^ That which you desire.
'K'ii 'sho 4 lai- 'die tS^iW^^ The one in whom he confides.
sMo 'sho pat, cWai ^J^^^ There is nothing that be would not do.
p. C.— ;Mo 'sho pat, .chi ^W^^^M There is nothing- that he does
not know (omniscient).
(38)
Grammar of the Chinese Languaoe.
Relative Pronouns. Literary Style. Puntl Colloquial.
5M5 'slio pat, jnang ^jyf'^^Ji There is nothing which he cannot
accomplish (omnipotent).
^.— 'Sbo swai'che ^ho sz^ ^^JS^I^f-?* What is it, that he is doing ?
. Shi^ ,Vi 'slio =i ,kun ,k^i ^sho ,yau JJllft ^ii^Sfti^Jf^? L'^'*'^
at the motives by which he is guided, and the principles irom which
he acts,
'Ngo ^sho oi^ ,chi mat, kin^ ^^irffi'^4^ff The thing-s I want.
*Ngo ^sho lok, ,chi cyan ^f^Jf^^^A The men I delight in.
jFan jk'i 'sho 'yau ){^^pj^^ All (that) he possesses.
SSho (tong shang r)X m i~T To do that which is propei*.
jFun 'sho (kau jvau /L^'r'iX. ^^ All with whom he associates.
Okj 'che ^^ The wicked, or he, who is wicked.
Shin- ,, ^y^ The virtuous, or those Avho are virtuous.
Hok, „ '^^^^ Students, or those who study.
jShan 'che jts'iin jchi ^iin ^ya |J4^:^<^7i^'ii!i ^Mountains are
the fountains of wells.
fFu hau' 'die shin^ kai' cvan ^chi chi', shin- shut, jyan^chi sz^ S;h6 -\'ii
^^^mWAZM'^iMkZt-^^^ Filial piety consists
in taithtully carrying out people's designs and appropriately recording
their doings.
Mi^ ^yau hok, 'yeung 'tsz ,f hau^ ka' 'che -ya ^'^ ^^-f'lfu J0
^i^liSL There are none [no women] who first learn the nursing of
children and afterwards marry.
,U 'ts'z 'che ^tsoi k'ap, ,Vi ,shan 'che =ya 'kU\lt^%lk''M:S'M
jjj He who acts thus will bring calamity ujton himself.
The Relative Pronoun is implied in the following sentences, as : —
*Ngo ^yau ,chi pat, ^^ ^"^ The pencil I have.
a D.—Ji'i shiif, tik, ,san ,man shi= ^shat, 'shau 4io Siftfixfl^iHS
^ Iq ^X The news he communicates is indeed very good.
P. C.-^Yau ko' ,mun ,t'o ,meng kiu> Atak, '^W\^^^^'^M
There was a disciple whcse name whs Atak.
Mi= ^yau kSipj ^t'h .chf .ts'oi ^'^^{^ '^^ There is none whose
tal+'nt could he com})ar{?d to his.
15. lu Punti CoUoiiuinl the Eelative Pronoun is expressed in the
following manner.
,Poug cli'an^ ^ngo k6' hai^ ngoi^ kwok, ,yan ^§!r^J^^^M^S
J\. Tliose who pntronize me, are foreigners.
(39)
GlIAMMAR OF TIIK ChINFSE LanOUAOK.
lli'lu:'r.' Tronouns. Ueciprocal rronouns.
^Ng-o ^sho ^chiu ke' ^yan ^ t'jf IK ^[vt A The men (wliom) 1 called
^ =Chino- luu= ,ni iV- =ye > LaP 'huke^ oa" ^M^M^Wf^^'U
nyCjK. He who tore this, is not a good man.
^i\go ch^ut, shai' ko' ,kan uk,, hai, 'hb ^vau ^bi k6' ^Jfe [Ij tft'O [^
>M'W»'it7y^^''B^ The house in which I was born, was erected long- ago.
;iam kok, ^ni ke^ ^kung- ,fu hai^ ko' ti' jan tMfflfS'^P^X;^^
1Ei Uv J\ ^^ "^^'^0 obstructs your labour, is that man.
llok, ,ni tP ke^ ha? >i [is^in ke' jan ^^^M^f^^^SPU
y\. Those who study this, are men of pro])0rty.
^iXgo 'sbai ko' tP ,yan ,^m bai^ ,ni ti^ ke' llSS^fS ^^ A P§"1il ^ji
Rv'"fyt -f I'equire those men, not these.
16. 'Reciprocal Pronouns.
These are tsz* @, 'ki Ei, ^tsSan ^^, ,kung ^, and ,shan jj''
and are combined in the following- manner, as : — tsz- 'ki ^ S 5 tsz- jka
P %<,, and 'pun ^shan ^^^. They have no pbiral form, and the cha-
racters employed to express the plural of Nouns and Pronouns cannot be
aiiplied to the Keciprocal Pronouns.
Examples.
^Sheung tsz' 'ki fi^* P Q To injure one's self.
Tsz^ ,ka ,loi § '^^ He came himself.
TV ,ka tso' § ^1S He made it himself.
jChiu wan' 'pun ,shan ^^^,A^^ To bring calamity upon himself.
jK'i ^ts'an hil' ^7^4* He went himself.
^K'ii tsz' 'Id cm5 yat, ko' ^ts'ln 15 § Q ^ — '10^ He himself
has not a single cash.
-Ngo (kung cmo ^ts'oi ^nang- ^:3? S>T*^b I ^^ myself without talent.
Tukj tsz' yat, ^yan tsoi' ® Q — ^ A ffi I am by myself.
Mutual, each other, one another, are expressed ^by ^seung 71^, u'
^seung Sffi and tui' 0^* .
Examples.
.Seungoi' i'B'S To love one another. ^Seun;^ 'tu fflfT To
fight witb each other. U' ^seung- han' Hi>l''0lR To hate each other.
^^■vAnx^ fpong- ^6^ To assist each other. U' ^seung jwo muk, ^4^3
1^ To live in mutual harmony.
(40)
GllAMMAR OF TUE ClIINESE LANGUAGE.
Reciprocal Pronouns. Interrogative Pronouns.
Sing' sts'ing- ^seung ying' *|!£Tpi'T0i§ Dispositions corresponding
to each other.
FiV kwai' fSeung tui' j^ M4*o^X Riches and honor go always
together (correspond to each other.)
'Pi 'ts'i. ^scung ^1 f^ll:t;i@i$ They depend on each other.
Tsz* u^ § S . Mutual regard.
There is little ditFerence between the preceding phrases and the
Punti Colloquial. The U. Pronoun invariably follows the Personal '^ro-
noun.
Examples.
^Ngo tsj5* 'ki kin' kwo' 'k'ii ^j^ pf 2< M^iStS I sf^w him myself.
^Ngo tsz'- 'kf 'hi tak, ,nf ti^ \y6 ^ g \±MU^M^^ ^ can lift
this myself. ^KHi ,s6ung nau' 10. ffi fH They scold one another.
^Ts'an tso^ ke^ S,f^^S I made it myself.
17, Interror/otive Pronouns.
jShui fl^, shukj f/t, and Jio ^, stand for who ? jho ifcrf, mat,
^ye ^S^^ and ,pin tik, ^9y for which and what ?
Examples.
sSlmi jts'ang 'se 'ts^z f^l'^'/^ltb Who has written this?
jShui ,chf 'tsz p^^'l "Whose son is it?
,T=au ^ni kiu= ,sham sW' cshui ,u filjf^^f^f^ftStt^ Who stole
vour dress ?
'Ts'z mat, shf^ ,shui tik, ft#?S:^Sfl&4 Whose is this ?
Ti kwo' ^ya ,simi ,ni 'f^J^'lBp^'Tu To whom did you give it !
Shuk, ,chf ,chi fjfc^lJ^ Who knmvs.it ?
'Pi jSam cyan shuk, tai^ f^^ A?/t>^ Who is the eldest of those
three ? _ _^^
'Ho sin' shuk, sham' 'ho ,oi slnik, sham' '^^ShW^^^KW
Could anything be more ridiculous or more lamentable !
ShP sho jnu ;^^ A Who is it ? cHo sz' i^^ What business ?
„ „ ku' ^1^ik What is the cause ?
Hot, ^, 'hf ^ and ,m i^ stand sometimes for Jio W-
^Kau ^wan ,ho ^ynn ^^Pf \ Given to whom?
.Ho jch^eung f^^ What is the length ?
(41)
(tRA-vimar or THE Chinksk Laxguaoe.
Interrogative Pronouns. Indefinite Fronouns.
,IIo ku' fj ft^ What is tlij reason ? Why ? ^Wai ,ho pat, liii^ ^fejflf
A^^ Why? On what !u-;-oiint wouKI you not g'O ?
\ij ,ho ^n^^, yeak, ^ho Jf JHf Plow ? In what manner ?
-Ni P yeukj ^ho j!f\ '% Jfl"^ What is your opinion of it .''
Sz^ Jio ^ii 'ts'z ^f^lirijlt How is it, that matters have come to this ?
riit.lun^hosyau ^Ijgfjf A Whosoever.'' Jlo ch^u= ff^^ Where?
At what phice ?
Mni^ mat, ^ye sz^ 1^-{i^^ Wliat is the matter ?
-Ni oi^ j)ln ko' jii f^'-g' i^l f@ Which do you prefer ?
^Ni q.on- kH^p, ,pin ko> k6' ,ni f5'^^iiitei:E''S Of which
(whom) do you speak/
Tai^ 'ki yat^ ^^oi ^jv->^ Fl 5R On what day do you come?
^Ni 'eai mat, S'e ,ni f:^^!^!!^!^/^ What are you looking- at ?
^Ni oi^ mat/ye ,m f/Jt^-fe^^ What do you want. ?
The preceding- twelve phrases are chiefly used in Punti CoUunuial :
The following' are alternately, but seldom, heard,
'Ts/ ^tscun^ ,ch'au ,i -f'M^%i^ On whom will you depend ?
6\Z>.— 'Cham ,mo "^B.^^ ^^i^^m^ c^o ®jg and shap. ,mo fh'$ all
signify what .^ 'Na ko^ ^ H, Shi^-na ko' tik, ^shii ft^[5f[f^f #
mose book is it ? ^iN'i cmun ,chi t^ ,se sham= ,mo j/jtff^ B' ifi ^S
j^lt What are you capable of knowing ?
18. In Punti Colloquial there are only a few Interrogative Pronouns in
general use.
Examples.
Mat, cShui Joi ,ni -f^f^^?^ Who has arrived ?
Hai' jDin ko' cyan ke' 'ka_n ,ni W&MK^^iM^Ji^ Whose dog- is it ?
Wai' mat, ^ye 'la ^kHi ^Ig'&iftTtB Why (for what reason) do you
strike kirn ?
Wai* mat, sz^ kon' jlai ^'H^WW'W What have you come for ?
Hai^ fpin ch'ii' jan 'fe?^^ A. Whence (from what place) is this man i
19. Indefinite Fronouns.
All is expressed (1.) by ^fan /t, as: — ^fan ^kam ^chi jau )\i^^J\
All the men of the present age.
,Fan =yau hiit, hi^ 'chc jl^lDl^ ^ AH mortals.
Tan- cfiin ']ll/L All that, or whosoever.
(42)
Graimmai; of the Chinesk Lanoitage,
Indefinite Pruntmyis.
,Chu ^f^ln 'kom wi? iSJi^BS All said so. (12.)
2. Cluing' -jj^ as : — Clmng' sliiit, ,fan jWan c^Kift'T^/fe All spoke cou-
ftisoflly.
Cliung-^ cham ^t^ng cham^ nieng^ c^^l^SSMw All obey Our com-
Clmng' jSii ^tam 'po ^.^^'fSlS All recpiire security. [mamis.
■^Kw^ pat, tikj chung' ^^pj^*^ A- few would not resist a multitude,
3. ,Chu g^ as:— ^Chii^kung-^^ All you gentlemen.
fUhii sz* ^^^ -^^^ affairs.
4. Shii' (13.) 1^ as:— Shii^jnan JF^K All the people.
6. -.K^ii ^ as :— Van ,kAi Jiing tai^ 'ya A"^.)tl^'ifii All men
Man^ mat, ^kai ^sliang ^v/^'^Sl All things grow. [are brethren.
6. K'oi'_(14.) Ill as:-Yat,kW— |fS Alto-ether.
7. /ro f-p as:— sYan ,to ^kom ^kong AS^tlK^ All people speaking
8. ,Kii "m as :— Kii cheuk, 'U|^^ ^ All are right, [the same way.
9. cHs\m Jm as:— ^Ham ^kwai 'ni j^'ifij/^ All revert to you.
10. ,Ts'im M as :— /rs'im ^p, ^\i^ AH signed.
11. ,Ts'ai B^ as :— ,Ts^ai cliHit, ^\Hj All issued forth.
12. H5p,- pj as:— Hopj^ka j^^ The whole family.
18. Kung^ )^ as :— Kung= kai' "^ft The whole amount.
14. Sik, S as:— Sikj^chi^chi^^H;^ All know it.
15. Yat, ts^ai' — '^ as :— Yat, ts^ai' ^shai sai' — 'Mll&^jl I^''-ve spent
16. Tsun^ S as :— Tsun^ tsut, ^^ All died. [the whole.
17. Yat, H^ung — ^ All, the whole.
18. Tai^ M ^ A^ as :— TaiSka ,chnng i' A ^ 4* .^ All are
pleased [with if]. (For the rest of the Collective Pronouns seo Adjectives).
Another and other ,T'a ftli, pit, M, lir.g^ ^ and i^ ^ .
Examples.
JT'h yatj Joi ^ts^z {tlL ^il:^ Come another day.
Pit, ko' tsu^ tak, 5!JM#"# The other will do.
Note 12.— Tai^ ,fan A Hi means generally ; fat, ,fan |§ jl For the
most part ; jfan iiV j'L ^ The most important of the whole.
l,3.-_Shu' ^^ |ff^ Almost.
14. — Tai^ k'oi' yC4'B^ In general, ou the average.
(43)
Grammar of tiik CniNKSK TMNOi'Ar.K.
Indefinite Pronouns.
'Yan pit, yeun-^ piV .mo ,ni ^^ijl^ 1^7 fish's Have you any other
stuff t
Ling= ngoP ^au ,fong f:'it, T^^hfj^^fe There are some otlier
means.
Ling^ ^yau ^Tigan jts4n 3^"'^] SS He has some money besides.
I^ yatj ^. P Anotlier day.
Kin' ,yan ,chi shat, ,u kin' =ki ,chi shat, Mj A ^^-^P^ B ^ >^^
JiOok upon the loss of others as yon do up^n your oAvn.
Any, any one, an}' body, any body else, are exj)ressed in the following
riauner
^Ni -yau 'tsau ^mo ^ni f5^ tifS ^v^ Have you any wine ?
nSoro ,tb ,mb lok, :|IcSP^^^ No, I have not any.
^Ni t.e' tak, =ngo ,to ^shiu ,ngan ^mo ,ni f^^^fg t#|J^i^^J^SS^J'#
Can you lend me any money ?
^Wgo ,kam csbi /m ,ts^ang =yau .ngan ft^ 4"B$P§-'§'-^ifi I have not
any at present.
'Yau jan man^ k'ap, ^ni ,m6 ,ni ^ AT^'^ Iki/S^M^)^ Has any body
inquired after you ?
,M(\ k, ,mo yat,' ko' ^PJ, M^iS No, not any. [or Yat, ko' ,th
"UJO.
Pat, lun^ cho jan fAn^ 'ts'z fat, 'ngo pit, fat, ,chi shap, tai^ din ^pKH W
A^H it ft |6 # Wl ^ +Ji n Any body transgressing this law
shall be lined ten dollars.
Lino^ ngoi' 'yau cvan tsoi^mo ,ni 3^:^j^^jA'iEftSBK ^^ there any
body there besides ?
Aught, as : — Chiu' 'ngo jii kin' !IH$»C.^»M/ ^^i" aught I know.
Loth, 'Leung ko' j^^fflii as: — ^JNi ti^ 'leung ko' ^yan ^ib 'im peng^
B'S.SlilS ffl ASr^M^_Both these men are very sick. .
T'che^kii^sz H^ ^M Both have died.
-^]b 'ts'z ,kii ^mong '^~f"^^ Botli mother and cliild ])erished.
Jfing tai^ 'leung ,yan ,kim fnn' ITit, jl^iPH Afl^Uft ^o^h
bi others have transgressed the law.
20. Pvnti CoUoquial.
^Sheung 'shau '^■^ Both hands.
'Leung yeung' ke' Pl|^^^i5£ Both kinds; both ways.
'Leung ,kan hai^ ,san =hi ke' ffipji'fj IliTfli^Pyt Both houses have re-
cently been erected.
(M)
Grammar of tiik Chinese LANGUArxK.
lii def a'ite Fron o u n .s' .
-Leung- wai' shik^ ii'iir -lin j^ f>/ ^^"ffi ) I^oth geutlemen have (Unecl
^Leung- ko' ,th liaP ,Hnj? li^ S^ ^j^lS^fp #'] l^"^^>i '-^I'e clever.
^\i -ngo kok, yat, kin^ i5>^^-& fv "^^^'e ^'Oth have one.
'L3ung kin' 'ho W 'cha pjf 'ff ^^'^^Borh pieces are very dirty.
Certain. ^Man jan kwo' 'ts'z ^/V^^il't A certain person passed
along.
-31 an hak, clai ^^%^ A certain strang-er is here.
^Ni jkau ,u -man ju j^'^/^-M^^ And you have intercourse with
such a one !
Wak^ lit, S>v. A certain person, some body says.
21. Pujiti Colloquial of Certain.
^Yau p6^ fShii j^rn 'ho tuk, ^^ OH^Pa-J^S^ There is a certain book
■which you should not read.
-Yau ,yan hai^ 'kom 'kong lok, ^ A.fe'Slu^i^^'^ Certain persons liave
said so. *^
^Yan ,yan ,'m sun' csban ^'m sun' =kwai ^ A ?§#)!# Pa fS^ There
are certain men who >)elipve neither in good nor evil spirits.
-Yau-mau ^kun to' ^^ ^ ^] A certain officer has arrived.
Wsik, cvan w;? 'kom yeung^ tso^ 'ho '^ ASS^^iff.^ Certain men
say, to do it in that way would do.
Each, every, Kok, kwok, ^yau ck'i ^{l<j^/^ Every nation has its
own flag'.
Kok, (beung yat, .yan ^^vpj) '/\. One person from each villaL>'e.
„ pan^ 'ki sz^ ^^Mt^^' Each manages his own business.
„ tsz- wan- chin' -^p/.tL^^ Each fought at random.
'Mui svaa tak, yat, kin^ ^i ^sheung- f^AI^J — TT^^ Each man
got one garment.
-Yau cp'an cvnn ts'at, ko', 'pi 'mui jan shap, ko' ,ts'in -^J^l yv't* 10
;^-?^ A»~t" jp|?tj!^ There are seven poor men, give each ten cash.
Chuk, kin'- sz^ MifF^ Each afFair.
-Mui ch'ii' ^sheung takj ngon- -^/^ .Jl ^tt /^ You may laud at each
place.
Eitlier is expressed by wak, ^, yik, 1|>P &c.
Wak, -nl wak, 'ngo M cheuk, UX^ffl^^^^uX' Either you or I am
wrong.
Wuk, 'pi wakj 'ts'z ^X i/>i^AiXu Either that or this.
(4o)
Gkammau of TiiK CiriNEPK Languaor.
Indefinite Pronoun'i.
Yik, 't:i yilc, ,\vo ^ tlW^O Fig-ht or make peace.
Ko^ Menu- ko' ,yan ^clii yat, ,t/au ^ng-o ^ye filSflS A^— fHullil*
One ot the two men {i.e. either the one or other) must have stolen my
thing-s.
Eveiy, every one, every body, every thing are expressed by kok,
-0', ^mui ■^, chukj yat, 3^ ', by the Collective Pronouns .chii ^,
(k'ai g , fiiu^ /Li ifcc. ; and by the repetition of the subjects spoken of.
Kok, kwokj ^yau jWong ^'[icj-^i Every kingdoni has its [own] so-
vereign.
Kok, jVan -yau '^sho ^i ^ J\'^ r/T]^ Evei-y body has something to
depend on.
-Mill .nin s/} hai^ 'kom ^^r^'Ml'lm Affairs are the same every year.
Chung' (Sliang ^.^, Every living creature.
Kin^ kin' bai' yat, yeung' TT TT W? 'W Every thing is the same.
Eew is expressed by ^ki ko' ^fl> sho' ^ji, ,to ^shiu ^:j^^ and =kwa
^Ngo "vau ^ki p6' ,shu ^t^ ^ 3H W I huve a few volumes.
(San 'hi slio' ,kan uk, ^^^J^ M ['t'^ey] recently erected a fe^wr
dwelling houses.
jTs^ii 'ki yat, jloi j^lj %g H y^ Arrived a few days ago.
'Ta 'ki 4ia f] ^gl^h Struck him several times, or give him a few blows.
Little h expressed by the snme characters as few, as : —
-KHi jmo 'ki ^to shik, mat, iB^^^^if^ He has little provision.
Many is expressed by ^to ^ • by the Collective Pronouns chung^ -^,
shii' Iff &c., and by the Numerals man' ^ , pak, p &c.
Examples.
,To tse' -ni ^f^f fS> Many thanks to you.
Lok2 'ho (to Hi y^^J^^^ It rains much.
Pat, (to jnin >^^^ JNot many years.
Lii' ts'z' /^yt ; ,to ts'z' ^■^ Many times, many a time.
'Hii (to B'F3^ Very many.
^KMi ^yau I10 (to (fong fat, jH^iff" ^^S He has many means.
-No-o^tang>n =hO(to'kvvo shat, ^-^^Jif^-M'H We have a
great deal of iruit.
Most, as an ladelinlto Pronoun, is expressed by clif Hi; and by other
(46)
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
Indefinite Pronouns.
characters expressing- the Superlative Degree being- prefixed to ^to ^ and
other Pronouns, as : —
Clii\to M^ Most. Chi\to ^fu :mm M^'S^S Most sufFeriao-s.
Neither is expressed by a double negative, or by a Collective Pronoun
precediug' the final neg-ative, as : —
Pat, shin^ pat, ok, ^^^^f*^ Neither good nor bad.
JLd.m ^ngan ^ngo ^kai cmo 'g^^^fll ^ I have neither gold nor silver.
(I shik, 'k'ii ^to cmo ^^10.-^^ He hns neither food nor raiment.
No is expressed by a large number of negatives, as : —
Pat, tak, 4 ^'f^Ci No resourse.
,Mo noiSho ^^ jof do.
j'M (Seung ,kon P§;j^0^ No matter.
^K'ii jtno ^16 ^kung |H^^<^ She has no husband.
sMo jan ^ A No body.
(To ^mh cyan ^^A. Not .mv body.
Ling"- ngoi^ ^mo jan -^ypSlEyV^ No body else.
^'M kin' tak, yat, ko' jan PQ'M 1^ ' iBlA. I ^ee no one • I can't see
any one.
Ling^ ngoi^ ,to c'm kin' yat, ko' jan :8^^f[^P§-^— *^0A I see
no one else.
None, not any. Tsok, yat, ^ngo -yau ^ngan, ,kam yat, 'ngo ,to cmo ^^
P ^ >^ ^-^ B ^ Wii M Yesterday I had money, to-day Ihave
none.
Yat, ko' mi^ S^aix hii' — ^^-'^^ Not one loft.
Tsung cm6 |B^, ,kai .mo ^^, ,ih cmo ^ji^E and other Collective
Pronouns followed by ti/e negative particles c^o y^^, pat, '°yau A^^
&c. express none, none at all, not any.
Nothing, not any thing.
^K'ii c'm jts^ang tso- ,kung ^fu jH'^a^fSX;^ He has done nothing.
^KMi > .ts'ang ^yau ,liang ts^o' iW^^'Ufii^ He has not done
any thing wrong. •
^K'ii ,t6 ^mh ts^o' kwo' |^|^ t^iiB )JSL He has not done any thing wrong
at all.
One, as an Indefinite Pronoun, is often implied as : —
,'M ,(;hi tiV 'tiin yeung^ ^ta Sun' ^1§ ^ ^lj.1/|^ fT^ One does not
know what to do.
(47)
GRAMJIAn OF THE ClII.VKSE LaNOTIAOR.
Indeflnife Pronotms.
Yat, ko' haP ^\ih, yat, ko' /m liaP 'lie, —"Wii^M — 'Wui^M The
one is g'ood, the other not.
One another, as: — ^IC^ii ^seuno;- oi' )|3.'miB^ They love one another.
One and all, as : — Yat, k'oi' hai^ ok, ^^t'PEI^j^ They are bad one
and all.
Yat, ping^ jf'an Joi — '^Tffl^^ One and all liave returned. Other (see
Another.)
Some (see Others.)
,Ni tP ,shii ,chuno- ^yan 1a ko' '\\h ke\ =yau 'ki ko' ,'m 'h6 ke' 5^?^^
Pl^^lI1laS'P.^ll"S1SPaiffP|t Of these books some are good,
the others are bad.
People. ,Yan /un ^hi 'kong AMJiS^ People like to talk.
Several. 'KHi^yausho'^tsing- f^^^^ He has several wells.
-Yau 'ki ^kan jWong ,kung tsoi^ 'pi ^^!I^^§*^IS There are
several Imperial palaces there.
£K'u jing- jshing Id ^fan tEifi^f^^^ He promised several times.
Some body, some one. -Yau cyan kiu' "nijloi ■^A.^TW'*^ ^ome body
bas called you.
Shi- ])it, in' ^yau yat, ko' ^yan Ha lun- ^ni ti^ ^po Ji ^tsun ^iJo^^p^ '
i^KtSfWJ&^^A "JiSw% ^Some one must have broken this tumbler.
^Yau sz^ s'm cheukj '^^P^"^ There is something' wrong.
Such. cUHs'z'tangok, jvan ^l-{ilt§[§ A Such bad men as these.
King' wai' sheung^ tui' 'che pat, p'tV ,mo Ivwai V^L S _t W-^^ W
fl^^i Such as fear God do not fear the devil.
-^iNgo > kP tak, kom' lio ke' ,t'in ^lEflpfl'llxP^?? I never re-
member such a fine day as this.
^Sin ,t'au ke' ^tM 4X The former.
,Shau =mi ke' ■^fc^'^llt The latter.
14. Numerals.
The thi'ee ways of writing the Numerals are called : —
nz; -Jr-AAm^ rj ^4^ / The original cha-
(a,) ,Un 'pun tik, sho' muk, tsz' j^ ^m ^J^ 9 "X- 1 racters ;
, ,, , , JU'f?? iVi-'^fciA- PI *=3f* f The capital mode of
(b,) Tui^ =se tik, sbo' muk, tsz^ :KU H^J^ H ^ | writing ;
(.,) ,Yh ^mh tik, sIkV muk, tsz^ ^IZ^MWl @ ^ P^ abbreviated
' 'S^Wri^Vfrn^i form used in cur-
or ,Su ,chau 'ma sIkV mnk, tsz? ;-.Vi^>Tl i*"^J'M N -JT (, I'^nt accounts.
(48)
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
Indcjlmte Pronouns.
They are represented in the followinti; lines : —
1. Cardinal J^iumhers.
a. " h. c.
1 -^ S I Yat,
2 H ^ II p (ir.)
3 H g- III cSam
4 . 6t >C Sz^
5 31 f£ ^ 'Ng
6 y>» P^ JL Luk,
? -b ^ I^ Ts^at,
8 A U ^ Put
9
a
;fc ^ is: ^Kau--- >b
10 + to 1+ Shap, ^
The first mode of writing is the one generally followed in books ; the
second in important documents and accounts, in order to yuard against
fraud; and the third in current accounts.
11 ~| — ' Shapj 3^at,
12 -pZl » i'
13 +H » ,sdm
14 +1^ " sz^
15 +^ » ^ng
16 "I y^ » lukj
17 "h-t » ts^at,
18 +A » pdt,
19 '\% » 'kau
20 Z1+ Pshap,
21 Zl~h — ' Pshapjjat'
30 ;r^~r' (Sam shap^
40 P^]+ Sz'shap,
50 jE-h 'Ng shap,
60 yST I Lukj shap,
70 -ti" Ts^at, shap,
Note 15. — ''Leung pjf is generally used for two in Colloquial, as: —
'Leung ko' jan Pff fjB/V Two men.
(49)
CJnA^IMAli OF TlIK ClIINESE liANfiHAl iK.
JS'itmeraJ.^. Cardinal Nvmhers.
100 — g" Yat, pj'ik,
oOO 3£'g* 'N}.- pi'ik,
1,000 — '"f- Yufc, .ts^in
3,000 H^f* ,Siim .ts'in
10,000 — /^ Yat, m^n'-
50,000 JlH ^No-ini'm'
100,000 -]rlk Sliaj), mfm' or yat, yik,.
1,000,000 — Q 74 Yat, pAk, mun^ or yat, cliiiV (16)
1,803 — 'T^AW>^+H Yat, ,ts'in pAt, pak, luk, shap, ,s^im.
In counting Irom a hundred and upwards to 110, the cliaracter Jiug
("and") is jjut before the additional number, as:~101 — "W^ — ' Yat,
I'=''^> Jing yat,; lOo — "g"§51 Yat, pak, Jing -'ng. "g* — * Tak, yat,
moans 110; Q*^ P^^k, 'ng- 150 Jcc.
The eudlcss kalpas of the Budhists and Tauiats arc frequently expressed
by ,t'ai ^, jeung ^^ ^kau )§, ^kan pjj, ,ching" IE, and tsoi' ^ .
2. A few examples of the various applications of the
A\meral Yat^.
Yat, yat, ' ' One by one.
Yat, jSam yat, i' — 'JVj) — ',1^^^ Of one mind and one purpose.
cM6 yat, pat, (Chi ^ — '^Jx^ Omniscient, or there is not one thing
which he does not know.
-K'u ke\sam pat, yat, tE^jCi*^ — ' They disagree.
,Fi yat, tsV ^ — -^ Not merely one mistake. *'* '
Yat, min^ ~^© Whilst.
Yat, min^ ch'ut, ^mun yat, min- ,fau fu' ^k'ii ke' -mai p6n- — J0 pj ™
— iffi'B§*Pfsi-tS''&l:KS$ Whilst leaving the house, he at the same
time gave orders to his steward.
Yat, (king — ^^ As soon as.
Yat, piin'^'hi, yat, pun' p'tV — '^^'•§- — 'H^Th I^^ partly rejoiced and
Yat, (Shang — '5E The whole life. [pfi'tly feared.
Yat, 'wong — '^ As soon as he had left.
Note 16. — The most common way of expressing one Million is Yat.,
j):'ik, man' — ' n /ij ]^0 mill yat, ^ts'in man- — ''T*-J§cr or Yat^ ^king
(50)
GUAMMAR OF THE CHINESE LANGUAGE.
Numerals. Cardinal Ntimbers.
^Cliiin yat, ^ — " Addicted to, devoted to.
Yat, 'sheunj^ yat, *ba '_ll — ""f* Up and down.
Yat, ,tin yat, 't(^ — '^ — '^J Topsy turvy.
'Pai yat, -lia g^ — 'PT^ Take a glance at it.
3; V H 2.
-K'ii patj -yau i^ ,sam iP.^'^lH^Ci* He is not double minded.
^v'ii -leung sui ^shoung (Slu'in 'tiny tHPHlSJ JII-UTM He ascended
^Leung jts'an ^5j5^ The })arents. [the peak twice.
^Leung tai' P!^^ The two great ones, i.e. Heaven and Earth.
'Leung tso' n^ita Plaintiff and defendant.
-Leung 'mi Prj^x '^^^ *^^^ beauties, i.e. genius in man and beuaty
'Leung 'leung chung- t^|1JjJ^, Two taels. [in woman-
4. Sam ^ 2.
The Numeral Three is often used in connection with certain objects hav-
ing regard either to popular belief, relations of life, certain offices of
government, or ironically, as a slang.
Examples.
fSam 'p6 ^W "^^6 three Budhas.
^Siim ^ts'oi m^^ The three powers (heaven, earth and man).
(S^m tsukj nn^^ The three kindreds (father, mother and wife).
^Sam (kong zn^f^ The three relations or ties (prince and minister,
father and son, husband and wife).
,S:im fpan r:r.^E Three classes of attendants in public courts, as : —
jMiin (pan f «^ Attendants on the magistrate 5
Ts6= (PSin ^Ji^ Lictors or torturers ;
Fai' ,p{in '1^]^ Official messengers.
,Sam k'apj tai^ m^^ The three highest Hanlin.
Sam sz ^^ The three Commissioners in a province, viz.
the Treasurer, the Judge, and the Superintendent of Salt.
Sam chek ^ehau z~* /^"^ A thief (a person with three hands).
,Sam ,k ly HY ^ A cross way.
4. 8z' !5^ 4.
This Numeral frequently expresses all aiuimd, «vcry where.
mill'
'lioi
liriini
(51)
Grammar of the Chinese Tjaxouaor.
Numerals. Cardinal Nnmhera.
Examples.
Sz^'lu'i IZ^flj^ All about. '
„ ch'ii' y}^ li^ Every ^vlicro.
» ffong p.y yf Tlic four points.
Y^ (Si 0" every side.
[/y ^ All the l)arbai-inns.
^jt^ The world, also Cliina.
I'A jwj Tlie four points of the compass.
., ^shi ['*^ Hvf The four seasons.
.. kwai^ PW^ Do.
>. ,chl [l^{^ The four members or extremities of the bod3^
- tai [L^if^a Do.
.. 'pL> |i!^{ ^^ Tlie four j^recious iliinf^'s (paper, ink, inkstand and
„ ^Ji^i'in '16 jdi^ilixl^:!. A person wearing- spectacles. [pencil).
., 1(V ,mi) ^mun [1*^ ^'pf^j^l } No resource, whichever way f turn.
'Hiu talc, sz' sz' luk, luk, ft tf P3 0:^>V He knows a little.
Sz' ^fong- muk, [Z^^V ^ A bbjckhead, a dolt.
'^Ni kom' sz' 'hoi che' f/J\p||'^ J^0^ What a courteous man you are !
This Numeral is applied to a certain class of objects, Ibe limited number
of which (according to their knowledge) appears to have been five, lience
it frequently signifies all.
Ng- ,sing
dii^m
The fivf
» planets.
„ kuk,
^.m.
,>
sorts of grain.
». clun
3:a
„ „
relations in life.
„ kau'
^M
„ „
precepts.
„ (bang
Hin
„
elements.
„ sink,
iEfi
3> „
colours.
,. mi^
5Lf*
„
tastes (or spices).
„ ;sh('ung 51 ''^*
»
virtues.
.. tsong"
:JiM
„
viscera.
„ ng-ok.
3l-frr
» JJ
highest mountains in China.
,. fuk.
3i.m
5» >J
blessings.
.. tsf'^uk,
liM
orders of nobility.
" M^s
3L-J7
„ f.)Ul
]u)iiits of tlic C(»UJ}.us^• and !he cen^ro.
(r,>3)
Grammar of the Chinhse LANGUAOii:.
Nwuerals. Cardinal Nicmhrrs.
7. Lukj ^\ 6.
Examples.
Luk }ji>p, >^i^ The four quarters of the earth with the zenith and
Lukj po- ^^iljl The six supreme tribunals at Pekino^. [ua-iir.
Luk, sfoiij^- ;;a% -^ The six departments of ad ministration iu a ])roviace
in iaiitation of the six hoards.
Lnk, kikj "^.^ The six calamities which ha])pon to men.
„ kukj ^-^'^ The six kinds of oTain on whicli man suhsists.
„ ch'ukj^^,^ The six kinds of animals on which men live.
8. They have besides the ts'at^ ching' -^UX The seven rog-irlators, viz
Sun, moon, and five planets. *
Ts'at, cts'ing- -tlpf Seven passions.
Put, fong' /^~/J Eight principal and subordinate points of the com-
pass.
Pat, fat, /v^ The eight laws of the criminal code.
Put, chang /Vtr The eight roads by winch the tributary grain ar-
rives at Peking.
'Kau ,ying yL/pJ The nine punishments.
„ ^t'slin jh-^ The nine fountains above liades.
„ k'iu^ jLy^k, The nine passages of the body.
„ 'pan yLpp The nine grades of oihciai rank.
Shap, and ebap^ fan^ "i and ~| :Z| ^i'^ equivalent to perfect.
Shap, fan' 4i6 +:^fif Perfectly good.
Shap, fan' .'m cheuk, ~\-'^^^M "^'ery wrong.
Shap^ fan' ^ch'ing tsan' "h^^S^ Extremely thankful.
,Sam ,chung shap, fan'nau- it, J\j>4^~i*^iT!3!l!§ He was much dis-
turljed iu mind.
Hundred, thousand, ten thousand are used in a similar manner; but while;
shap, expresses perfection of quality, hundred itc. c(mipiise ciiiefly a
co!n]ilete (collective) number of quality, quantity, as : — Pak-, sing^ ^
^ All the Chinese tribes,
Pak, muk, ^^ All tlie trees.
Pak, fat, p-ak, chung' y^flj H fp Successful in every enterprise.
Pak, (ts'in m 'm- H l*^ An immense number.
Man- kwok, ^ ^ All nations.
Man^ sui' je ^]^^ Your Majesty.
(53)
GriAMMAn or tttk Chi nest. LANnnAnp,.
Nu7n(:rals. Ordmnl Numbers.
M;in^ fioiiiv ^Jj All parts of t.lie world.
-Mi'm' sliiii' Sitt Forallag'ps.
Yikj chiiV '^3^|S All the people.
9. Ordinal 2^ umbers.
'i'lie Ordinal Numbers are expressed by the pn-fix tai^ beforo the Cardinal
Niiiribi'i's, as : —
Tai- yat, 3^> — ' The first.
•' 1* ^/___ The second.
„ shap, |iv+ The tenth.
-, yat, ]Kilc, Qj — y The huridr.'dtli.
The prefix tai^ is, however, in j^-eneral omitted and implied in the follow-
iiiy bemuJiU'S^ as : —
• FTam ^fan<>- sbap, cnin }^:mL\^ The tentli year [of the reign] of
Sz' lit, [^ ^ The fourtb month. [Ilam-fung.
,Cbing lit, ,ch'o shap, lE^ ^Jl\ The tenrh day of the first month.
'Kiin -ng- ^^liL The fifth volume (of a set of books.)
In speaking oi' rulers, the prefix tai' must be exjjressed as : — "Lii tai-
sbap, sz' ko' @ M+E^HS Louis the 14th.
The first, the last &c., are expressed by the classifier ko' or by the suffix
ke', as ; —
1^- C. — jSiQ to' ko' yC^^l^^ The nist who arrived, or, the one who ar-
rived first.
,Shau 'm\ Vo' W i\^MM^ The last who arrived, or, the one who
arrived last.
,Sbau ^mi ko' jan cb'ti' ^iu yat, ko' ^J% \MA\!fh T "~' iBi ^Le last
bnt one. (17)
First and second quality of goods: — Sbeung^'mai Jl,^ Fii'^t quidity of
rice; ^cbung 'mai T^^ second do. The second best ^k'! ts'z' .}L'^^l.
L\ L.—'Ts'z pat, a' ^ii ^pi jit?^5S 7$1^S This is not inferior to that.
10. The Quotation Numbers are expressed in the same way as the Or-
dinal Numbers, e. g. Tai-yat,, 'k'ii ina, -k'ii; tai^ i^ Ha 'sz 'k'ii ^ — '
IB.^^IB, ^-^TTyij jH« First he used vile language, and secondly
ttc. killed him.
KoTE 17. — The Chinaman vv^ould express the latter sentence in the fol-
lowing n^.anner : — Tide, h;u- yat, ko' tu' ^sin kwo' 'k'ii ^•i'j'Dj^ Ji^^^'j /C
j^ |j3. Only one person arrived before liira.
(54)
Gkammar of tiik Chinese Language.
NiimernlR. MuitipUeation Numlms.
The Nuineralia Tterativa are expressed by the chnracters ts'z' ^, jui fS] ,
,i;in ^, ^ts(> j^, and in Punti Coll : by (pin ji^ he.
ExAjMPLES.
4vMi ,p5 ,ni tP tuk, yat, ts'z' tEl^^i^g — ^ He boiled this only
once.
-K'ii hu'kwo'^Ienn^,ni jg^J|§P^[Ej Tie went twice.
-Ngo jing- jShing- ^kii 'ki ^fan ^]^i|§j^tl3.-^ui! ^ promised him se-
veral times.
'Ngo ^fan fiV %'ii lei, pin $ic?^fi'^^^ ^ ordered him several times,
'Ki fUi ^gfKj Several times.
'llo ,to ^ui iif ^|E| Many times. Lii- tsV J^^ Frequently. ?Lui
ts'z' :^:y^, do. tLin ts'z' ^5/C Maiiy times in succession. Sit, sit,
J^J^ constantly; tsoi' ,s:im -{^f zzi ; jCh'ung jciriing tip^ tip, l^M^
*^ all express many a time, often.
11. The Multiplication Numbers are expressed in the following way.
, Single, as: — /frin ^sliam ^J\^ ^nly one dress.
Talc, yat, ko' jvan 7:^ — ' |jS/x Only one single individual.
Tuk, yat, chek, ^*hau ^ — '^y A single hand.
jTan jshan 'tsai ^:§'ff '^om but myself.
(Ch'^ung ^^ and(Shcung '^ express double, as : —
■K'iicheukj'jch'ung fuk, Ic.^^^^ He wears double garments.
,Ma jts'eung JjF^ A double harreled gun.
jSheung 'hau Idm' '^ \Ji ^Ij A double edged sword.
,Sam sch'nng ^chi tsak, lak, ^il.^/ciWi^^ Tluve doubled make six.
jCh'ung hak, jif tr SSll^i^'SW! Engrave this over again.
T'ni ^ Double, fold, as :—
Ti Mc'ii neung yfii k6m\to ^tSSfSpy'^ ^^i^'e him double the
quantity.
,Ki'i sz' yfii ^/nPH"® Make it four times the quantity.
Shap, -p'ui -jr^ Ten fold.
12. Fractions, ding sho' ^^ are expressed in the following way: —
Yat, pi'm' — '^ J-.
,Sam fan\vat, H^ — " T nlso^Sam fan' .cbi jat, z^^fT^ —
Sz' fan' ,ohi yat, V^^^^ — ■ '■ also Sz' fan' yat, |/il:>;^-^
'Ng fan' sz' i^t^H 4.
(55)
GnAMM\R OF THE CHINESE LANGUAGE.
Numerals. Mcamres of Capacity. Measure.^ of Leiujth.
Pat, fan' 'ng- /\j^^ ~ f.lso Pnt. f:.n ,clii 'n^ A:^^ j£"
'Pi jng-an ^siim jiin pun' "(^^^ M^ ^^i^e three dollars & one half.
Yatj jTiIn pun' — "^^ One year and-a-hulf.
Pun' ye= ^^^ Half tho ni-ht,
Tui^ pun' ^if^rip The grtnitor part, the majority.
Pun' sun"' pun' ji ^^^ h'^^p^^^ rialf helievinn^, half doubting.
B. Res]3ecting' the Collective Mumerals, as : ])air, brace, &c. see Clas-
sifiers.
13. Measures of Capacity.
Yat, nap, suk, ^wai yat, suk, — ')itU.;?j^ J^ — y^ 1 grain of maize is a siikj.
Lukj suk, 5\vai yat, ^kwai ^^^:/i^ — "^ ^ suk. make one ^kwai.
Shap^ ,:kwai ^wai yat, ts'iit, | 3^^ — 'llM 10 ,kwai make one ts'iit.
Shap; ts'iit, twai yat, ,ch'au ~h|M® 'l>^ 10 ts'iit, make one ,ch'au.
Shape ,ch'au jwai yat, cheuk, "i"^:^® '^ lC\ch'au make one cheuk,.
'Ng- cheuk, ^vvai yat, yeuk, 3l 'Vf^ — "^ 5 cheuk, make one yeuk,.
^Leung yeuk, jwaf yat, ki^p, P|^ h^^ — '-^ 2 yeuk, make one kop,.
Shap^ kop, swai yat, ,shiug | "W^ 'TV 1^' k5p, make one .shing-.
Shap, (Shingf jwai yat, 'tau "T'Tl ^ — '^ 10 shing- make one hok,
'Ng- 'tau jWai yat, huk, 3l-^^ 'fj'\ 5 'tau make one huk,
^Leung- huk, jWai yar, shek, Pfm-f /^ — '^ 2 huk, make (me shek,
'I'u tsak, lukj 'tan sz' ^shing ^|jjy^^P[5j^ 1 'fu is equal to 6 'tau 4
?{] tsak, shap, luk/tau y^MuFy^-n 1 s'i is equal tolG'tau. [,shing-.
^Ping- tsak, shap, luk, huk, ^^Pv ! y^Bi 1 pii^g is equal to l(i huk,.
Of the preceding measures the kop, the half (Sliing, the whole ^shing and
the 'tau are the only ones in actual use among the Chinese.
11. Measures of Lcnglh.
Y'at, nap, ^wai yat, fan' — '^jtu.^ — '"^ir 1 grain is one fan'.
Shap^ fan' ^wai yat, ts'iin' — yT Mi — '^ 1*^ i^^' make one inch.
Shaj), ts'iin' ^wai yat, ch'ek, | "^'-^ — '}\, 10 inches make one foot.
Shapjch'ek, jwai Yat,ch6ung-~p/\.^ — "^C 10 feet make one chcung*
^ ^ (rod).
Shaj), cheuug' ^wai yat, ^yan J yCJa^ 'yl 10 chcung- make 1 'yan.
1.5. Gcoiiraplvcal Divisions.
Pun' ts'iin' .wai y.it, Ji ^"^ J| — "jM ^^''1^' :"' '"^^^^ i'^ one ,li.
-i\g ts'un" rwai yat, iau^ 3^ ^ %h — yV 1''^^'*- i'^^l^'^'^ nvAi.^\ one fan.'
(5G)
Grammar of the Chinese Lanouaob.
Numerals. Land Measures. Weights.
'Nj^ ch'okj jwai yat, p(V ^EL/\./i^ — '^ Five ch'ekj make one pcV.
,S/im pak, Ink; shap, pc? cwai yat, ^li zzi @r>»^*| ^S — 'ftL Three
liundred and sixty po' make one ^li (mile).
V puk, 'np- shap, /li ,wai yat, to' Il"g*i+MS-^S Two hun-
dred and fifty Hi make one to^
10. Lajid Measures.'
-No* cb'ek, jWai yat, p5* 3l/\.^ "^ 5 cli'ekj make 1 po^
P shapj sz' p6^ cAvai yat, fan' Zl"T P3'^>i| — '^ 24 po^ make 1 fan'.
Lnkj shap, po- jWai yat, kok, y^^t'^J^ '^ 60 po^ make 1 kok,.
Sz' kok, £wai yat, 'mau l^l;^^ — 'Sa 4 kok, make 1 'man.
Pak, ^mau swai yat, ^k'ing 'S'SilS — ^S 100 ^maii make 1 'k'ing.
At present, from the -mau downwards, the denominations are lau' yp,
,li M, ^1^0 %, csz M, f^nd fat, ^..
17. Weights.
Yat, nap, ^shii ^wai yat, 'shii '4^1^^ "^ One kernel of g-rnin is
Shapi 'sbii ^wai yat, -lui ~pl^ Ji| — "^ 10 'shd. make 1 4uf. [I 'shii.
Shapj 'lui jWai yat, ,chu "X ^S — "^^ 10 -lui make one ^chii.
P shap, sz\chix jwai yat/lcung- Zljifj"! 3l^^ — 'f^ 24 ,ehii make
one 'leung. (18).
Sliap^ lukj 4eung cwai yat, ^kan j y^^^>if '/f* 10 'Icung- make 1
P (kan swai yatj -yan — -fx^fi^ '71 2 ,knu make 1 -yan, [Jean.
^Sara shapj ,kan ^wai yat, Jvwan zziryfXM — '^ 30 ^kan make one
[ jkwan.
Yat, pak, J?;an jwai yat, tarn' — ' P JXlm "l^ 100 ^kan make 1 tam\
Pak, i- shap, ,kan ^wai yat, shek, Q — -in^ '5 120 Jianmake
At present the current weig-hts are : — [one shek,.
ft n m. » W. % MM
,Kan ^Leung Js'in Fan' ,Li JIo ^Sz Fat,
1 10 100 1,000 10,000 100,000 1,000,000 10,000,000
1 10 100 1,000 10,000 100,000 1,000,000
1 10 100 1,000 10,000 . 100,000
1 10 100 1,000 • 10,000
1 10 100 1,000
1 10 100
1^ 10
I^T^j^,,, 1^5 — 'Lemig [iii] is translated Tael ; Jvan JX Catty; Turn' ^
I'icul ; Shek^ ^ Stone.
(57)
Cin\MMAR OK THE CllINKSE liANdHAOE.
Numerals. Pleasures of Time.
18. Pleasures of Time.
In cUronoIo;^}'^ nml the desig-nation of time the Chuioso make use of (wo
classes of characters called the stems and branches. Of tlie former there
are ten, and of the latter 12 characters. In forming' tlie cycle ol (JO
years, the stems are j)lrtced at the left, and the branches at the right side.
The J'Yi. Kdp, 'Tsz or Cycle of Si.vfi/ Ymrs.
lsr.7T^PlS77T^
i^n,s^i.^jis7«i:^|r
isGy tig^ji87'j3^P
1870|:^^jlS80|5M
1S71^-,^; 1881^2^
lS72 4r^^':l*^-i-p
1873S^M.18S3"^"
lS84fpt]4
1885 ZuW
1387 T^
1888X1^^
1880 aa
1800 ^g
1801 ^^p
1804l^^-!l0n.irpM|l01irp5t'
1805 ^^:H"')o^g^,, 915 ?:,^p:
180G f:^ rf-l I i'-u« \^^\ 1310 j^ jr<
1807 "T j?| ^ ^907 "p 4c 1 1917 ~r fi
1898 i:g,^;UH>8j^ 643, l,lB]g''p
1890 J3 ^ . 1' '09 t± ^ 1919 li -;.Sc
lOOoJj-t'li^ioU^
1901^^,1911^^
1802^^ 19024-gll'^l-i^
1920^
1921^^0
1022 ^>j;;
1803 ^B 1903 ^^P 191^ >^5: 19^3-^*^1
If the student be anxious to acquaint himself with Chinese chronology,
he should commit the stems and branches to memory, as it will save him
miioh time in ascertninins; the year past and that to come. >
19. "The Chinese year, which is luni-solar, consists of 12 months, except
when, by this mode of reckoning, the lunar time falls behind the solar
tinif^ one wliole revolution of the moon, then an intercalary month is
added by the ibllo7.'ing- rule : — If during any lunar month the sun does
not enter any sign of tlie zodiac, that month is intercalary, and the year
consequently contains thirteen months. The intercalary yeai* contains
.381 days and the common year 354 days. The 1st, 8rd, 4:th, 3th and
12th months have 29 days. A month of 30 days is called tai^ iit^, that
of 29 days ^sii!i iit,, the greater and the lesser months."
The months are divided into decades, called shcung^ cts'iin JlIrJ'
^chung sts'lin ^ ^ and h;? jts'iiu ~P^, the first, the middle and the
third decades. ,Ts'iin noi' '^ ft means within ten days; ;ts'iin ngoi-
■^:$?I* more than ten days ; ,Sam jts'ua H^ one month.
^Nin M ts'at, ,ts'an ^ B^a'^ Alreadly 70 years of age.
Only the tirst month has a name and is called ^ching iit, JE.M > ^^^^ ^'^^^
are numbered 2nd i^rd Sec.
,Ch'o yat, ^<JJ B The first day of the month ;
,,Ch'o i- ^7/Zl The second day of the month;
/Ui'o ^s.'im ^<JJE£ The thic-d day of the mouth, &c.
(58)
Grammar of the CniNEStii Lanouage.
Ntimerals: Measures of Time.
There are seven 3'unMit, p^ ^ (Tntercnlary months) within 19 years. (18).
20. The Chinese yftar commences on the new moon nearest to the loth
degree of Aquarius, and is corrected accordino^ to the solar year, by the
use of twenty four tarms or half months, called ts'it, ling^ W M^? ^ach of
which expresses the period of the sun's passage through the half of a Zo-
diacal sign (see the annexed table).
February
»
March
April
May
June
July
»
August
»
September
?>
October
»
November
December
»
January
MS.
»1
6. Lapj jCh'un JLL^
20. 'ij 'shui
5. fKing chatj
20. ,Ch'un ,fan
6. (Ts'ing ^ming
20. Knk, ^ii
0. Lap, ha-
21. ^Siu =mun
6, jMong cliung'
21. H;V chi'
7. ^Siu ^shii
23, Tai' 'shu
7. Lapj jts'au
23. Ch'ii'^shLi
8. Pak.lo^
23. ,Ts'au ,fa.n
8. cHon 15^
23. fScung kong
7. Lap, ,tung sL
22. ^Siu slit, yj^g
Tap silt, AB
,Tung chi^ ^^
^Siu sHon /h^
Tui^ .hon ixM
±M.)
ill
-3±. ti'y I
S^*
15'^ in Aquarius.
In pisces.
In Aries.
In Taurus.
In Gemini.
In Cancer.
In Leo.
In virg'O.
In Libra.
7.
22
6,
21
In Scorpio.
In SaaithariuH.
In Capricornus.
i enters Aquarius.
21. The Chinese divide the day (our 24 hours) into twelve periods, which
are again subdivided into Hak, and in modern times, by the introduc-
tion of the watch, into minutes and seconds.
Note 18. — In former times it was the custom of the emperor to an-
nounce the intersahiry month, on which occasion lie used to stay within
the gate ; Lence the character king within the gate.
(59)
Grammmi of tiik Ctiinkse Laxottaotc.
Numerals. Measures of 'lime.
Day
Ch. Time.
Quarter
Minutes
Seconds.
B
n#S
^JovSlJ
mm.
Yat,
jSlii jshan
Ilfik, kwi'itj
SaP ,ini
Seconal.
1
12
9G
1,440
80,400
1
8
120
7,200
1
15
1
yoo
GO
The twelve periods derive their designation from the 12 branches or ho-
rary characters, and begin at 11 p.m.
'Tsz jshi ^ii$ from 11 P M. to 1 A.M.
'C'hau „ i „ „ 1—3 A.M.
,Yan » "g „ „ 3—5 do.
^M ui » ^P » » 5—7 do.
jShan „ M " " 7—9 do.
IW ,. B » " 9-11 do.
^N^ » ^ » " 11 A.M.— 1 P.M.
Mi^ ., -^ » » 1—3 P.M.
,Shan „ ^ » » 3—5 do.
^Yau » S » » 5—7 do,
Sut, „ fh " » 7—9 do.
Hoi » S » » 9-11 do.
Sheiing^^ng J^/jl Forenoon.
Ching' 'ng IE » Twelve o'clock.'
Ha^ 'n"" Hr " Afternoou.
29. TAe Watches.
,Ch'o Jcang ?^M The first watch, from 7—9 P.M.
V ,1<fiiig — -* " " second watch, from 9 — 11 do.
^Sara jkang ~ „ „ third watch, from 11 P.M. to 1 A.M.
Sz' fkang |Z9 » " fo'ii't^i watch, from 1 — 3 A.M.
^No- kang ^ .. » fifth watch, from 3 — 5 do.
Kau 'tsz "^"f^ means the commencement of that time, i e. 11 P.M.
cWan kwat, ^S(] denotes one <-|nnrter of an honr.
in^ tsoi^ simp, i' 'tim ^chnng iEf^^+Zli^Jl It is now 12 o'clock.
Hai^ neung 'tim pun' ^cliung ^^^m '\H=^M It is now half past t^^o.
(OO)
Grammar of thr Ciiinksk Lanohaor.
TiK' Vfrh. Aiixiliarh'!^.
a D.-Jao{ pat, tak, ^^#7 „ [^'*^'^^ strength.
^ ^ Me cannot come
Hai'^kau^tim .ling yat, kwat, f^*;/L!|l'!ifii¥- — "SlJ It is a quavter
past nine,
15. The Verb.
To exhibit the Verb in all its bearinji-s, is a task of considerable clifficulfy.
The Chinese call it ut, tsz- */^^ the movable character, indicative (.f
the various changes it undergoes.
1. Aicriliaries.
Tak, -f^ To be able, can, may &c.
It ex[)resses a physical as well as a moral possil)ility.
1. Physical possibility.
^■Ni ^hi tak, ^shan > 4ii tak, ,ni fS^^ ff^PrtStflj^ Are you able
to get up ?
ITi tak, lok, ilfit^Pff Yes ! I am able to get up. /. e. I have the i)bv-
P. i).—m joi tak, P§-^# j ^'
C— Tsok,pat,tak,f^^^^ ,, , ., , . nTt I'hml It cannot be
/tLrti: >M and , m ts5' tak, \\i^%7'{rr ■ ,1 ,„ .
P.-Ts.y ,'m tak, fiP§-# ^ '-^ '■''^ ^ '^ 3 '*^''' •_
^Ni Shcung tak, ,shan 'ting ,'m ^sheung tak, ,ni i/$ Jt # UJTM^m JT.
ir^^^ Can you (are you able) to ascend the peak ?
^NI nim= tak, ,ni ti^ ,ni Ipi^^M^Jid^ljJi Can you repeat this ?
a— shiit, pat, tak, iii:^# , ^ , . , . , .
^teflS-^EJ I It cannot be saui, i. e. it is useless
p.-'Kons > „ (w) mvsn > to ;;;,;;:;;.
P.-WAS'm .. WSP|#)
Mok, 'yan tak, shiit, ^^-f^gJt Jt is not in my power to say.
C- Flang pat, tak, fai^ fpf^pA^ ]
C— Jiang tak, pat, fi'ii' fx^^'l'k > Cannot go quickly.
P.-,'M ,bang tak, f\U= Pgff ^'fe )
In almost all negative phrases formed with tak, the negative may either
precede or follow the Auxiliary. In Punti Colloquiid, however, the ne-
gative ought to be ])laced before the Verb, and the Auxiliary before the
Adverb.
E. g.-JM 'se tak, flu' P§;S#I^1 p , ., -n
" t^ya-^/j^ C Cannot write quickly.
C.-'Setak,pat,fai> M^^A^f
P.— .'M ,hang tak, ^im PS^T^jS,] n , i-
>.— -J-yf^ VjT f ('aunot go Jar,
C. — Jiang pat, tak, H\n ilA^l^'^^ )
Note 19. — 'Kong j'm ch'ut, n('J:Pt^ jlj means, I cannot prouounce it.
(01)
CrATVTMAK of Till', ClIINESK LaNOTIAOK.
The, Verb. Availiaries.
1>.-,'M ,t'img tak, P§-M# } n . A
^^'-z>'/^ y Ciiiinot understand.
C.—,tung- pat, talc, m^^W i
'V\\G object follows the Anxiliaiy and takes the place of the Adverb, o. g
P.— c'M tengM.ak, ,kwai 'kii f]§A£#S.-^P.|No certain nile can be-
C— Teng-^ pat,tak, kwai^kii ^^■i^ift^fej ^'''•''^•
Talc, also expresses intensity as : —
iSgo^ tak, ,cli;m shi^ 4io ,li,i tftf^^:^- P^'HI He jg go intensely
hungry, tluit he is indeed to be pitied.
2. Varioia transpositions of Talt^.
C. ^Y(3 tak, ^n.un lim' ^ii ^fo ^MMW^jiVJ^ He was so intensely ir-
ritated, that his countenance was as red as fire.
H-ik, tak,^aii pat, tsoi^ A'^^^0%^'^^'^§f He was so frighten-
as almost to faint; lit. Can frighten owq to death.
cNau tak, t6' 'ts'z ^^^pjltfc It is difficult to get here.
C. ^Sz pat, tak, iit, pat, tak, ^CT^ffrS'T'^f^- P- Oi^'sz /m 'sz tak,
oi' .shang ,'m ,shang tak, S^b^^a^b^SiPS-^^ Though
wishing for death, he cannot die ; and though wishing to live he cannot
live (can neither live nor die).
2. Tak -fyf expresses a moral possibility.
Bhiit, pat, tak, wa^ pat, tak, gJL-^'fTfgS'^f^'f^ Wc may not even whis-
jier in his presence.
'Ni c'm oh'ut, tak ^raun l/J^Pailj'f'^r I You must not go out, i. e. yon
are not peimitted to do so.
^N^f 'cbun ^ngo^yam ,ni ko' ,pui ,ni WiW.^ fife JSliT^il^ Would you
allow me to drink this cup ?
'Y;im tak, lok, -ife^ng' You may. Hu= tak, lok, ^-^P-^ you may
depart,
■^Se tak, cni ^yam >^f^iiSJ ^ You may send a reply.
•J. Tak, 'f^rf in connection with ^=;ing -^ and hnin '^^.
C D. /F'a "va ^min tak, shau' hi' ; -ngo -ya 'sing tak, Jo ^snm ftli'tO*^,
^^]->Sr-M' ^i^^^^yf''^ H*^ might avoid vexation and T ttouble.
SSing tak, hau^ Joi ,mai iin' -^"##^^^ You will avoid snbse-
queal hatied.
J':i pat, tak, E>P^# Would that &c.
ITan^ pat, tak, tfi.^^^ Would that he.., also: How I wish i^c.
,Pa ;ra tak, yat, ko' .ch'-ing E«P§-f|= — ^g Would thatlcouhl get
one orange.
(62)
Grammar of the Chimkse Language.
The Verb. Auxiliaries.
Takj (20) "l^ Expresses the optative, as : —
Han' pat, tak, ^k5 kwo' qc'ii tS^#lS®tS Would that I were
[taller than he.
,Pa pat, tak, ^k^ii Joi Q^f^JEyR Would that he wo-.ikl come.
There are a few instances in the Court Colloquial where tik, is inter-
changed with tak, e.g'.
Hok^ tik, yat, ko' ftit, ^i ^Hy '1@)S'yL» I l^ave learnt one method.
'Ho Tlf May, must &g.
Pat, 4io ^ Pf You may (must) not,
^Yau ,ho pat, =ho ^'^~^'^ Why should I not?
Pat, 'ho 'konw- .^f^ Pj t^ You must not say so, (improper language).
'Ho oi' -k'ii Pj ^ |B You may love him.
('Ho oi' tik' PfS'Sx/ Amiahle). *
'Chi 'ho tung' 'hau, |)at, 'ho tung' 'shau K^j!/ P ^ RT®^ You
may move your mouth, but not your hands, i.e. scold him, but do not~
'Ho 'fau pTS May it be so ? ' [beat him.
Tiin' ju pat, 'ho ]^^^^ Pj On no account.
'Ho u' RT^ Must be detested (detestable).
'Ho ^1 hii' tak, Pfli^if^ You may depart.
'Ho 'i wok, li^ ^liJ^M You may make profit.
jMb pat, 'ho ^^"* Pj Most certainly, very proper.
'Ho yapj ^i Pj /v-^ May be heard (pleasant to hear).
Ko' shiit, wa- 'ho ^t'ing ^ifttSPTH^ That may (or ought to) be
Shikj ^in 'ho ^ya ^'/Q P] "tfL Smoking allowed. [lieavd.
^Ni 'ho (Chi t5' -m5 ^ni f^ Pf ^}1 %\\ fj ^Jit Are you quite sure of it ?
'Ho ^yau sp'ang kii' PJ ^j^iJ^ There are proofs.
'Ho 'ho "pf RT Exactly. 'Ho ^loi ^^ You may come.
,Fi ct'img 'sill 'ho ^ jwj /J^ Pj It is not as if of little consequence.
There are characters in Chinese, which can with diflficulty be reduced to
grammatical rules. They can only be compared to our prefixes and
suffixes, by which we form Adjectives from Nouns, Verbs from Adjec-
tives &c.
Note 20. — Tak is frequently used in connection with tsai', denoting ihe
superlative, as :—- tin tak, tsai' X^if^il^ Too far ; t;')m' tak, tsai' f^
^^\^ Excessively weak (said of tea) ; p(V tak, kik, ^tffS Ex-
t)euu.dy cruel.
(03)
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
The Verb. Auxiliaries.
It hoinf^ iinj)ossil)Ie for tlie people to untlerstand tlie moiiosyllulic words
made use of in books, they were obliged to eiupbjy cortiiiu words as
auxiliaries, in order to convey their ideas intelligibly to their fellow men.
{See Introduction),
Cheukj ^^.
KP chcnk, SE^ I remember; I do remember, or can remember.
<KPtak,) |Ef# Do. do.
'Tang^ cheuk, ^# V/ait. ^Tang tak, ^f^ Can or must wait.
^Tang 'ha che' "^fH^B^ Wait a moment.
Fan' j'm cheuk, fliJIiP^"^ Cannot sleep.
Most of these sentences, also express the Imperfect and Perfect Tenses.
Examples.
^•k cheuk, 'k'vi ^^fg Seize or seized him.
Mong^ chouk, 3^;^ Look, looked or have looked.
C. — jTs'am pat, cheuk, ^^A\W ) ^ , , ^ ^
, ^nS.^ r I can, or could not find It.
G. — jTs'am j m cheuk, 2^1'^/^ J
^Lau cheukj 'ngo pg^^j^ Eetained me.
jLau cheukj 'k'ii pg W1& Retain or retained him.
JjP ^g -y-
'Kon takj cheuk, aE£ "NT^" Succeeded iu his pursuit,
Nim^ cheuk, ^k'ii ^lEt^^l0. Think or thought of him.
Cheukj kapj .^^^ To be in haste.
U^ cheuk, ^k'ii JM^W I& Meet or met him.
jM5 cheuk, lokj fl^vW'/^ I ^'^ "ft know what to do.
;M ,chi sho ch'ii' cheuk, lok, Pg-^-n jt^'^^-jgl I do not know what
has become of him.
The following sentences are all in the Court Dialect.
Wo lau ki ehoh li ^^oG^uM I reinember him perfectl}'.
Man sie choh (f^^J^^ Be not so hasty.
Tsiu fang choh liuu ^^u/)^ J I have at length discovered him.
K'i choh yih p ih sang k'au ^M 'E tt P He rode a sumpter horse.
'Ts'z sz'- ni puh j)ih choh kih itl^^f/j^^^^^ You need not be
[anxious on this account.
Choh t^'i tsai yin yili \w\ Mi^^^-&t—^P\^ Lcl haii still drink ano-
(Jhoh t'a tsin lui J/' (tlLAGi^ Bid him enter. [iher cup.
(6i)
Grammau of the Chinese Language.
The Verb. Anxiliaries.
^Shai 'tis, ling^ ^, 'pi f^ and cliP ^ are causative particles and are
extensivply used in conversation. As the Classifiers have occasioned the
iaro'on English " wan peesee boy," one child, so have the causative par-
ticles produced the " makee" clean, instead of cleanse this.
'Shai %'u hu' "^JS^ Bid (lit: make) him go.
^Shai 'k'ii Joi "^tS^ Bid (lit: make) him come.
^'M 'shai *ngo chit, 'pnn P§'f^^t't'$ He does not wish me to lose
Ling' jan jfim '^hi "^ /K^X^ Make people rejoice. [by it.
Ling-*£yan^shanghi^^yV5b^ Makes people angiy.
Mat, ling' ^ka jan ngo' 'sz ^^^/<^^ Do not let your IVimi-
ly starve.
£'M 'pi %'ii ,king kwo^ Paf^tSlf S Do not let him pass.
cPi 'k'ii ,chi to' if^t^^P^lJ Let him know.
Ti 'ui 'yau jp'ing ,on Wi^-^^^ Make you comfortable.
Chi, 'k'ii 'sz (21) ^iUJt Cause his death.
The latter character is never used in Colloquial. Kau' >gi{ is used in a
similar sense. Teaching, showing how to act, to let cne know, being al-
ways implied.
'Tang ^ngo kiiu' 'ni ^^^XiWCVh Let me show you.
Kuu' ngoi' kwokj ^yan (hing- shi- -ngo ^^M^yv^Jf^^^ To induce
foreigners to slight me.
The preceding examples will show the difficulty of always finding out the
exact meaning of a word used in so varied a mannei*.
Pit, ^^, fSii ^Jl and their components mean ; — Must.
'Ni shi' pit, Joi j&^^Ji'^ You must (?ome.
Pit, teng' shang ^^a£^ Must go.
Pit, ill' -se tsz' di'^'Mi^ ^lust write.
Pit, iu' u' pi' ch'ut, cmun ^^MWffi Hi Pi Must prepare for going out.
Mo' pit, i^^^ Must, indispensable (used in docmnents.)
M5' (Sii iu' ^^^ Absolutely required.
^Sii yung' ^jfl Necessary for use.
,Su jii 'ts'z ^Hinrtk It nmst be Uke this.
Mi' pit, ^^^ Must not, need not.
Note 21.-^1 chi' J^.^ in order to ; chi' n ^Jit cause that- chi' tat,
^jH To communicate 5 cl:i' ii' ^^ respecting; chi' ^chi ^.^H to
extjud kuowleil^ic.
(6r,)
GlJAMMAR OF TllK ClIINESffi LaNOUAOK.
The Verb. Auxiliaries.
Pit, hu^ l}i^i: ^iust depart.
" ^<n lU^f;^ Must.
» Ai sh? ^4H;^ It must be thus.
» (kiug {J^^^ It will be so in the end.
^Ying- (20) JT^, ftong- ^ , ^koi ^ Correspond to ought, should, that
which is becoming.
Tiin jing 'kom tscV ^i^t^fnx It really ought to be done that way
,Yi»g ,koi «sz MWM Ought to die.
,Ying ,koi mt, ^k'il shap, tai^ ,ua JSli^-^ fE+AM Ought to fine
him ten dollars.
Mi^ jing Sx 4s'z ^jfiiPltt It ought not to be thus.
Ji^oi ,4ong- 'tim yeung^ ^ni fel^'^R^^BS How ought it to be.
j'm ^koi v^ ^ I beg your pardon, it ought not to be so.
Jvoi -yau kom' ^to p_^'^n|j'^ Should have so many of them.
^Li jtong lui^ shcung' tai' ^ rai*® Jt*^ It is reasonable that we should
^6ho jtong jhang rJx ^^~X As we ought to act. [depend on God.
tlli ■*"'^ -*iii
'Sho (tong 'kong j^/f ^ u^ To speak as we ought to do.
iJn^ H, yuk, -Sfc, iu= ^, ^hang "^ ; oi' ^, ^seung ^ All mean to
wish, to will, to like, to desire, to want <fec.
/rs'ing iin^ 'sz f^]^^ I would rather die.
iJn^ -ni tak, fuk, i^fJ^f^SS I wish you much happiness.
Un^ heung' ,tung hiP JUIh] ^^ I wish to go eastward.
Yuk, ^, ttn^ yuk, ||^, i^ yuk, "^M To desire, to wish.
i' yukj 'k5m tS(V ^^'^^^^$X I wish to have it done in that way.
I' yukj 'hi sch'ing ,g^^v^%E Wish to start on a journey.
lu' 'ni hii' ^ij^"^ I wish you to quit.
lu' 'k'ii 'tii (kuiig ^^ fH^rJl I want him fo work.
'Ngo iu' £nai 'shui ,sz tu^ Joi $|^M>^^ffilWy|^ ^ ^^"* ^^^^ ^^'
son to come.
Hai^ tsui' iu^ ^chi sz^ WiWL^'^V' Very pressing affair.
P. C. Chi' ^kan iiV ke' sz' ^^^^^ Most urgent business.
'K'ii s'm 'hang t'iit, mo^ tSP§-"S3§i'l'S He is unwilling to take off
his hat.
Note 22.— ,Ying jshing |^>^ To promise; (Seung ying' ii^BiP Mu-
tually required ; ^seung ,tong /m S Do.
(66)
Ghammaii or the Chinese Language.
The Verb. Auxiliaries.
s'M 'hang jts'iing P§* i^ -{ijt Unwilling- to follow.
-K'ii c'm 4iang cheuk, 4 jshewng t@Pa"ft"^S&" He is unwilling
to pnt on dress.
,Chung i' ^M^ to li^^e. ^Ngo > ^chung P ,ni ko' IfePaft^SB^
^ I do not like this.
'Ngo oi' ko' chekj ^kau 'tsai ^'Sffl^^^jf? I like that puppy.
'Ngo oi' tseuk, 'tsai ^§^ff I am fond of little birds.
'Ni hii' fan' lok, f5^il]l|P# Go to bed.
f'M oi' P§-'^ I do not like it (often heard of children).
'M oi' ko' tik, P§-S"fB!l^^ I (lo iiot like that.
Oi' 'ni hok, 'ho sz' ^f^^^^f ^ I wish you to learn good things.
Shik,_ kwo' chung' 'seung ^>^)SS ^ li^^e eaten some, but want
£'M 'senng jto ,ti P§-]S^^^>f I do not want more. [more.
'K5m Wi ^are. ,'M 'k5m ts<V P§tift Dare not do it.
j'M 'kom jtong ^Wi'^ I^f^i'e not venture.
Mat, sshui 'kom 'cho ^tong '0*p^H^|>R ^ Who dares to oppose us.
'Yau ^ To have.
'Ni ^yau ,kung (fu tso^ jmo ^ni "Klt^JC;^"^^^ Have you any
work to do ?
*Ni ^yau 'ho ,to ,to 'tsai -mo ,ni fS^^^f ^T/ff-fl*^ flave you
many knives?
'Yau ban- fJ^jJ^ Not many (lit. The supply is limited).
To have implied. ^Ngo 'n Vi ,ho ,kon ^flf^f^Ti^ What have I
to do with you ?
s'M jkwi'ui -ngo sz^ Pa^^"^ What have I to do with the matter?
(It is no affair of mine.)
'Ngo (t'ing jan wtV ^^/VbH I ^^"^^ heard people say so.
^Ni to' kwo' 'shang ,shing ,'m ,ts'ang ^{, i1$3\M,%WS^^^^-^ Have
you been to Canton or not ? Mi^ ^ts'ang ^'^ I have not.
'Ngo 'van peng- ^ W?^ ^ '"^'^ si^k.
2. The Verb to liave is in Punti Colloquial frequently given by Auxiliaries
expressing to he.
Examples:
,To hai^ fiV 'mh 'pi kwo' 'ni S5#:5c##Mlf All (every thing)
hits been given you by your puroiits.
Ni i ,king ^hik, ko' -ye i/t^^^SiM^Ml®' The things you have eaten.
(07)
Grammar of the Ciiinesk Lanoijap.e.
The Verb. Auxiliaries.
'K'ii ^i ,ki'ng ch'ut, lok, tg Bfl Hi Pg- He has just left.
^NI 'yau £no-an ,mh ,ni '^^^JIMBS Have you any money?
MP jts'ang- ^yau ^^^^ I have none.
-Ngo 'yau ^^, I have some; 'nf -yau i^^^ you have somo; 'k'ii
°yiiu lE W ^e ^i^s some ; 'ngo ^sin ^yau ^:^"']^ I liad some ; ^ngo
<t.s'ang 'yau ^^^ I have had ; 'ng-o ,tscung 'yau, I shall have ; ])ut
better : 'ngo ^tseung Joi 'yau ^^M^'^ I shall have.
'Yau ,yan wa' kwo' 'ngo ,chi ^AfS®|i^ ti^ Some body has told me.
Shi' ^, hai' i^, swai %$, 'nai /Jr and tsoi^ ^ express to he.
Examples.
Shi' 'ngo Jo ft-Hil It is I. Hai' 'nf ,rae i^fS^tl^ Is ir you ? ,Wai
jan :§ A It is^aman (23). 'Nai 'h6 h? 7^,jli0] It is well. Tsoi'
ukj sheuag' -jE/M-L. It is upon the house. (24)
Shuk,'k'ii;Hfg It is his.
Yam^ 'k'ii hii' ffifS^ Let him go.
Fong' ko' tscuk, hii' J5^fi^i Let go that bird.
'Hii ,t'a ts6' S^iilW I^et him do it.
Fong' hiV i6fc~F I^et it down.
Fong' pYm' ^'^fl Let off crackers.
The remaining Auxiliaries shall be treated under the head : Tenses.
3. We now ariive at a stage in the Chinese Grammar, where we lose all
the beauties of western tongues without an adequate compensation. The
immutable ideographic characters leave us to grope iu the dark beyond
the simple JtUu re and the perfect tenses. This difficulty is increased
b}'- the Chinese notions respecting elegance of composition, Avhich fre-
fpiently runs diametrically against a distinct expression of the tenses. The
jiovertj- and iallexibility of this peculiar tongue is, to the extreme dismay
of the student, made up by redundancy.
Note 21^. — ,Wai cyan 'tsz ^/\.~r* *o ^^ a son, i. e. to act the part of
a son (frequently met with in the Classics.)
Note 24. — 'Hai Pf^ is frequently heard in Canton Colloquial ; but is
almost always combined with ch'ii' ^ place, with which it forms a Pre-
position or an Adverb, e. g. 'Hai ch'ii', to be in, or there ; ^'m 'hai ch'u',
liot to be there or to be out.
(OS)
Grammar of thk Citinese L.vNGUAnK.
The Verb. The Tenses.
4. The Present Tense.
Singular.
-Ngo 'se ^,M} I write.
^Ni 'se Vv^ You writs or thou wri test,
^K'ii 'se tB§ He writes.
Plural.
^Ngo 'tang'se ^^J^ We write.
^Ni 'tang 'se f:^^!!? You write.
^Ku'tang'se JH^!@ They write.
Plural of Punti Culloquiah
'Ng-o ti^ 'se |^'tt!§ We write.
^Ni ti^ 'se fjt^lfi'^ You write.
-li'ii ti^ 'se ig4fi!§ They write.
5. 1^^ Future.
^Ngo ^tseung 'se ^M-^M ^ shall write.
^Ngoplt/se ^iJi^M ^ Do.
-^Ng'O shi^ pit, Joi ^^iM^^ I shall (must) cei tainly come.
^Ngo ftseung man- ,chi ^3^r5>^ I shall (will) ask him. ,
^Ngo (tseung Joi -yau ^tj^^I^^ I shall have some.
Hau^ Joi to' ^^%\\ He will be here,
Tsz^ Jcan) a hau^ pat, tsoi' sun' jan il^Mi^^^'t^A Hence-
forth I shall not again trust prople.
,Tseimg ,loi pat, ^k6m tsok, liin' ^-^R^t^ftiL In future he will
not dare to rebel again.
6. 2nd Future.
The Chinese Language though admitting of constructions hy which to
express the Second Future Tense, the native scholar nevei- dreams of
framing so clumsy a sentence, as it would destroy all his notions of ele-
gance of composition.
^Ngo ^tseung cts'ang 'shai sai' ^ngo ke' ,ngan flfe#1tf5!|At;lt''fi!tft
I shall have spent all my money.
^Ni ,tse.mg Joi 'pi sai' ^ni ke' ,ts'in fyj'^f ^#t<t:f>J^''{!^Ltl You '.vill
have given away all your cash.
In the latter sentence the future past is only implied, not expressed.
(69)
Grammar of the Chinksk Lanoitaok,
The Verb. The Tenses.
7. ImferJ'ect Tense.
A variety of expressions have been advanced by former linguists as ex-
pressing- tlie Inipiufect tense ; but tliere is certainly neitber word nor
construction wbicb we could safely recommend as an accepted form for
expressing" that tense. In German and its cognate tongues the Im])er-
fect tense stands either in relation to the Plu])erfect or it is used as the
tempus for liistorical narratives. In writing or speaking Chinese the
Iin])erfect and 'Muperfect tenses are sometimes indicated by the context,
at other times they may be translated by the Perfect Tense.
8. Examples.
'K'ii hit' kwo' tH^5JS. ^aj be translated : He went away, or he has left,
-K'ii yapj uk, ^chi ^shi ^ngo 'i ,king ch'nt, jmiin llH./Vy^i'Clli^^" LL
^^fctj P^ When be entered the house, I had just left.
cShi chikj pfit, Him B^M A^ It was jnsi eight o'clock.
Silt, 4ia jshi ^ngo ^fong- ch'ut, ^"T^H^fi^l^iii Just when snow was
falling I went out.
^K'ii ^kong ctin ,shii tsak, cb'ut, ,kai tS^^ff MtHtS When he
had finished bis discourse, be left the house.
Tsak, ^Ij, ,fong ^fy, ,ts'oi ^, ching' jE, clung' ,kun lE^, cbing'
tsoi^ lElylg and other Adverbs, when pi'cceded by a sentence expressing
a past action, begin another in the Imperfect Tense. In Adverbial con-
structions, the Imperfect Tense is expressed by the Verb only.
Examples.
=Ni 'ki ,sbi Joi ,ni fS^^Hf ^tl|£ When did you arrive ?
P. C. 'Ngo tsok, yat, Joi le' ^^ ^Wi I =ii'i'i^'ed yesterday.
^K'ii ^ki ,shl 'sz ,ni JS^^^^^tljfB When did he die ?
4vii ,ts'in ,nin ^sz hV JBlf^i^bPi'vlJ He died the year before last^
Kau^ ,nin 'ho ,to ,kiin ^im ^leung .king ^^U^'^^Jlijl A
great njany officers went to the capital last year.
'Wong fit, ,k'i ,kung 't^i iin^ ..sliing fi J3 Jt^lT^BM Last month
lu! assaulted the city.
,Shau 'to lok, -^l^iB^^ Received it; got it.
9. Vcrfcct Ten6e.
The characters expressing the Perfect tense are in Punti Coll: ;ts'ang
1t, .hiu % lin^T, ^i B and^ ,king Bfi; kwo' M, l^V f$, ,hV
P^i), lok, 1^, (lo ^ and > po' ?i^P§ areaffirmativeand insponsivc par-
ticles ex])ressing certainty in reply to questions.
(70)
GnAMMAU OF THE ClIINESR LaNGUAOE.
The Verb. The Tenses.
Examples.
«Ni shik, fiiii^ ,'ra ,ts'ang ^h fS^^I^Pg-^^J Have you dinerl or not ?
m ke' % hno ch'ut, ,mun ,'m ,ts'ang ,m6 ifP^^^^f^^^'^i^^
Has your mother g-one out or not ?
Htr ^liu 'hh =kau ,lo ^T§:A?S ^ie has left a long time ago.
^-K'ii 4 ,king ^sz fg \± If ^^ He has just died.
^K'u hii' kwo' ,me jg iiMP,t Is he off ?
Hii' y^ i#j Yes, he has left.
^Ni cts'ang ^mui yat, 'pa ,to 'tsai h^ih ^ni f$^^ — fflTJ (7 tl 'i'^
Have you purchased a small knife?
-Mai }k ^gijllj Yes, I have.
^Ch'tiu lok,#l^ I have copied it.
sHang ^hiu i~X^^^ I have walked,
^Ni ke' hok, .shang 4iai jiin ch'ii' ,ni i^^U^^M^^^)^ Where
is your pupil ? 'Tsau Jo po' ^'^^P^ He has run away.
The characters used in books are pat, ^,"1 Ci> 'i (kiug ti^i^fe' ke^ ^yfc>.
jiia tCj tts'ang g , kat, gX- '^i'^^ I ^c.
V Examples.
'Kong patj ^^^ when he had finished speaking.
sTs'ang shut, '^^jt I have said.
KP kin\chi PaM-^ As he had seen it.
Pat, jkingkiu'-^"*^^ J^ I have not seen.
Mut, ^yau kin' kwo' j^^ MiM do.
Ts(V ^iin (kung "^^j^^I. Has finished his work.
The monosyllabic character of the language makes it often necessary to
use a number of synonymous words, in order to express oneself with
emphasis, as: — 'I ^ts'ang shilt, kwo' -liii Ci o^whDM. J ^^' 1'*^^ ^'"^^ so.
With t.he exception of shllt, all the other characters denote the Perfect
tense.
Ip, ,king pVii' ,ping ^kung 'ta ^^^.^^^^CTT I have appointed sol-
diers to the attack.
B. Mi- ^sheung pat, li- ;^-^^^U Has not always been without gain.
Ml- ^sheimg pat, 'korn ^^^^^^^ He is always afiected h\ it.
Cheuk, ^i csheung 'fau ^^J^^c^ Has he put on his dress or not ?
Mi^ cts'ang ^'^ No, he has nut.
(71)
Gkamivtar of tiik Cihnese Lanouaof..
The Verb. The Temes.
Some peculiarities are connected with the use of 'Hu. As they chiefly oc-
cur in Mandarin Colloquial, I will quote a few sentences from Preniare.
aVipcWiUiu tTtS'QT I am now in full trim.
jbhau shap, H -liu -HAf o ST I liave collected all.
;r'4 kiiV 4iu Joi fillff^ T ^ I li^^P called him.
^Lh jshan tai* 'tarn ^liu '^^y^^^'M I ^"i" an old woman I have mucli
courage (I am very bold in accepting- your favour.)
Pin' pat, p'lV ^t'ti t'ui' 4iu ^^tftftfiiS T You need not fear he has
(or will) retire.
Che' yau- shi^ ^nan ^t'ai mukj 'lifi 3^3^:§Si@ @ f Also this is a
Hak, ^fong- ^iu ift'lS T He is frightened. [difficult theme.
' Ya fu' t5' kik, ch'ii' 'liu "t^^^ljSiS T Wealth reached its utmost
[limit.
' YA patj ,kw^n 'ni sz' 'liu -^ ^ pg f/J^ ^ J I^ i*^ i^^"6 of your business.
'Ya ,tseung tsau^ kwo' tak, yat, 'tsz 4iu ^-^MM,% H ^ T He
will hereafter obtain a livelihood.
Yak, 4iu che' -cli'eung- tai' ^fai P^ "f ^^M^J& After he has suifered
so much reproach.
JCong cts'oi ydk, ^liu sch'a -liu BI'MPST^T I ^^^ j^^^t taken a
cup of tea.
'm hii' niu 'h5 4iii f>5ti T ^? r You had just left, when &c.
'Lni '\m 'yd mi^ T T ifc^ ^s it not yet completed ?
'Liu 4iu 'liu 'chi shi' 'yau yat, ,s6 p'a' J T TK:^^— ^S|[S
Finished it is indeed ; but I liave some fear.
Shap, fan jing ,hung 'liu tak, +:^$£^iiT # I take him to he a
[ giant.
Che^ Hang lik, ,nang ,ii ,ho 'liu tak, M^^MM^i^T % How are
we able to estimate his talent ?
'Liii pat, tak, T^^ Unequalled, matchless.
The preceding examples suflaciently exhibit the various ways in which
the word 'Liu is used.
10. Pluperfect Tense.
(see Imperfect tense.)
J ,shang yap, uk. ;shi ^k'i peng- <yan 'i ,king 'sz 'liu ^5E/V Mf^3^
^yK. S^M^ T 'The patient had already expired, when the physician
[entered.
,Ping t.V ,tsiu tik„ -shing 'i ,king fuk, hak, ^liu ^^\yM&)CM^^i
'(^^j^ J The city had already been recovered, when succour arrived.
(72)
Gramjiau of thk Ciiine.se Language.
Uhe Verb. The Tenses.
^K'ii ^hi .shan ko' .shi ^k'i ts'ak, ^i ,king- 'tsau ^liti lEtezS'fi^f SM
S^^J^ J When he arose, the thieves had ah'eady decamped.
11. The In/lnifive.
Where there is no inflexion of the Verb, there can also be uo form, which
we call Infinitive, present and past Participle. We must, in the absence
of these changes of the Verb, endeavour to learn mechanically the various
combinations that necessity has compelled the Chinese to form, in order
to be able to express the tenses and all the niceties of western tongues.
The Infinitive is expressed in the following examples : —
^K'li 'ts'ing -ng-o hii' tSipJ^"^ He requested me to go.
'Sai ,shan i(^% To bathe. 'Wong ft To go; ^Loi ^ To come.
-Ngo oi' 'se ^^/^ I wish to write.
-i chi' lil^ and chi' ^i^l^ are sometimes used to give emphasis to
the adject or the object for which a thing is given.
Examples.
i?.— 'Ngo k'ap, 'ii 'i yung^ chi ^lo^lilffl^ I give it to you to
[use it.
,Ng kill' seung' Jiung chi' ii^ pi^ ^"f^ffi-^ii^JSI't T callfnl yon,
[Sir, to prepare.
J£wan Hsz oi' jan chP 'i py fuk, ^^'^A^lHifjliU The sup-
erior man loves mankind, in order to extend happiness among them.
'i yik, ,t'a ^wai ck'i lok^ ^^MM^^^ To benefit others is his
[ delight.
12. The Present Participle is expressed in the following- exami)]es.
Ching' ;hang ^chi Jvun, (kun jfii jChiii ^clii /lin 'chiin jt'au jtfT'^r>^
S [^TM'^^^-IW-^ Ji^st whilst he was walking, an officer called him
[back.
T='!p, .shiin ,chi ,shi, 'k'ii ^pa ,che tit, lok, ^shui tl^j^;2B#fHffi.iS
^^"W/^^ Whilst going on board the ship, his umbrella dropped into the
[water.
Kin' ^k'ii ^ni shl^ pit, oi' 'k'ii ^t@f5^;^^^^tH Seeing him, you
must love him.
In many other sentences the Present Participle is implied of which we
shall give more examples, when we come to the Adverbs of Time.
13. The Passive Voice.
The Indicative Mood of the Passive Voice is formed by kin' Jci> shau-
j^, M^i jSj I'i" V^^ suning ^^, and by the Prepositions ^11 ^, (i'l "J"?
wai' %^ <tc.
Gham:\i\ii of Till-; (.'ii i ni;si.; liANouAnic
The Verb. Passive Voice. The Conflitiunal Mood.
Ex AM PL lis.
«No-o kill' Ju p'in' ^ ^MlM I am ilecoived.
'Ni shau' cyan lioi- f^^ AW Vou have been injured.
t^K'ii ^ts5 ,n:'ui iwai fejfiH^S He is troubled.
PP ^k'ii 'ta ^ftltT Struck by him.
M\xn<g ck'i kau' fan^ ^li-^^)|[ Tauj^Lt by him. hs^
cMun- Xi 'ho Jin ^Ji ^ f^ Pitied by him. ^'^'^ A
Wai^ ^ni 'sho yik, Jlf^j^ff |f Benefitted by you.
WaP jyan 'sho u^ jj| ^ i^,^ Hated by men.
Shi^ ,t'au ke' 'ye ;^^Pf5l:^ They are stolen goods.
Hai^ ^nl tso^ ke' f^^feftPg^ fliade by you.
,Hi ,u 'pi W^fj^l^^ Cheated by him.
14. TJte Potential Mood.
The Potential Mood of the Passive voice is expressed by 'ho "pf .
Examples.
'Ho oi^ ^k'ii Wf ^fg He may be loved.
-K'ii 'ho jmung o\' |H P) ^^ He may be loved.
,Ni kin^ sz^ 'ho tso^ ijiSft^ Pfft This affair may by done.
There is no peculiar lorn: of expressing the subjunctive. We may some-
times conclude from the context that the sentence implies the subjunc-
tive Mood ; but the passages may often be translated differently.
ExAJVirLES.
'^K'ii wa^ ^ngo oi' ^ni iEWr^X^^ r-i^ He says that I love you.
^Ngo ^t'ing ,yan wiV ^k'ii oi^ ^ni Ifell AfStS^fS^ I have heard peo-
ple say that he loves you.
15. The Conditional Mood.
Tlie Conditional Mood is expressed by tlie Conjunctions jii $0, ycuk, :^,
't'ong iffy, 't'ong- JM, ,yau ^@, 'kau ^ and by their combinations. (22)
NoTK 22. — The preceding words are frequently used in a different sense,
and the student will do well to pay attention to their transposition.
Examples.
U' ,chi ycukj 'kwai .-^/C;^""^ He hates him as the devil,
Mok, yeidv, ,sai: tak, M-y^^fl^lS Nothing like cultivating virtue.
Pat, cii ho .lin ^'^^M Oj |^ Much bcttci to have compassion on him.
(74)
Grammar of the Chinese Lanc.hagk.
The Verb. The Conditional Mood.
Examples.
B. L._Yeuk/h6 ,liaug,wai, tsak, pat, p'tV ,yan ^Sf 'if SfjJ^ifl A
If" you act well, then you need not fear men.
Yeuk, Mii tak, ,shan tsak, mongHak/ho ^fe#:S'M^JM#fi^ It'
able to g-et up, then we may hope for his recovery.
Yeuk, patj ^ts'ang fi. p'ong' -ngo tsak^ ^kam shi- pit^ -yau ^on lok, ^".^^
il'f^l^f^f^PJJ-^^^^^^^lfl 1 should have been at ease up to
this UKHnent; had he not slandered me.
jj -yau cp'ang kii' ^^Pif ^S If there he proofs.
,IJ yeuk, fu^- ^sz ^R3?3c?€ If your father were to die.
'T'ong yeuk, oi' -k'ii t^y&^'^ ifi If (suppose) he loves him.
^T'ong yeiik, pat, ^t'ing If^^^^Hl If he do not listen.
'Kau pat, kau' ^ ^Wi If not taught.
'Kwo yeuk, hai^ ^kom ^^i^^^^ Indeed if it be thus.
'Shai sing' kwo' hai^ shin^ ^ye f^l'4:^lS# ^I If nature be good.
Yeuk, ki' siin tsun' ^U^^ li" the work be finished.
Yeuk, shi- clrut, lit, ^^itifl If ^e would exert himself.
Yeuk, ,in 'hang tso^ S^M# ilk If lie wouhl do it.
'Ka ,n mi- tak, li- 1r./|P^'j^^IJ Supposing you could
not make money, or gain nothing by it.
P'i' jii w"/|p For instance, suppose that.
,Yau yeuk, ^^S, cVau ch'it, JSlS'j ch'it, ^shai |§"^, ch'it, wak,
Ix^ are all used in the sense of if, suppose, perhaps. As also, Tsung'
,kam yat, rf 'pun ^heung Wi^ B ^ij^^^ Suppose he should to-day
arrive at his native place &c.
Tsung' .in shing' tik, Uifi^WW- Suppose he were to overcome the
enemy,
cCh'ii (fi ^fI>^ and jch'ii 4iu ^^ J mean unless, and commence phra-
ses in the (Jonditional Mood.
Sbii' rU It^^r", shii' Jvi |f^^^ and man- yat, ^ — ' stand for perhaps.
Shii' cU 4io -ya |^^^ iji I* ™^.y perhaps do.
Man- yatv, cShing sz- i^ — *;WC^ He may perhaps fiuish the business.
cHung (hung cU 'ya ^^^JJlUvh Really awkward. ^Siiu ^siiu .il ^ya f W|
ff0i{Pi!ii Very faithful. ,U jl ^ii 7a fifii^nifc With singular gra-
(Yau ^yau ji -yii 'pJC'I^^^PtEi With great equanimity. [vity.
Ex[iressions like these frequently occur in the Four IJooks.
(75)
GnAM:\fAH OF THE CHINESE LaNHUAOE.
T]te Verb. The Optative and the Ivipcrativc Mootls. Advcrba
16. The Optative.
is expressed by : —
.Pupat, tak, G^#] ^3 ^^.
Hnn^ pat, tak, '\m-% \ ^^°"^^ ''''''' ^"^^ ^'"^ ®' ^"^^ ^^' ^"^^ ^'•' ^J-
,:Pa pat, tak, hli' 0"T"»^^i* Would that I could depart.
Plan^ pat, kin' ^c'li ffi 'f'l^M Would that I could see iiim.
Uu' 111 tak, cP'ino- ^on 0.vh\^^^ I wish you enjoyment of])f>ace.
17. ' The Imperative Mood.
P. — Is in most instances simply expressed by the Verb; as : — Hip -^ Co !
Be off! It, is more tmpliatically expressed if we say Hii' lok, •::;^"tf"
Ee off I but absolute command would be ^Ni shi' pit, hii' f/j^ ^M^"^
You shall, must go !
(On Person and Number see Pronouns.)
Many Verbs have by some Grammarians been jiut under the head of Au-
xiliaries^ which are better treated under Adverbs and Preposition.s.
16. Adverbs.
1. Adverbs of Place.
Where? F.—'^i ^pin ch'ii' ^ch'ii ^i i^4'$:)fjMM' Where do you live?
^Ni <hai jiin yat, cirti' ,ku chii^ ,ni i^PJI.iS— j£;g jii^jS. Do.
,Pin nih M Mnl^B^ Where ? '
^Ho ch'ii' ,ni j^lil^ At what place?
JTo ti= ,fong i^ii^'Jj Where ?
C. and Hakka D.— Au 41 fji^M and tsoi^ 'na 4i ^^P|M Vvhere?
,0n tsoi^ ^^ Where '?
Here. P.— ^K'ii tsoi^ ^tsz tg^.il:k He is here. Tsoi'- ,ni ch'iP :^^
jjgn. It is here.
Tsoi^ ,ni ,pin ^^JU^ Here, or at this place, llai ch'li' Pf|,^ [He]
is here, there, is a very common ex])ression.
C. D.— Che' -li iW^l and tsoi^ che= "li ^io?M, tsor 'ts'z ^'it, 'ts'z
ch'iP itfMt and ,u 'ts'/ MAt All mean here.
Tiiere. P.— 'K'ii ko' jiiu ^ch'ii tElSftife He lives there.
Ko' cirii' iW&. There. Where the Punti mix much with the Ilakka
wo hear now and then 'na (piii C^nn ,]iin) for there.
C.— ^i\a li MM, 'nd ch'ii' MJm, ^P^ 1&' t^"i 'P' 5^ lS. .^"i c*"""g
^'Jj, 'na 'sho tsoi^ MJ^'^, '"''» l^o' ^'l»'i' Sf^iliDlk All menu there.
(7G)
GnAMMAll OF TllK ClIINESE LaN'OUAGE.
Adverbs. Adverbs of Place.
AVhither, which way? P.— ^Ni hii' ,\^m cli'ii' ,iii f^ i ^ jf^ ^£
Whither are you going ?
'Tsau hcung' ,pin ch'ii' ,ni ;^|nj^,iSpM Whirher did he run ?
Hither, this way. P.— ,Loi ^ni ch'ii' ^!]l^|^, ITeun<;' ^ni ch'ii' hii' [«)
PjSlfii, 'Tii ,ni ,t'iix W Joi tTl^y^ij^£§^ All siouify— Go or
come this way. "
C. D.— Che' yat, ch'ii' ^ — )^ Hither. ,Loi che' ^li ^MH Come
this way. T^ 'ts'z ^Ijji't and to' 'ts'z ch'ii' ^ij'ftl-^ Come hither.
Thither, that way. P.— ^Ni 'ti'i ko' ti^ hV hii' #^tTiElli^/li§i Go
thither, that way. Hii' ko' ch'ii' lok, iflM^^ 'J'hither he went.
C. D.— Ti ch'ii' f^J^, heung' ^pi fo) t^, -na yat, ch'ii' 5R — '^ All
signify thither.
Yonder. P.— Hai^ ko' ch'ii' tso^ 1^'l0|^ ^ Yonder lie is sitting.
C. D.— Ti ngon^ f^^ Yonder shore. 'Pi ch'ii' fjjj^ Yonder place.
P. — Yau- ,pin hii' >pf^-S* Gro to the right.
Tso ^pin hii' :feSi" Go to the left.
Abroad. — Tsoi- ngoi' kwok, '0^:Xf*^ He is abroad, in a foreign country,
Tsoi^ ngoi^ min^ ^:^hM Outside.
Tsoi- ngoi- jt'au ^^p^ Without ; ngoi- j/in. Outside.
Within. — Tsoi- uk, noi' -^SP^ He is within.
Hv'ii hai^ tsoi^ ,ka t§1^^^ He is at home.
;M hai^ ^iin P§-#i£ It is not far.
Hai^ ^un f^|S I* is far otf.
Hai- kan- fejS ^^ ^^ "6^''-
^Ho kan^ Sf jfil Hard by.
4v'ii ^k'i lap, 'ho Hin JEd&JJL^JlS He stood nioof.
Kound about. — ^Chau ^wai j^jtlj Round about^ all lound.
Aside.— Tsoi^ ^p'ong j)in ^j^^ Aside.
Above.— ^K'ii tsoi^ Jau sheung^ tE5:S_t He is a])ove (upstairs).
TsoiUia^ :^~P Below. ,T'in sheungUiMia' ^±.it!iT^' Heuven
above and earth below.
jTs'in hau^ lllj -^ Before and behind. Mm^'jts'in (If "^f Before one's
face. ^Ngi'in ^ts'in iP;"|f Before one's eyes, Hau^ ^pfn ^^'^ Behind.
Underneath.— Tsoi' kcuk, h;V ^ jll.p'7* Beneath his foot.
jYau sheung- ^.L. From above.
(77)
GrAMMAU of TllK ClIINESK liANniTAOK.
Adverbs. At/ verbs of Fluce.
sYau ha- /i ^slioung- ^"PffS Jt Come up from below.
^Ts'in ,loi M^ Comfi from before.
Hau^ (Pin ^loi '^^^^ To come from behind.
Heung' sheung'* ,pin [w] _L.3l^ Upwards.
» ha' fw) j^ Downwards,
sts'in [W] HJIJ Forwards.
-K'ii 'chiin st'au tgftSM He went back.
Heuno' lifiTi' j)in fw) ^^^ Backwards.
„ itung- f^j ilC Eastward,
^sai [h] ^ Westward,
pak, |WJ 4[j Northward.
,j snara [h] |^ Southward.
Tsoi' noi* -^Pl Inward.
Noi' min' ^ Do.
Heung' ngoi^ [h] :^p Outward.
Ngoi^min^ :^h® Do.
P.— Tsoi' ,pin ch'ii' ,loi ^nf ^ift)^3|^PlS Whence do yon come?
/rs'uno; ,pm st'iu 15' cloi ,ni ^J^Sf!^S§>i^BS Whence do von co.ne ?
C— ,Ts'ung 'na 'U Joi ifyjl^iW^fi Whence do you come f
cYaucho ch'ii' ^l^^"]^ Wlience?
Tsz' cho ti' § jafj:^ Do.
^Yau Jio ,i tak, ^"foTllTj^^ Whence did you got it?
^Ts'ung 'n:i ch'iP VtM^jS:, Whence?
cLi Hs'z ^jeITl Gone hence.
Hii' kwo' \M iSfife Gone hence. ^Ts'z Voug itl^fj^ To go hence.
Hii'piV^ i§| Gone. P. ,Ts'ung ko' ch'ii' fytftHj^ Thence. /IVung-
'pi Dtlli^ Thence.
C.-,Ts'ung ^na chHi' ^^P,^ ; ,ts^ung ^ts'zff it^ ; ,yau =pi ^^^^ do.
Ileung' 'pun ,heung ftt) $|[J|i Homeward.
'Yau cii'ii' ^yau ^j^-^ Somewhere there are some.
Pat, clun ^ho ch'ii' ^l^'f^J® Any where.
sTs'ui ch'ii' ^f^ Kvarywhere.
cMo ch'ii' MS Nowhere.
Ch'ii^ ch'ii' JMlJM:, kokv ch'ii' ^J@, ,m5 ch'ii' pnt, to' M-i^T^SJ,
(78)
Grammar of Tin': Chinesr fjANOTiAfiE.
Adoerhn. Adoerha of Place and Time.
ch'ii' cL'ii' -yiiu I^J^W Everywhere.
Pat, Jun cho ch'u' ^^lui^^Mt, pat,,k'ii ^hocli'lP ^l^^ftiS Where-
soever. -Wong- Joi f^^ To and fro. Hit' sloi i:^ do. -Sl>eung
lokj Jt*^ Up and down. -Sheung lot cp'ino- ^on Jtl^-^^ As-
cending- and descending- may you enjoy peace. Tsoi- 'ts'z, tsoi- ^])i -^liL?
^^iJX Here and there.
2. Adverbs of Time.
When cshi H$, Shik, i-m^ ,chf .shi ^|R;2B$ Wlien they were dining-.
-Ni 'ki ^shi -slieung ^king- iS'^^^Ju^^ When do yo:i g-o to the ca-
Pat, dun jho jshi ^0^^ I^BTt- AVhenever, whensoever. [pital ?
cSljing ^ting- ^chi cshi ^ J -OB^ Wljen lie attained to puberty.
Jvam yatj -^ p To-day; ^kam ^fin "^^ do.
fKam -man -^1]^ This evening, ^kam ye- -^^ To night,
cMingyatj ^0 To-morrow. ^Miug- ^t'ln Pj^ ^ do.
gMing- 'tso ^ -=p- Early to-morrow morning.
Hau^ yatj Joi -^ O ^fv Come the day after to-morrow.
cMing- (Cliiu 'tso hif '3n Wj"T''S' Df^part early to-mort-ow morning.
Tsok, yat, ^^ B jj^wong yat, ^^ Yesterday.
cTs'in yat, ^sz |i]lj P ^L Died the day before yesterday,
Tsokj ^man R'^fl^ Last evening. Tsok, ye^ ^^^ Last night.
^Kam jChiu'^tso'4^^-^ This morning.
,Chiu'ts6 §5 ^ Li the morning. ^Man ^t'au Hy^ilJ At night.
Ha- 'ng I"* IT Afternoon. -Sbeung -ng Jl !" Forenoon.
Ching'-ng lE"^ 12 o'clock. (An chaa' ^^ Noon.
(Chung ye- ^^ Midnight. ^Kam cshi -^^H^ Now a days.
'Ts'z ,shi itkfl^ This time. To\kamyat, ?lJ4^ To this day.
Chi= (kam yat, ^^ Until now. _
-Nong yatj ^ The other day. kak, yat, yat, fj^ '
Every other day. -Wong -Jai pa? i3:/|ls^-^ Last week.
/Fs'In yatj ko' '^lai pdi' "tf '^Hi/iiS^-? ^ week ago ; a week since,
Hau^ yat, ko^ ^lai pai' 1&~^iWM.f^ After one week.
Ban' pat, yat, ^^/\ A week hence.
jTs'in ^lenng ko' 'dai pai'loflif j|i|ti# A fortnight ago.
Patj 'kau ^y^ A short time ago.
(7!l)
Grammar of the Chinksk Lanouacji
Adcevhs. Adcerhs of Time.
Tsam- cshi ^Bvj- A short, a little while. KaW yat, jft Recently,
^Ho^kau if:A Long ago. 'l 'kau BA ^o- Chau' ,shi Sfl$
Day time.
Yat, ,kan ^j By day. Ye^kau if^ pj By night.
cShing y6^ j^^ The whole night. ^Mau hak, jj^M Late, dark.
B.— Kam -shi '4^B$ Now, at present. In* tsoi^ ^^, in- ckam J^
4^ do.
C. D.— Kam a -^ffi, muk, ha^ g ~P, tong^ ,kam 1S*4^, ,kam ,fu
'^y^ all signify now, at present.
Ching^ jkam \r"^ Just now.
P.— Tsik,hak, i\l$\l huk,h:'i^ ^J"]^ and tsik, -shi IflH^ Immediately,
C. D.— Lap, hak, aLM, -^ts'ui ,shi I^Uj, ,tang ,shi S^t, tsik, ,in
^!1.^ &^'. immediately. 'Tang yat, ,shi ^ — ^B$ Wait a little. Maa^
num^ 'IS'|!§ By and by.
l\—'Ki cshi ^H$ How soon ? Yat, ^t'ing tsau* hii' — ^SS^i As
soon as he heard it he departed. B. — Yat, king — "^^ As eoon as.
'Tso f- Early. 'Tso ,shan -f-^ do. T'ai'^tso ^fc-^ Very early.
Sheung^ 'tso "j^-^ Still early. Suk, ye^ MilS, ,cbiu ^man "#]%, 'tso
-miin -^ij^ ,chiu tsik, §5^ All signify muniing and evening; early
and late.
Hai* 'ho au^ 1^iJ# It is very late. 'Hi ^shan an' M^^
P. C.
He rises late. 'Tso tak, tsai- -^^^[j'^ Too early.
,Hang fai' tP fi'l^^^ Go quickly. 'Tso ,shi ,loi -^H^^ Come be
times. Kan- cloi x^yf^, kan- vat, ^ p , mi^ 'kau ^yi, mean recent-
ly, of late. cTs'ung cts'in i/i {i]!j , heung\sin fRJ 7T:, ,ts'in jshi igij n^f ,
tsik, cShi g( 0^ and -i cts'in j^ jjjij , signify formerly.
cMo 'chi ciiio ^chung ^^n fi^li?, Sving-iin 7j<jJ Eternally, infinitely.
'Ku cshi 'j5'"^> ^i^'3 !^l^i H( fi^ Anciently, of old.
TVeung Joi ^^, Hs'z liau* iit#, l^au^ Joi #^, tsi^ hau' g^^
denote hereafter.
H6ung' ,loi fflj ^, .ts'iing ,loi f^^, ngat, ^kam j^4^, to' Hs'z -^SiJitt
Hitherto, until now, even till now.
,Kam ^i ,loi ^'0.M, ,kam ^i hau'- ^lH^, tsz^ 'ts'z ^i hau^ gftj^
iX signify — henceforth, hence forward.
Ilau- ;l(ji f^$'; .>euiig :loi ^^/^ Afterward;.', in fatur-j, for Ihc future.
(80)
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
Adverbs. Adverbs of Ntimber and Order.
4 ^king tL$5 Already. Yip, ^king- ^|? do. MP ^ts'ang ^^ Not
yet. Mi^ sts'ano- 'ho ^^^j Not yet well. P.— ToP ,kam ^^, toP
k'apj jkam ^S,jx,^^ Till, until now.
B.— iat, ,ii M^, ngat, ^ii ^^, k'ap, ^ and cbik, cbi' f|t-^ "ntil.
P. C. — sLun Jau flffl}^ Alternately. ^Lun Jau hon' 'shau fw^^
-tJ" To watch in turns.
3. Adverbs of Number a7id Order.
Tai-yat, f^ — ' First. Clii\sin M,^; chi' ,ch'o ^%/; tsui\sin
MJt do^ Yat, Joi — '^ Firstly. P aoi_^Zl^ Secondly.
ctJn tan' TC-S New year's day. jjn juin JQ^ The first year of the
^Ch'o kin' ?5^M The first interview. [reig-n of a sovereign.
Tai- yatj "^pan ^ — "pp The first official rank.
Mang- chung- kwai' SlW^ First, second and third of a series.
'Gh'ung- '^tsz ^"T* The first born son.
jShau'mi ^^ The last. Pat, 'king- ^^ At last, after all.
Chi' ,to ^^ At most. Chi' 'siu M/)"*; tsui' ^^iu §>h At least.
Yat,ts'z' — '^; yat, ,ui — |EJ j yat, ,shi —Qlf; yat, ,ts6 — 'jg
Once, 'Ta yat, -ha ^T — 'ff^ Strike it once.
P.— ,Loi sz' ^ha ^Rff^Pl^ <-'Ome four times.
Sh6' ts'z' HJ^ Several times. 'Ki ,fan ^WH do.
'Ho (to jui $f ^|BI Many times, often.
Hii' 'ki jto jui ,ni ^^ i:^ [EJ B^S How many times did he go ?
Hii' (Sam ts'z' -^zziyC Went three times.
'Ta ,to yat, -ha TT :^ — Ph Strike him once more.
Yau^ hii' %^ Go again. Tsoi' hii' |f-S* do.
Liin' shiit, ^LhJl 5 liin' 'kong ^LE'f^: To talk at random.
Ch'ut, yap, pat, chai' -ya ilj/V^'^lJ'tii To go in and out at random.
,Sin sshi ^C^^ Before. Tsui' ,sin ^fung 'tsau ^^^"M Offer wine
[first.
^K'li tso^ -ngo cp'ong ^pin JE. rl^^JC^i^ He sat on my side or next to me.
^Jn ban' ,^|t ; hau^ cloi ^>R ; 'mi hau^ MIM Signify afterwards.
jLun cLau flfn}^ By turns. Ts'z' tsii' ^/^ In order, seriatim. Ts'z'
till- y\^ ^ In ordcT, ivgnlarly.
Yat, vat, — ■ — ■ One by one.
(SI)
GllAMMAU OF THE ChIIVESK LaNGUAGK.
Adverbs. Adverbs of Quality and Extension.
Liin' tso^ ^LW To do tliing-s confusedly.
Ki'ik) yatj yat, .-loi (^ ' p 5jv Come every other day.
^Mui tai^ i- yat, ^^H Every other day.
-Mui yeung^ '^ W ^^ every kind.
^Mui yat, y('unf>- i^ — "^JC One of each kind, distinctly. [toj^ether.
jT'ung .mai [SjiM^ kung- jmui ;^iM ; hop, kiuig^ ^;^ Collectively.
(Fong ~/j, tsau- |^ and sui^^ Signify thereupon; whereupon; jWan
sWan ~ZX~Z^ &c., and so on, and so forth.
4. Adverbs of Quality and EMension.
P.— ,To ^ Much. ,To,ti^iJ^ More. ,K:'i ,ti ,t'im J!ini1\J'3^ Af^^l a
[little nioi'e.
,U Hs'z khm' ,to tnfy^'^ As mitch as this, jj ,iii ti^ kom^ ,to ^P
B^fi^l^B"^ i^o. Sham^ 'ho ^4f Very well. Shap, /an 'ho +^
J?X Perfectly well, thoroughly good.
'Ho pat, (Seung ^t'ung ^^^'S |^I ; ,Ch'u tak, 'lin ^i^]^ ; and tui^
,fan pit, T^^^^^l signify Very different.
Shap, /an /o ^ngan iTT^Wt Very much money.
Pat, lun- ,to 'shiu !^ira^^ No matter how many (how much).
^Ngan pat, kau' ^J:^'^ Not money enough.
e'M 'shai ,to tik, P§-f||^^^ Require no more.
Tuk^ iu' yat, ko' ^ ^ — /^ Only require one.
Tuk, ^k'ii Joi SfS^ Only himself came.
Shap, /an -lang ^^^^^^ Quite cold.
,Ch'a pat, -un ^^xS Almost the same.
,Ch'a pat, /o ^^^ Do.
,Ki ,u ^^; shii' ,u J[ff^; shiV ,ki H® Almost, nearly.
Sh6ung- ha- yat, yeung^ -LP* — "'K Nearly the same.
^Tseung kan- jj^^ifil Nearly, close to.
'Pi kau' kwo' ^k'ii ^yau ,to ^^''^©tS^^ He gave him abundantly.
'Pi kau^ kwo' ^k'ii '(^'^JS.tE Crave him sufficiently.
B. — I' .sheung ,chi jhang ^wai J^- ^ '^iT/^ He acted extraordinarily.
Kik, -mi i!§^^^ Extremely fine.
K:? <k(^ tak, tsai' '^^fffiS Exorbitant price.
Kwai= tuk, tsai' Wi^M ^o.
(82)
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
Adverbs. Adverbs of Quality and Mannei
5. Of Quality and Manner.
Ts6= kwo' 'ho fjfjl^ljf Done well.
-Ngo jkamjShi'ho ^'^0+itx I am well now.
^Ngo j'm tsz^ sin ^Pa S M I am not very well.
Tso* ,'m cheuk, W^pM Not well done.
Pitj yeung^ tso^ SuS"^ Do it otherwise.
It, jSam 'seun^ ^'Vj)S Earnestly wished it.
'Han jk'au 'k'ii ^>|ttB Earnestly entreated him.
Tsut, /m hii' $^M4* He left suddenly.
Shik, tsz- pat, ^sham ^-^^'^ Indifferently acquainted with letters.
-K'ii ,kom ,sam hii' |§ H ^la^-^ He went willing-ly.
^K'li ,on ,in 'sz JH^^^^E He died peacably.
cT'6 ,in kill' ^k'u ^.^ff4te I called him in vain.
-Ngau jin v} cheuk, -k'ii f^.^j© WtH Met him accidentally.
Shik, jin kwo' 'k'ii SMtSIE Passed him by chance.
'P'o , to 0^ Rather much. T'o ,chi yat, i^ ^R — ,g. Know ra-
ther little. T'o 'p'o 'hiu tak, 00fet^ Understands a Httle of
everything". 'P'o ^nang j^ Q^ Rather able.
'Kan kau' 'shai iM'^^ Scarcely enough for use.
Tai^ k'oi' ZA^IfI Generally. On the average.
Tai^ piin^ hai- 'ts'6 y^=^"^^L It is chiefly grass.
Tak, 'hin ^^^ Especially sent.
Tak, Joi ^^^^ Came on purpose.
'Ta lo^ Joi tXiS.^ Came by land.
Tap, cshiin Joi fitiw^ Came by ship.
sLun Jau 'shau ^kang P^i^^J" J^ Watch by turns.
Tsim^ tsim^ 'ffiWl Slowly, gradually, by little and little.
Tki' tik, 'hi ,shan '^^^^^ Rise quickly.
Ts'ukj hii' IM'S* ^0 quickly, Tsik, ts'uk, EPIM Instantly.
(T'au (t'au shi' -bti JBIJ fifliBjCPF Just try it secretly.
,T'au 'tsau f^ij;^ To steal away^ to go away stealthily.
Fatj ^ming fat, mitj i^»™^»i^ Appearing and disappearing suddenly,
ctj 'ni k5m' pjik, 4pf:<il|lB'S As white as yc
(Sz ,ch'iin ^i^ To communicate it secretly.
rou.
(83)
GUAMMAR OF THE CuiNESE LaNOUAGR.
Adverbs. Adverbs of Comparison, Indication and Interrogation.
jYau top 'iin ^yan ^i^]^\ To act benig-nly towards strangers.
,Yau an toi' 'ku' ^M#t|3 Treat him gently.
jK'eung 'ts'eung ^chi SM^J^'S Take it forcibly.
Kom' ^iin V^]^ So far! kom' kan= V^^ So near !
0. Of Comparison.
'K'ii hai' yat, yeung^ tSiyi — ^ They are the same.
'KomycungHsy tak, R^fiKftll= In tliis manner it will do.
Yat, ycnmg^ ^h5 — ^^ Equally well.
Wak, ^che /m hai- ^^^§1^ Perhaps (probably) not.
stJ 'ts'z kom' hak, ^PlltP^'S As black as this.
(Chung "^tang 'che HP t^^ Tolerably, middling.
Tseung^ ^ts'z "j^'fiil ; 'ho 'ts'z ^ij^l, As it were, like.
7. Of Indication.
C— 'Sing 4iu k'euk, shi^ yat, mung- 3§ ~f iPiJ — '^ When be awoke,
lo! it was a dream.
B.— K'euk, tsoi^ 'ts'z H ifl'^ltt^ Behold, he is here.
Shi^ ,tsoi jjfEq| Behold ! ^Mi ^tsoi ^^ How beautiful !
'T'ai yat, 'ha ij^ — '^1^ Look but here !
8. Of Interrogation.
The following sentences are all Book language.
(Yan sho 'ta -k'ii l^^^tTtS Why do you strike bim ?
cWai Jio pat, 'se tsz- ^Mi'^pV^Mi-^ Why do you not write?
(tin jho pat, ^hoi ^tan /^W^ pqjP- Why did you not make out the ac-
[count?
,Ho ku^ ^ii: On what account? ^U ,ho ^O^of How ? ,Ho ai i^^fl'ii
^K'i ^ho ,bo (tsoi ^pffff^ How will this do ? [do.
^K'l cii .ehi cho ^^>fP^W How will that do ?
stj ,chi noi- Jio j^R^^f^" What is to be done?
,U ,wai ,u 'ts'z "^SJ'^lf^k How is this?
,U guang (tong ,chi fg^ 3^, m ^ How can one endure this ?
(U tsuk, 'kong ,tsoi ^^ /^W^^^ How is it worth speaking of ?
Hot, pat, clau chii- -k'ii,^ ^''Ih tE iB Why did you not detain him ?
Hop, (kwai jU cloi ;^iM j'yl^ Why should we not return ?
jHai "vau ;ts'in ^tsoi ^ ^ iiic^ IIo^^' ^''■'^^ ^^^ ^"J li-oney.
(84)
Grammar of tiik ChIxVrse Languagr.
Adoerbs. Adrerhs of Interrogation Affirmation and Negation.
Mok, ,fi ^ni ^bing ^u ^ ^^f^ Ki^ Was it not your brother ?
^Hi ^jau ^ts'zHi ai M. ^it'M^ How caa there be such a principle ?
'Hi ,li ,u ^ts'z ai Mf^i^ it 4^ Is it not so ?
P.— ;M hai^ 'kom yeung^ ,ni P§-f:^®:#^ It is not. so ?
'Fij -yau =ts'z -li cVi ; mok, i'i rii 'ts'z ai and similar phrases are rhetoric
questions, implying the aifirmative: there is no such principle; and: yes,
it was so.
B.— Jn Ji cyan i- §S^t^K Why forsake benevolence and justice ?
jn ,chi ,chi ^^^^ How do yon know it ? [cape '?
,0n ,nang t'iit, ,shan ,tsoi ^ib®5' rI ^o^"" ^^^^ *^®y '^'® '^^^'^ ^" ^^*
P.— 'Kicsbi B$^ When? ^Ki 'kau ^A How long?
'Ki ,to ^g ^ How much ?
0.— Shi^ 'na ko= tik, uk, -^MMtl^^ Whose house is it ?
^Cham yeung^ {^^M (P-— Tim yeung^ ^kW-) I" ^^^'^^^ manner?
'Cham ^tno^hbyi 'M^^'^^)^ How will that be well?
K'euk, 'cham 4iu ^RMT How is it now ?
<Chani ,mo hon' tak, cb'ut, ;j£^MWwtU (P— 'Tim =t'ai tak, ch'nt,
^/iP^tfl^Hi) How will you find that out ?
pi ^k 'cbam tik, tflfifcM^^I Why should we fear him ? [traces ?
'Cham noi- ^mo ^tsung- tsik, jJE^flRfeiM* How is it that there are no
9. Of' AJ'fir7nation and Negation.
Shi^- 'y^ ;^ifc Yes, so it is. P.— Chan bai^ 'kom yeung^ ^1^1®'!^
Indeed it is so. Shat, 'shau hai- -k'ii ^ gTi^Mfi Indeed (truly) it is
he. Teng-^ ,in ^M Undoubtedly. 'Kwo ,in ^p^ Truly.
^Ts'in man- ^^ By all means. Pit, £in iU^PJ^ x\ssuredly.
^M6 4 ^# do. B.— Ku^ ,in HM 5 tiln' ,in %^{^^^ do.
Tso^ pat, Joi ft^^ It cannot be done.
Pat, yat, Jj^ Not many days. Pat, gin ^fi^ Not so.
Pat, 4io pat, >^ PJ ^ It cannot be avoided,
Pfit, cwai ^t^; pat, =chi ^ [fc ; P.— pat, tuk, ^'^.; pat, tan^ ^
^; pat, ch'i' ^*§^ and pat, 'chi ^H signify Not only.
Pat, flit, ^^ Lawless. Pat, liu- ^$^^ Unexpectedly. Pat, kok, ^^
^ Imperceptibly. Pat, yeuk, y\^y^ Nothing better than.
Pat. jt'ai '^ch'e shiit, >T*;jB-B-fl^ I^'^l i^ot detail it, but [and] snid &c. •
'Pun ,m5 ,chi ^^^ Originally there is nothing of the kind.
(85).
Grammar of the CniNEfiE Lanottagk
Adcrrh.'i. A ff verbs of Conjunction and Disjunction.
B. ^Fi jin jyan pat, 'ho ^p ^ /\.>f» Pf None but a virtuous man will do.
(Fi 'px'm fan^clii sz* 7p^^:Zr^^ It is not your business.
,, fat, pat, tsok, ^^^-'PlF Do not commit an unlawful act.
Mok, tai^ (ii ^t'in ^./C^yC Nothings greater than heaven.
y> tai^chi (kung-^yC-^Jy Unsurpassed merits.
„ kwo^ (ii (Sz ^)M ^w\ JNotbing- greater than this.
„ ffi 'se ts'o' ^^^!i^y0 Have you not written it wrong?
Mut, yat, yatj .ban \^ — H (m) Not one day leisure,
Yatj ko' '-yii mut, -yau — "l^'iiiijt'W ^ ^^^^e not one of them.
'-m^ shat, kiV MW1H No fixed prices.
5M6 yuno- kwi? Ill- "^J'/rJliri©^ I^o not trouble youi'self about it.
Fat, ,u ^ts'z 5fiin]tt Not like this.
'Mi csheung j^^ ^ Uncommon.
/Fin meng^ ^mi jsheung yCnUJIp^ Heaven's decrees are not un-
[changeable ?
P.— Mi' ,ts'ang ^'f*, Not yet. MI^ Joi ,chl sz^ ^^^-^^ Future
events. ^Mong |^ • ^mong "t ; ^mo ^ ; sUii \fy^ ; and 'p'o (the re-
verse of 'ho Pj ) are negatives chiefly occurring in ancient writings.
Tsiit, ^ ; tiin' g)f ; man^ H ; tsit, ^ ; kiit, K^ ; 'tsnng H ; tai^ A 5
and jho ^ when followed by the negatives pat, ^^, ,mb fflE 8cc., an-
swer to our absolutely [not] ; entirely [notj and other words expressing-
intensity of assertion.
Yat, ,ti ,'m ,fan pitj — 'fl^Pa^S'J Not the slightest difference.
^Yau ;mo -^ °^ To be and to be not, to iiave and to be destitute of, and
other words of opposite signification shall be treated separately.
10. Of Conjunction and Disj^metion.
Hara^ pfing^ h\ng^ .t6 hai^ liin^ H^i|||fPvfP#|L They are altogether
in confusion.
Hop, ^mai tso- ^^S.itJC Do it joinly.
c'M 'ho liin^ tso- P§-Jf JL1^ You must not do it confusedly.
Mak, ,hoi l^if^ Break it assunder.
M;ik, lun^ ^f^4 Tear it assunder.
Kak, ,hoi ,t'ung ^k'ii 'kong R^^^ [^lE^ To speak to each separately.
11. Of Conclusion.
P.— cShau 'mi ^^ At last, in the end ; lastly.
(80)
Grammar of the Chinese Language,
Adverbs. P>-epositions.
B. — Pat, 'king S^ ^ Finally, at last, after all.
'Tsung- ,chi ^M^ I" short, In a word.
Prepositio7is.
Aljout, round about. (Chan cWai /^ji:^. (Chau ^wai Vau H'o ^l^
^^ j/C There is fire round about us.
About, nearly. Tai\yeuk, J^^^; ,ch'a pat, ,to ^^^-y ,chVi pat,
^i^, cli pat, Min |#3^iS' and sheung^ Iia^ JLT".
Tai^ yeuk, hai^ 'k6m :K^f]i§W It is about that.
Sheung- h4- kom' jhung* _Jl~hP|l':^I About as red.
^Ni ^eung kin^ ^ch'a pat, ^to B^pjf n'^-^^ These two pieces are
about the same.
About, concerning. K'ap, ^^. Lun^ k'ap, ^ui ^ng^f/J^ To speak
about (concerning) you.
'Kong k'ap, ^k'ii ^SfE To talk about him.
Lun^ jan ijffl A. To talk about men. Chi' ji ^^ Concerning, res-
pecting, about, is only used in the literary style.
Yeuk, yat, pak, t^ii^ ciin ^f] — ' y 7CM -A-bout one hundred dollars.
,Tseung hii' ^-^ About to depart. ^Tseuug 'sz ^-^t About to die.
Kan- %g- ^sW 5^ | Bvf About noon.
Above jt Sheung^ Tsoi^ 'ni ke' ,t'au sheung^ ffif^f'f^IS-t A bove
your head.
Hui- 'ni 'sho pat, k'ap, i^Vhffj^^^ Above your capacity.
Yat, ^mk -yau ,to — '^^^ Above one yard.
Pat, kwo' yat, ch'ekj ^ko ^^)w, '/\^0J Not above one foot high.
-K'ii tsoi^ Jau sheung- iB.'i^i^JL He is above (ujistairs).
According to, Chiu' fl^. Chiii' ^ni 'sho 'kong lJRf/>J7rg^ According
Chiu' lut, fat, Hr'^J^ According to law. [to what you say.
J ;in 'fic ^ According to your word.
On^ sP'ang kii' l^il^f^ According to evidence.
5U un=' §PJ11 According to your wishes.
jj ling^ jfP^ According to order.
jYing kau^ ^kw'ai 'kii yj ^^^^P. According to former usage.
Hopi ^li 'o JM According to reason.
Accross. jWang kwo' ^t'ln fPf^ipJ ^ Went accross the field; or 'Til
,wang kwo' ,t'in tT^i&W do.
(87)
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
Prepositions.
After, ,Kan 'mi ^^. Tau jan ,kan 'nj^o ^mf ^ ASBfic>S There
is some body coming- after me.
B.— Yun hak, luk, tsuk, ,i ttV A^P^IBifiJ^'] The guests arrived
one after the other.
-K'U bau* jHg hii' iH'^ Fi'^S* He departed after me.
Against. Yik, ^, ngak. ^. Nguk, 'shui 'Is^tK Tlie current is
against us. ^Ngo 'tang tsok, yat, ^yau ngak^ (fung 5^^pT^ O '^^iS
^^ Yesterday the wind was against us.
^K'ii ;shi jshi ngi\kj -ngo |^B^H^'5^^ He is always against me.
Along. ,Ts'ung #. ,Ts'ung tai^kai ,i Jiang ^i^MftTOff Go
along the principal road. ^Hing tai^ -p'ui shang J[j^mi~T The two
brotliers went along together.
Along implied in the following sentence. *Ngo ^kai ^ni ch'utj hii' ^^4^
i/h iM "^ I will go along with you.
P. — Amid, amidst. ^Cljung Fp. ^K'ii tsoi^ -ni ke' jp'ang ^yau ^chung tso-
^ha iok, iS^i^^^^MM^ ^n\^^^ He sat amidst your friends,
or he seated himself among your friends.
Among, amongst. ^Chung Fp and (Chung ^kan t^ (^ . ^Ni ^chung -yau
tsok, liin' ke' jan f^l-p^TpSL^^yV There are rebels amongst you.
'Yau /ra 'ho ke' tsoi^ noi^ ^Pa^T^'te^Eft There are some among
them which are not good.
,Chung ,ki\n >u hak, ke', pak, ke' k'ap, ,wong ke^ 4? ^^S^S'S
'i^^^^'i^ There are some black, white and yellow ones among them.
At, tsoi^ ^. Tsoi^ ^ka ^^ At home. In- tsoi^ ^iS At present.
Tsoi^ (king ^shing -j^^l^ At the capital.
ji (ka shikj fan- tfil^^'lK ^t dinner.
Before. ^Ts'in hJ . 'Ta cheung^ ^chi ^ts'in fTi^-2 RllJ Before the war.
/Fin ti^ (Chi ^sin jli^^^ Before heaven and earth.
,Sin kwo' -ni :^Mf^^ Before you. ,Ts'in yat, m B The day before
yesterday; ^Ts'in hau- '^\\ -^ Before and after (speaking of space), ^fein
hau- 7L)^ Before and after (is chiefly applied to time).
Behind. Hau' ^^2 and hau' j)in -f^?^. "K'ii -k'i laj), tsoi^ -ngo hau- ,pfn
tH^C-lJL^^i^?^ He is standing behind me.
-K'ii hau- jn'n Joi JH f$,^^^ He is coming fi-om beliind.
Below. Ha- ,pin P»>^. Tsoi- nk, h:? j/ui -yau Hsau .fong 'jSh^'J*
J^WV^^ There is a wine cellar below the house.
(88) ,
Grammar of the Chinese Language.
Preposition.^.
,Ni fai' shekj h{i^ ^yau jch'ung lui- BS^SI^^SSI There are in-
sects beneath this stone. Tsoi^ ^^^^ li'i" ^jau ^kau ck'ii ^ ^ |^ ^
1^^^ There is an acquaduct beneath the place. 'Ngo tsoi^ "k'ii ke'
jv'ono- ^pin tso- ha' ^^tS'^S^^^"F I seated myself beside
him.
Besides, ling' ngoi^ :^^K .Ch'ti Hiu ^^X Exclusive of. cWan >u
^^ Still more. Ling^ ngoi^ «yau 'ki kin^ t^^h^Sff There
are a t'e?/ things besides.
Between, ^Chung ^kdn Pp j^. 'Leung ^shan ^chi ^kan ^(Jj-^^
Between two mountains.
Betwixt, (Chung Fp, ^kan |^. ^Leung ^nan ^chi ^chung PM^-^4^
Betwixt two evils. ,Shang 'sz ^chi tsai' ^ESu^\^ Betwixt life and
death.
Beyond, kak, ngoi' Ttfy^P- Kak, ngoi' ^cbi jan m^r-^;^ Favor
beyond measure. Kwo' han' 5^©|^ Beyond the fixed time.
Pat, ngoi' ^u 'ts'z ^^|*^ltt Not beyond this. Fat, ^sho pat, k'ap,
a^^JX^lk. Beyond the reach of law.
By, 'i \iJi. Man' man' pat/ho ^^>^Rl By no means. 'I tak,
fukj jan K^i^inP^/^ To subdue people by virtue.
jYau 'ts'z £mun ch'ut, hii' ^[ttP^ [ij-i* Go out by this door.
Yung' ,ho ,fong fat, yi M1^^&^M By what means ?
Pi' ^ni hoi' "^vh^ Injured by you. Lun' ^kan mai' fM/t* M To
sell by the catty. ^Leung ^kan '^tau M^/T'T" To measure out by pecks.
Yat, ,knn f^^ By day. Ye'^kun-^f^l By nig-ht. P'u\shii l^tf
To say by heart (lit. to turn the back to the book, as is the custom among
the Chinese.) ^ ,'."
By reason of ,Yau Hs'z ,clii kiV Wl^t^^'^^ ^^
Because of ^Yan ^ni iin' ban' Sf/J^i^f^ Because of your hatred.
On account of ^Yan 'ni pui' yik, |ij f/J^ ^ ^ On account of your ob-
[stinacy.
By dint of — ^I 'kan shan' kau' meng' ^pM'^^ttfl By dint of care he
saved his life.
Concerning, Lun' k'ap, ^jjg ^, Lun' k'ap> -k'ii pjjjj ^ |H Concerning
liira.
Down, 4Ia "f^. ^Ha ^shan ~P|Ij Down the hill. 'IIii Jau "PtS
Down stairs.
Contrary to. Pat, hop, to' 'li ^^^Mffl Contrary to right principles.
(t » A AT -M A H OF TlIK ChIN!:sK LaXCUAOE.
Prcpofiitions.
e'iM hop, ? tion .^ Contrary to one's inclination. 'Fun sing' J^^'l^
Oontniry to nature.
During, ^kan fl^, ^slii D$. ^Cong ^shii ,clii Mkn^^'^f^ During
the lecture.
'No;o cliii' t«?oi5 /tleuno- ^iong- ,v\n ,shi ^{tffi§'J#^H$ During my
stay at Hongkong.
Except, jCh'ii ^. ,Q\i\i 'ts'z ,chi ngoi^ !^^i!-k'S-^^ Except (excep-
ting) this.
For, instead of. 'K'ii toi' 'ngo 'sheung ^king fSf'^^JlM ^^^ will
go tor me to the capital.
For, because of, ^Yan 'ts'z ,chi kiV ^^'I'L^ilX I'^'^r this reason. y
Wai- ^nii 'tsai 'sz huk, ^^ff'5t>'C He cries on account of the dtf^Ix
For the sake of. Wai' I'l' M0H i*'*>i* tlie sake of gain, [of his daughter.
From, ;Yfiu ^, tsz^ § , cts'ung |/Jt.
Tsz^ ^Hcung 'kong chi= ^shang ^shing Q §^§M 'M^ ^''^"^ Hong-
kong to Canton.
cYau ki.n- k'aj), ^iin m|£'SiS ^1"""^ *^^e near to the remote.
T*=z- 'ku ^i cloi @ 1^ j^>!^ From of old. .Ts'ung fat, kwok, 'i Joi ^
ftHiil/l^ From France. ,Yau 4d ,u ,yau jaa ,u ^ [i^dlA
jp' Does it come from yourself or from others.
Tsz' ^wong 5I hau- pj -fifl^-^ From the time lie left and afterwrards.
In, Tsoi- ^, noi- f%. Tsoi' cshing '^^. In the town. Tsoi' 'shui noi*
^^K W I'^ t'le water. Tsoi" ,fa jiin ^^^3 In tlie Garden.
In conse(|uence of, ,Yan j^. ^Yan "lang ku^ -ngo 'tang ^kai peng^ jij
^w Ra!^^ w 'W I'^ consequence of the cold we were all sick.
In spite of. Ngak, fiV ,ts'an, ke' raeng' ^ .hang ^'54^pl''i^t5Tj im fT
He did it in spite of liis father's coB^mwftd. ' - • ■ ■ '- >
Into. Yap, noi' Aft- Yap, 4o 'shii , lung noi' A"? 0*11 ft <^^'^t
iiito a rat hole. 'Ts'ing yap, noi' np^' A ft Please enter [into the room].
Yapj -lii cfong /\.f^ffy Went into the room.
,Ch;nn 'shui yap, ,kong S-pK Af^ Four the water into the jar.
Fong' lok. Jam noi' ^ i^/S^ft T^it [it] into the basket.
In virtue of, cP'ang f^. ;P'ang ,t:'iu ,c]u -ngan JSi^L^^^S The mo-
ney shall be ])aid in virtue of tlie oh'-quc.
Near. Kan- ^, '\ H-
(90)
Grammar of the Chi.mese Language.
Prepositiotis.
fKii chii^ kau^ 'kau Juno- ^sliing- JS" fi 3& /L Iti Iw He lives near Kau-
(T'iu kwok, -i ^i ^^}^ ^ The Kingiiom of heaven is near. [lung-.
{Substitutes for kan' are: — /rs'au and ts'ik, ^Xi, ^ which signify near
in lehxtionship ; The opposite of whioh in ^sho l^i s;ignifying that which
is distant in relationship.
Of, jC'hung Fp. -Ngo sp'ang- -yau (Chung, ^ni hai^ chi' 'h5 ke' ^^
^^i^M^'kJ^^ Of all ray friends yon are the best.
Kan^ Joi JS,^ Of late. I' ,ii ^siu fa' SlAMUt Easy of digestion.
'Kong k'apj ^^~R To speak of
Off, <-iJn ,li Jt|#. ,Li 'ts'z =h6 ^iin MPitWM I^ i« ^'^^ off.
IliiMok, ^ng- Be off! ,Wan /an kwo^ ^k'ii i^^StS He has
paid off bis debt.
On, upon, Sheung^ J^. ^Ni po- ^shii tsoi^ ^t'oi sheung- ^ n^^^'^
f^Jl The book is on the table.
Fong' -h^ tsoi^ ^ngo yau^ j/in ^ f^1ph^^3^ Put it down on ray
right side.
Tsoi^ fi^ h(i' ^h^~J^. On the ground. ,U ^ching iit^ t^JE H In the
lirst month. IviV i' |^,^ On purpose.
Out. Ch'ut, [f{. Ch'ut, ^mun [ij f^ To go out 'of doors.
cMo jts'in ^'J^ Out of pocket. Ch'ut, jshing \i\ ^ Gone out of town.
Ch'ut, jU jk'i jkan ptj^^i^ To go out from amongst them.
'K'il jyau 'shui ch'ut, Joi iHoO /K[l|y|^ He came out of the water.
Opposite, Tui^rnin^iij'jlj. ^K'ii tui' min^ chu' lok, tS^ffift^^
lie is living opj)osite Ud.
'Ni k6= i' hai^ ,seung ^fun ^ngo k6^ i^^'^M^M'^^^ R~^^^ Your views
are tlie opposite of raine.
Owing to, jYan ^.Vi ^ch'e jhang ku' ,kam ^yau jp'an jk'ung jiJ^flJ^^YT
H^ T^'W^C %H Owing to his extravagance he is poor.
Round about. ^Obau .wai j^j^j.
Save. ,Ch'i. 4iu 1^ J . ,Ch'u Miu 'ts'z yat, Idn^ ^ J it^— ^ff 'Save
this one piece.
,Ch'u 'ts'z vat, kin^ ,chi ngoi' ,kai hai^ 'h^ ^it—''^^^\'Wi^M'
All are good, save tliis one piece.
Since, K? ,in ^CP,i l^i' .in ," ^^'^^ ^JM^itt Since it is thus.
Tsz' jye ,su M .loi § ^jlfM^lil^ Since the time of Jesus.
'115 'kau iT;^ Long .since. Pat, 'kau ^T^ Not Ion- since.
(01)
Grammar of the CiiiNEsiK Lanouaoe.
Prepositio7is.
sYau ^siu jshi ^/J^[l$ Since my cliildliood.
Tlirough, /r'uno- j§,. /r'uno- ^hang ^fiff To pasfi through.
Kwo\ni t(V iinimyap, ig|l!6^P^7V Enter dirouol, this gate.
,Ni 1)6^ ^shii shP yat, k'oi' /m 'h6 ke^ PJlJl?!^ ^^g -^fepSifci^t Thi«
book is bad thi\)ng-hout.
Till, until, Toi' k'ap, ^^^.JoiV.kam ^^ Till now.
Tsz^ 'ku top k'ap, ,kjuu yat^^g "^ j^^^ Q From ancient time till
Tsz^ ^cliiu chl' 'ng § ^fllfe^ From morniiig till noon. [this day.
Chi' ,ii 46 map M S^J^JM Until old age.
Shat, t6\t'in .-ming^ ^ij^ ^ They went on killing until break of day.
Ngat, ,kam ]^^, k'ap, ,kam Ik^, toi^ ,u ,kam ^f/^^ signify till
[nou^
To (sign of dative, see Cases.) Tui' ^, ^i ^, wo^ ^, chi' M. Tui'
4c'u WiV f 'ttSiS Speak to bin:.
'U ,t'a An ISlffiW*. t'ai' ,ta shiit, ^ffilft Speak to him.
,Kam yat, ^ H To-day. ,Kam ye^^'fj To-night. Ts/.^ pak, Jving
chi'qi\vong,tunghai^Hinl5^ ll;!^^^^^^^®^ It is very
far irom Peking to Canton.
cM6 yung' ^j^/TJ '^'^ iio purpose.
^Pi kwo' =k'ii ^$:®.tg Gave it to him.
Wo^ -ni shiit, ^nf^^i Speak to you.
Touching, see converning.
Towards, Heung' frtj . Huung^nam ,pin \»] iV^j^^ Towards the South.
'Sliui henng' ^tung flau 7^ f^^J^S The water flows towards the east.
'Heung f#5 or heung' 'man JHJ y^ Towards evening.
Mong^ ^sai hii' ^S9^ Went towards the west.
^Yeung jt'in t';ui' j^p A^ Looking towards heaven he sighed.
cLam jChung |ijjp:/i^v Towards the end of life.
Under. H:V "T*. Tsoi' uk, pui' ,chi W '^ M^f^T* Under the roof.
^i\i ke' ,cli'a tit, lok, ,t'oi hiV f$P|t3C^-/^m^ Your fork has fallen
under the table.
Up, Kgp.t, x^. Ngaf, fkam x^^^ Up to this moment.
'Hi ,u ,sam AtS^^U.'' To rise up in the mind.
-K'ii tsok, yat> chang ^jeung- ^shan iHUp B fT-t U-I Yesterday he
walkc'l \)\) the liill.
GitAMMAR OF TIllJ ClIINESE LANGUAGE.
Prepositions. Conjunctions.
With respect to. ChP ,u M J^-
With regard to. Lim^ k'ap^ t&S, clii' ,ii M^.
With, ^U %. 'Ngo ^u^ni, mo ,kou IfeHf^M^ I hj,ve nothing'
to 'lo with von.
^\j -ni kit, yenk, Mf/J^l*:^'^ To enter into a com])act witli you. 'U
ciaun ^t'ung- lok, Jfflmj^|^| To rejoice with the people. 'i\go ^t'ling-
-ni shikj flln- ^f^f®;^!;^ I will dine with you.
-i ,to kot, -nl ]^J}%\i'^\ Cut you with a knife.
-I 'chi wak, yi^UW! To draw with the finger.
Ling- cinan ^sam Hi shun- -p j^^Vj^^^^jijIl To inspire people with ohe-
Tsoi' -ngo 'ji^ It rests with me. [dience.
jT'ung- jan chang lo- |^ ttTi^o To walk with one.
Within, ^Kan ^, noi' ft, ^chung ff?.
,Sam snin jchi ^kfin :ir.^^ [^ Within three years.
Hai^ noi^ ^chung 'f^ f^ H^ It is within.
Hai^ tsoi^ noi^ if ^ ft (C3) Do.
Without, ,mh ^. ^Mo ^ts'in M® Without money.
jMo ku' i^fiyC Without a cause. jTs'eung- ngoi^ TjM-^r Without the
cLi j)a ,chi ngoi- 81 §^^1* Without the hedge. [wall.
Tsoi^ ngoi^ ^^\* Without. ^Mo shik, yung^ M^M without food.
It will he ohserved, that the correspondino' sense in Chinese is not always
expressed by a Preposition, hut by a Verb &c.
ConJK notions.
The Chinese language possesses many words of this class. They are,
liowever, not applied to the same extent as in our western tongues j and
as many of them are used as Copulatives, Causatives and Disjunctives, it
is of the greatest imporcance to the student to aquaint himself with their
various signification.
And is expressed by k'ap, ^, ^ch'e ^, ping' SE^W? s'l ffil, "y^'i ilLr
-ii tpi, ^t'uug 1^, din j^, Jing ^ &c.
^Ngok'ap, ^ni ^Sf>Jt I and you.
FiV k'ap, Jiing- tai- 3cS ^t^ Father and brothers.
fPing p(V jkim fkung- po^ :^ oP^Hl R|» The Board of War and the
Board of Works.
The ])osition of ^kim frequently differs from that of k'ap, as : — Fu- -mo Jiing
tai- (kim hii' jJC"^>/L^^'^ Father, mother, and brother do])arted.
NoTK 23. — (Chung and noi^ arc chieiiy u^ed as Postjxjsitions.
ORAATMAn OF Tllli CllINT'Sl': L.ANrmAriF,.
Conjunctions.
FiV 'clfu kwai' j^^^ Kich and honorable.
'Cli'e _M. when preceded by ji \(\\ implies httuce, as :— ,P'an /i 'cli'e ts'm^
^ rfil-ILflg Poor and lience despised.
'Ch'e _bL sometimes stands at the connnenceniont of a narrative as;
'Cb'e shiitj JB.^ And it is said.
'()h"c (111 _Q.7\^ signifies And further.
AVith, Jn f^, see ^in tsak, MH'J.
Ping' 1^ is sometimes inteitdi;ino-ed witli j)ing' Tj^. Uk, ping' ^van
,kai (Shiii -liu ^ijli A. ^M'^ht \ ^<>tb house and men were burnt.
Piiig'' frequent 1}'^ takt^s the place of\kiin ^^, as :— ^Hing tai^ 'tse mui'
ping\kwui J^j^'^fL^ifi^ [Both] brothers and sisters returned.
In popular literature and nsirratives we find ])ing' ^}^ frequently followed
'j.y S'^ yr- '^^^ negation is then expressed with more emphasis, as: — ■
4v'ii n 'shau ping' /I H kwan' ^th ,chi fg l>X^M^^^^t fT^ Uo
struck him wiih the hand and not with the stick.
Ping^ hop, 3£ n ""itedly, (Seung ping'/j{Q]i£ to compare with each
other, and ping' lap, ^aL to stand together, are combinations, in which
ping' 3E is used as a verb, or a particle expresing con, with, or together.
Yau' ys, though more frequently signifying moreover, again, stands
also for and.
4v'ri miV 4iu yau' ^ta, Hk 'liiiyau^ ma^ MM T ^fT^fJ T XS
He scolds and then beats, beats and then ?colds again.
Man^ kwo' yau- man^ ^>S.^Pr^ Asked and asked again.
J j?n. ^K'il ko' jts'z ji hii' 1H d ^ifil^ He took leave and departed.
Hok, ci jshi tsap, ^clii '^\^\hf '^j^ ^ To learn and constantly practice it.
Pat, /in /i sun' yf» -g- ITT1 1^ He said nothing and yet was believed.
Yikj 'yau jan P 4 ^i ^i <T Wt^rS 2*^ There is benevolence and
justice and that is sufficient.
Pat, ,si 5! tak, ^w^.rfij-f^f He does not think and yet obtains all that
J r^ followed by 'ch'e ^ iniDlies inference. [he desires.
.Sliiin Jiingci^ch'e.fau ^)$lr(f)^'i^ The ship is light and hence floats.
'Va •^. ^Ya ^yau /ong uk,, S'fi 'yau .fin -mau, 'ya ^yau ^ka ^tsz j^
"ff MS''til^EHSA,'t!L^#:^^ He possesses bouses, fields and
[ riches,
Yatj jho -yCi ,mo ngoi- — '^^'tHilll^^ Not the least impediment.
(94)
riRAMMAIJ OF TITK (JlIINKSK LaNOUAGE.
Conjunctwns.
'\j %. ^Ni ^ii ^no-o f/J^mJic You and I.
jYan -ii P h-* iP^^ Benevolence and justice.
jLin 3^. Fu^ cli'-i ,liing t;ii^ 1>CM ^^ JliR father and the brothers.
sT'ung |nl. =Ni £t'ung- 'k'ii hii' tak, f/J^ iSj fe ^^^ You and he may go.
.Lina- ^. Yat, puk, Jino- ,sam ' H ^ZT. One hundred and tlirec.
Also is expressed hy yik, ^, yau^ ^, 'ya i^, k'ai), !S, jil^'a sin ^
.1?^, 'T^ =yau -tji^ .fee.
-K'ii yik, 'seung- Ha ^ni t@ ''^StlfS^ Ile^also wishes to strike you.
A' ,ko yik, man* 4ia -k'ii M^ 'T^Ptljnl^lE Also my brother asked hiui.
'Ni yau* pat, ,chi fy^^^^^H Do vou also not know?
Yau* tso^ ch'ut, man* mat, ^'Slti S -t^ He also made all thing's.
,Ni chek, ,kai yik, hai* ^k'ii ,shiu lok, ^/S %^^^M^&^^^ He also
roasted this chicken.
« Ya -t^. 'Siu ^nii -ya ,m5 fuk, /h'i^^Mt^ My little daughter is also
Tiufortunate.
^Ya shi* ^mo ,ts'an Ii* pi* 'liu 'tfi<:ft'^^i/|J(fft T This also has been
prepared by m}^ mother.
^Y^ ml* 'ho ,chi -t^i^ Pf^W This also is not yet known.
^Ya -yau jsho, 'ya H-nu mat, ^^^M^r^i^i^ There were open
places and also secluded parts.
^-m hii' cmo ,ni fAj^iMB^ Do you go ? Tsz* Jn § M, Certainly.
^Ngo yik, s'm ^^M I a^so.
Althongh, ,sui /m gfi^>fi. ^Sui/m ,u Hs'z glM^^nffi, Although it
^Sui /m hai* 'kom §6ftM'f^l@t Thoug-h it be in that way. [he thus.
,Sui pat, hii' iSi^i Though 1 do not depart.
The Conjunctions yet, still, are frequently omitted in composition as well
as in conversation, as : —
,Sui ,in hai* ^lang, ^ngo pat, kok, 'lang B^P^,\%'^, ^T^iSl'^
Thoug-h it be cold, I do not feel cold.
Yik, ^, sin ,^i k'euk, JP, sheung-* 'jpj, =ya -jjl, ex\M'essyet, still, when
used as Adverstative Conjunctions.
^K'n ,k'iin ,sui r\n tai* yik, -yau sz* ^k'! 'sho pat, ^nang jP. tiluJ^ y/,\ y^
yff^^^-^^pjf^^^^ Though his power be great; yet there are things
which he cannot accomplish.
KVuk, pat, sik, -liu iP^'^TO T Yet it is not to be regretted.
As, as: — }J (Shan koui^ ^ko /;(Pp4PP 0J As high as a mountain.
(Do)
Grammar of thb Ciunivsk LANoirAOK.
ConjnncUons.
ttj 'ni kom' '\ih tlJ'f^^PifltT As oood us yon.
,Ni p5^ ,shii ,u ko' tP ki^ra^ tui' B/6 n|^#iP®f|^/Ptf:;^ This book is
as large as tliat.
=K'ii qcong ^h6 =ts'z tsai^ ^tsau ^lu tS^itTlEl'l hVS^ He speaks as a
clninkard.
'K'u ke' wi? ai6 Hs'z ^yam tsni' ,yan V(P w;V t@^(SfSi7 {Ell^Sf A
''^^ His language is as if it were the language of a drunkard.
,Ching ,\i ^k'ii lE'^PfS F.ven as he.
Chin' ^ngo jii kin' HfI'J^,'S'» ^ ^'^ ^'^'" ^^ "^.Y huinhle opinion goes.
Tseung^ ^ts'z ^<^X ^^^^K 'f^'z §1K, '^ong fat, t^i^ all signify as it
[were.
Becau^se. ,Yan ^wai P^ @. ^Ngo j'm oi' ^k'ii, jan ^wai ^k'ii /in 'ho ^
P§''il«riS, @^lBP§"jlr I do not like him, because he is not a good
[man.
Besides, ling' ngoi^ :^ ^P- Ling- ngoi^ %'ii /m bai' Jing IP ■;^:^|'fj5
Pal^f'n tf J Besides, he is not clever.
Fong' 'ch'e ^ni ,shan ^yau peng- C^_hL1/>:^^?^ Besides von are sick.
Both, ])ing' T}^. ^Hing tai- hai^ shin* ping' ,ts'ung ^niing yU^ W? «
3E^M'^>^ ^^.y brothers are both virf-nons and talented.
^Shain jlin jhai mok, sai' iT^^M^^II'tJ^ Tbey robbed him both of his
jacket and of his shoes.
But, tan' ^. 'Ni hai' 'pun 't'5 ke', t^n* =ngo liai^ ^iin Joi ke' i^^^i^
±"1^, #.|!c'f:m^f'i^ You are from here, but I am from afar, i.
e. Yoa are a native ; but I am a foreigner.
'Nfffl ,kan ,fong hai' 'h6 6m', swai =ni ,kan pat, ,in ^^MM'^f^^,
'r^f^i^^,^ ^^y I'oom is very dark; bnt yours is not.
cWai P'^ and ^wai jf^, the same as jwai 1'^.
ci t?n, sin f^-f^, ,in /i j^^iTfJ, M Sa Mill t'ccnr only in books.
But for. Yeak, ,fi 'ts'z ,yan ^ngo tsak, pai^ ^^i ^f^itA^k MW ^
But for this man I should have been ruined.
But that. -Ngo ts.V tak, ym\<, pat, p':V ^ftf^^^.-f^tft I could do
it, hut that I am afraid.
p:ise ; Yeuk, pat, 'hd Joi %go 'ta 'ni ^^ T^^^ Hi^^ Come down,
else I beat you.
cCh'ii 4iu 1^ J also signifies else.
Either— or. Wak,/ts'ii pat, wak, Hs'il 'chi 5]c®^FX®lK; Take
either the pencil or the paper.
(%)
Graimmar of thk Chinese LAvouAriE.
Conjxmctions.
Wakj shin^ wak, ok, iSc ^^i^> Either good or bad.
*Ni Wi\k, Vong- wak, Joi f:^ 5^ fi^/R Either go or come.
Yik, chP yik, ^fau i^jJ^^'pfJ'pj* Either he will come or not.
Even, jlin jM- il^'i" J^i^^" t^"^* t'" ^'^^ 5iMiSI «|iPpi)7t He does not even
wash his face.
jLin -ng-o ft'ing- ^clii J^^^li^^ Even I myself heard it.
,Lin ,i fok, ^shau shik, ,to ^m kiu' 4iu jSS3R"S*|i|i§'5P§".^ T
Even her garments and head ornaments could not be found.
Except, unless, Yeuk, pat, ^^y^^. Yeuk, pat, ch'ut, cug-an ^ng'o -ta^kun
*fu :;^"'>^ pj ^^^ tX ^ jfij* Unless you pay the money I get out a
summons for you.
Yeuk, ^fi ^^^f', and ycuk, cmo ;:^^, are used in the same sense.
Yeuk, pat, ^min lik^ y^^^ /I Unless he exert himself.
Finally, Kau' 'king ^Mt, pat) 'king ^yt, cSh^" ''"i ^M' to' 'tai
^U®/ -^^^ convey the same meaning*.
fShuu ^mi kin' ^k'ii kc' Jiang ^wai, ^t'ing "k'ii ke' shi'it, wii-, 'ngo teng^ pat,
^chun i\XM^nUilMMi&UmmM'^X^m, PinaHy,
observing his conduct, and hearing his conversation, I determined not to
grant his request.
(Chung 'cliB /Fv^, and "^tsung- ^chi wM^^ signify, In conclusion.
For, introducing a reason, k'oi' ^yan jm6,ng ^ya ^.J\. g "vL ^oi' '^^ is
[blind.
K'oi' -ng'o (t'ing ^chi ^.^^^^ For I have heard of it.
,yan H], jan cwai ^'M, cUU 'ts'z ^i't and "i ^ (the latter in ^dio
nth chnpter of Mathew, Delegates' Version) ar« so frequently met with
in litfn'ature and conversation as to require no further ex})lnnations.
Furthermoi'e, is expressed fong' 'ch'e ^JB., 'clfe ^fu ^;^, ^i 'ch'e
nrjjS., yau^ )L and ling^ ngoi^ -^^l*.
'K^ii \yau ,ts'in k6' ,yan, ling^ ngoi^ ^yau fuk, 1U^&UAS^V^
|fl§ He is rich, and furthermore he is hapjjy.
Only, tan^ ^H. Tan' ^Inu ynt, ^yan ^^ — 'A He only left one man.
Tan' pat, ^t'ing w;? "^.^ff^fS" Only beinQ- disobedient.
'Chi R- '^'lii p'iV sz' piit, Svan tong' K j'ft ^^Sl "w I only fear
that the business is aot secure.
'Chi .sain yat, tsau- Joi R tH H ^^^^ Only throe days more then ho
will come.
-iVgo 'fill toiig' pat^ ,chi ^^n m "^""M^ r o'lly pi''!f^('n(lcd ignorance.
rSllAAIMAK or TUK OniNKi^E TjANdUAOIJ.
Cvnjuncfwns.
'Chi tak, 'hi .ch'iiig' ft 1^-45 ^-S He coultl (hi iiotliino- but set out on
a journey.
'Chi '\ih ivr hik, viit, R /^T ^y^ f3 Only well jibout 5 or G duys.
'Clii 'kuu long' ,saiii H^S^^Ca* Only quiot yourself.
^Chi Ji, 'chi ynu yut^ ko' .ts'iu ifc '^— ''Q || I have only one cash.
'Chi <ts'z sz^ lhli^k# Only this affair &g.
Tai' ^j, as: — Tai- niin- "ui ^vj^f/jx Only remembering you.
,Tan hai- yat, ko= S^i^i —^ Only one.
,Tun ,ting yat, ko' -^-T — ^ l>o.
jwai 'f^, cwai Pf^ atui ,wai iv^ are used as Adversative ConjunclioJis
and stand for onlii, hut.
Tukj 72^, tak, ^- also siii-nify (;7?^/.
Pat, hai^ ^ts'z, -nai 'pi ^Mit,7^f!k Not this, but tliat.
Not but that, as :— ,Fi pac, 'kii 4t'u /m 'h5 k6' jan ^^^f^tE^o^
^^/V Not but that I tliirdv him an honest man.
-K'ii pat, tnk, hai- clii' wai- ke^, 'nai yik; hai^ ^yun oi' ke' ^yan tS^©
#^ffl"i^'7Jr?l"<fit:'^^g^A He is not only intellioeut, but
also benevolent.
Tat, 'chi ^K> pat, 'chi ^ ifc, pat, 'cbi ^#„ pat, cli'i' ^^ pat,
^tiin ^^, pat, tuk, .^i^, pat, tai- >F^, pat, t;'ni- ^ ^ are in
^•eneral followed by -uai /y, but; yik, ^yau ^^ ^ there are also; yik,
liai- ^fj^l^ there is also Sec.
Not only not, pat^ tuk, pat, >f»3i^^'» and similar sentences are also fol-
lowed by ^nai /y and other Adversative Conjunctions.
Nothing- but, £wai '\^. sWai liin^ ^i H ''rj^^L tfil l3i Notliing- but anarchy.
4v'n ,mb ^yetsoi^ka, tan' yat, ko^ .t'oi lB.^%f^M'M'^'^^
1"^ He has nothing in his house but one table.
;M kin' yat, ko' ,yan, tuk, bai^ ^k'ii P^ j|— ' J!3A?^l$h4E I saw no
cue, but him.
Hence, shi' 'i -^]>X, 'sho 'i ffflX^,xAn 'ts'z ^'';t, k.V 'ts'z tX it-
^8h;'in jko -ii tai- shi" ^1 pat, Joi \±\ 0j ii|>J T^J^^i^'*)^^ The mountain
ifi high and the rain heavy, hence he docs not come.
Shi- H ^ni cheuk, ^^H^I^S Hence you are right.
'Ni ,'m ,ts'ang ki.V ngo k.V Ms'z ^ng.. pat, .h.i f/Si^g-'^'^ft /f^<i'-t'X^
>^^y^ You did not call mc, hence 1 did no( ci
jurnc.
(08)
GHAMMAR OF THE ChIJVKSR LaNOUAGH
Co7i) unctions.
Houever, see Although.
It yeuk, ^, Sx *P.
Yt'ukj patj 'hang :;^^ ff If he be nnwillinfr.
-^j^Q yeukj or yenkj -ngo pat, hii' ^^ S^' ^^^ i* HI do not de-
.ctj 7au ^sam ^P-^^to) If he has a mind. Jpuit.
cij S-au yatj ^chi pat, ^R"^ — f^^ If he has a brush.
Yeuk, hui' 'k6m M^i§^ If it be thus.
Yeuk, > tsak, ;'S^MMy If so, then &c.
Respecting 't'ong- 'p^, 't'ong f^, 'kau ^ and 'sbai ^, see Verb, Con-
ditional Mood.
Lest, =hung f^. 'Rung ^k'! 'ta lan^ ,chi JSf S^'ffl^ Lesthebreak^it^
j'M Mio tai' ^sliing 'kong, 'hung ,keng 'sing -k'u P§-ff A^BSS^^
^^=10. Do not speak loud lest you awaken him.
Likewise, yik^ /m ^^/i^.
^Iv'n ^yau tsV kwoVni yik, , in fe #"^® f/J^ -^M' He is at tuult,
and you likewise.
Moreover, yau- %., fong' -cb'e tjt eL, yik, ^, ling- ngoi- y^jly, ling-
-yau -^ ^ and cWan -yau 3ig ^.
Yau' jwan yCl^ Moreover he said.
Foiig' 'ch'e ,k'i pat, ,fuu 'hi -ni i)L^M:^Wi^i^ Moreover he was
not pleased with you.
Ling' -yau ^to jts'oi pak, ^^ ^y^^ Moreover he has much wealth.
Nevertheless yik, ^, sheung- 'cb'e jp^^ &c.
Nor, yik. yff. 4i'u ,'m 'hang, 'ago yik, ,'m 'hang tS@#, ^k ^PS
jfc.
^ He will not, nor will I.
No sooner. Yat, kin' -k'ii tsau- 'ta ^k'ii — 'Jtiffel^^'lT fS No sooner
did he see him, than he sti-uck him.
Neither — nor, pat, — pat, ^■^. Pat, 'ta pat/ tsau ^^^T^^ lie
would neither fight nor run.
j'M -vvong j'm Jui ParfiP§"5R He would neither go nor como.
,M6 ck{i 'ho ,kwai, ,mo hV 'ho ,pan M^ ^^\ M' Mi^'o 'Ti¥ ^.^ bus
no home to return to, nor road for escape.
Nor, either, can be variously expi-esse.!, as : —
'Ngo cuiu cUgan, 'ni yik, jId'') jI^ !1v4k' kJ^/T/^ T have uo mon^y, nor
you either.
Notwithstanding ^sui ;in iSjtA-^
(99)
(jKAMMUt OF TIIK ClIFNESE LANGUAGE.
Conjunctions.
Oi-. Yik, wi'ilc, ,\\ 'ts'z ^J'p^iPltt Or is it thus ?
Jv'iin ,clii yik, 4i ^clu >lC'i'WjM^ ^'^^ l^e ask for it or was it given
[hi/nV
ITai^ ^ni vv-tk, l.ai^ hii kc' :V ,mui '^Ht^'^'^M^^W^t^ Was it you
or your sister?
ProvidoAl 'f'oiig- yciik, '^J S^ or ch'it, yeuk, iS'Jf.
^T'ong tak, ^k'ii k('' di-an ,vvan ,wan fRJf^tE''l1^ifi:£*:S* rrovidcd lie
get his luorioy &c.
Since ki^ ,iii ^Jl^M. Ki' /m ,u ^ts'z ^Wmit S'noe it is thus. .
^v'ii ;.n tso^ ^ii shi^ ^chm tak, pit, ko' ,yan tEOSfft' >^^fe-t?i f'-j S'J
lis /v He will no loiigoi- stay, so you may call another person.
Still. cWan -yau J^ W Still he has some.
Sheung'^ 'ch'e pat, <hano- fj^^^* "^ Still he would not,
cYing- hai^ s'm ^16 ^%^'^^ Still it is not good.
cYing sheimg^ -vvong- 'pi i/Jptlif^ Still he went there,
cln yik, \yau ,chi .^/ft^'f^^ Still it does exist.
Jii A mi- i^ f/S^^^^l ^till it is not righteousness.
Yau' i)at) Mio %,y^ '-^J Still more improper.
.^^U1 i' /C4'^ Still more singular, or still more strange.
Tlian, Mok, tui* ,ii ^fin ^>^ J^^ Nothing- greater than h<!a\ n.
Ti'ii- kwo' ^k'ii A.^StS; Greater than lie.
(Respecting than, see Comparative)
That chi' ^, 'shaif^, ling^ ^, tsik, slu^ ^P/^, and tsik hai' 2P1^,
signify that is.
Thon, tsak, pjj as :— ^Ts'nm tsak, u\chi ^-^jJM^, Seek then you
sliall find.
K'au' cUiun tsak, tak, ^hoi PP f 1 M^J t^ It^ > ^^«ok then it will be opened
to you.
,Chi kwo' tsak, 'koi ^'R)MRy3>t, H" yon know your trnnsgci'essions
then reform.
,Ohi jUgan tsak, 'ho ^jEv'M'j ^ , Give the money then all is v/pII.
Cii'nt, £shing ^fong 'ho p"|^>7Mj% Leave the city, then all will he
well.
4Ni >u tak, ,fong- 'ho fnk, jan ^5^ WS^fr^^R A- ^'.yoi* 1"^^^p^s
virtue then you may subdue people.
<Fong tak, 'ki i^ Jj^^fliM^ Tie then ohtain^td his wish.
(100)
GhAMIIAR of Till? ChINKSK TiANCrAOT:.
Conjunrf'iovs. ExplH'vrx.
,Fong 'bo J^ f^, It will do then.
jFong-^ts'oi ch'ut, hii' ^|fl[}j-^, Tie iLea departed.
^Nai ts5^ tak, T^ftf^:, It will tlien do.
Sui^cliiu ^clii ^-f^^, He tlien called him.
Piir ch6iik, 1S^, Then it will d.).
■K'li ^sbeiino- hio'o tsnu- lok, f^Jl-^ic^J^y'^) Tl" he ascend, then T doa-
Tsfin'-cloi Wi^M^ "I'hen come. [cend.
Therefore, 'sho ^i W^l>X, shi^ 'i J^lH, k>? I^JC, sirr kiV ^!')^, ,yau
'ts'z I^LlL ^^'c. (see hence).
Though see Althoua-h.
Too, yik, .in ^,^.
-Ni 'ho kiin^ 4ig-o yik^ ,in JS^jfff^, $lc^M- yo'» ^^'^ very tired, nnd
Unless see except. T T too.
When, tong-' ^' Tong-^ tsoi= f>,t, kwok, ,ch.' ,shi' ^|bftg|^f^$r
When I was in France.
Whereas, /n .^, ChiiV tak, H^.^f '
Wherefore, shi- kiV ^^iX'
Whether wak, ^. Wak, shirr wak, ok, ^^^^, Wiiether g-ood
Yet, sheuno- f^, yik, ^ff- [or bad.
cYau 'ho ^@^ It may yet do.
They are generally emplo3'ed for impi-oving the style: and also as subsfi-
tntes for our punctuation, in which latter (piality they ore of the utmost
importance not only in wjiting- intelligible composition, but })articuhirly
in conversation.
They may be divided under five heads, i.e.: —
1. — Auxiliaries in composition;
2. — Substitutes for Notes of Interrogation :
•^- — Substitutes for Notes of Exclamation and Admiration;
4. — Expressing the Indicative Mood ; and
•0. — Interjections.
1. Avxiharies in Conpe.vfion.
In Tsuk, cH "^ki /^"T^Ci '^'o I'eW upon your own resources, we lefjuire
only tsuk, ><£ and 'ki Ci ^o complete the sense, cU serving only as an
Auxiliary to the rhythm of the language.
Kan^ cii ,cM jil! t^' aW II:'s nearly attained to wisdom.
Ch'ut, ^u tak, jj-f^^i^ Proceeding from virtue.
V'ai, ,n hn (Z5^f5> Es.'^ent'allv like yourself.
(101)
GIhAMM.K or Tllli (JlIINICSE IjANOTTArSR.
E.irplc lives.
T(V yi ^che pat, Mio Ji ^Hili #^ PfSft 'Hic vi^lit way mjiy not ])0
(lopni'ted tVom.
cYun 'clin <.ynn ^yi'i 'f^^j A-Til ^^:ifi liiiiiiJolf is l)f^tiev()l(>noo.
/M.nng S'6 'clio ,t,'in ha' ,chi taP ^pnn ^y^i Pf'-di^^ "X'T*^ A^ijl
The duo medium is the g-reat root of every thing under lieaven.
2. Stih.'ifttuti')^ for NotcK of I)ifi>rro(jation.
cl'l -JK". — ^Yan 5U 't^^ Is it benevolence ?
i' 5II ffi4^ I^^ it vig-hteousnoss ? =Bo ,u ^^ jMay I ?
'Hi 'ho tak, ^u ^ FIJ t^^ How can it be obtained ?
,Ye If|l.— Shi^ ,y*'^ S'^ .y^" S^W^fflJ f^ It ri-bt or wrong ?
' IVz 'hi kan' ,.i ^yan ,ts'ing jve jit :e: iil/5^ Atw W 11"^ cl^es this
accord with human feelinp-s!
(Chii ^. — ^Yau (Clui -^Hph Is it indeed P
,Yan ^yau 'she ^chii K/^^M Will you reject it?
,\j M=fflj:._ K'au ,chi cii >j<^|^ Did you entreat him ?
Tukj ,ho ,ii ® jaf M How is this .''
Jn huu^ fai^ ,ii ,sam cii ^^^'I^Z/^jCi'I^ What pleasure can this afford
to your mind i
Wai^ ,fi ,kf)m pat, tsuk, ,u 'hau ,ii Sfld^^^Sl^^ P % ''I^ it on
account of the rich and sweet food not being suflficient for your palate ? "
^Hing ^iin pat, tsuk, ,ii 't'ai ,ii iS'^^Tv^ '5f^#i$i " Have you not
eiiougii light and warm clothing for your body ?''
JIo pat, shall- ai 'W-^'lMM' Wiiy shoidd we not be careful ?
,Tsoi iH^-..— On tsoi^ ,tsoi ^^n% ^Vhere is it ?
Jvwaa 'tsz ^to ;i'i ,tsf.i ^'^^ ^^rJc D'*«s a superior man need <=o
sHai 'ho jtsoi ^^Si^; Is it possible? Lmany /
3. SuhHt'dufA-sfor Notes of E.cckmathm.
,Tsoi ^.— Tai- (tsoi ^r^ flow great ! How iniportant !
Shin^ ,tsoi jk'i ;in 'ya ^ ^ R Wife ^is words how excellent !
Jn ^tsoi jUi -ya ^Rlcl^jiB* H'^^^ virtunus a man is TTi !
Tai^ ,tsoi shing' ,yan ,chi lb- 'ya A S^ E:- A ^ jS iil How sublime is
the doctrine of sages !
Tai- ,tsoi nian^ -ya TCm-SC ^'lul How important Unit ([ueslion !
,U ^p.— 4,u "^^ How ,m.per it is'
(102)
GllAMMAR OF THE (JUI\KSE LaNQUAGR.
ExpletJN'S.
jTii ^.--^Ts'oni^- lono'^ ,chi 'shni ^ts'ing chai '^"i^^^KM"^ Tlow
clear tho water of/l's'ong' lon^M
,Ts'ong- long-^ ,clii ^sluii chuk, jliai "i^\%^'^^M'^ f^ow tiirl)i,l the
water of" /I's'ong- long;- !
Hakj siiai (liiin M-ax l^^i^la^^ How majestic I How glorious !
Ti ^mi ;yan ^hai 1'i^l^/V'^ i'li^t beautiful person !
^Fu ;^. — '^'IvimMui^fu S*/^^ How very g-reat !
,Nf^ 'i (fu ^^^ I am gone !
Ill Court CoUoiiuial we also meet tsak, ko' y^\ |SJ as an exclamation, as: —
Ship tsui^ tsak, ko' ,^ ^p ^t)] {^ Oh pardon the offence !
AVong- ,t'in 4io Jin tsak, ko' M^^^I^U'J® Oh heaven ! have
conn)a«sion on me !
4. Expresmrg the Indicaiioe Mood.
-Ya "jj^. — Shin^ 'che cvan 'ya ^ f^ T^tEi Goodness is benevolence.
/l"in W 'ho jkwau 'ya, tseuk, Ink, 'ho jts'z -yn, pak, yan^ Mio to^ 'ya,
,chnno-,vnns pat, 'ho .nang- ^ya 'Ji'^^^^^^MW^M^^^
JfJ f^^§ifc'4'lff^^^f^ifc Yon may subdue the world, refuse
distinctions, tread upon naked swords, and yet be unable to maintain the
due medium,
-Ng-o mi- ,chi kin' 'ya ^ ^-^ JGifi I have not seen such.
Pat, tsuk, wai' -ya, ^^T<.VL ^^ot vvortli dreading-.
,'Ng- kin' ,k'i tsun' 'ya, mi' km' ^k'i 'chf 'ya "§■ ^^M^il'^^M
Xcili ^ have seen him progressing, bul never stopping.
Pat, 'ho 'ya ^ PTi^ You may not.
cln ^, (Sam pat, tsoi^in, i^^^^i His heart forsook him. Sjs'
cshf s^ang Jn, man= mat, ,shang ,fn [^ H# ff ^ ffi' '-f^ t M 'i'^ie
four seasons return in order and all things come in their season. '.She
lokj pat, jts'iin An ryf^v^f^fT*'^ That in which he dolights is not here.
(Yan j-an .in j^jCllAiS V'ery joyfully.
Fat, /in ^.M Suddenly. > ■
/U ^t'ln ,in ilUjZ^ As in haeven.
[n f{^. — This is interchangeably used with tho preceding. As a final
particle it adds force to what is said.
Pat, ,m >P,^ Not so. W pit. An ^>^\^ It is yet uncertain.
<Sho (tong ,ln ^'m^ As it ought to be.
Ts/,^ ,111 A ,in § M{A).?S Spontaneously and yet truly.
(lOO)
GllAMMAll OF TMK ClUNCSK TjANGUAfJK.
Explrfioes.
^i ^, 'i 1^:^, 'i ^, J 7il and ;f j/lj are used in « similar sense as
the j^trccediiiy ; but uxprestJ the moaning less I'oicibly than ^fn.
Coinblnatiom of H/.i-plctioc^, or Enphunic I'liiticlts.
The upper sentence is in the lilciiuy style, the luwer in the I'linti CoUo-
()ni;il, tiie sense being th») same in both.
-tlL^ [Mok, Si ckwai ,ch.' rneaj.^ ^y^t ,fu %^^^^Z'^^^h
^Ya <fu ( ;l^^ hal^ meno-^ <ohin|^-tenj.^ k6^ lok, gf^ i%^ W^^W^
ft is decreed by fate.
-tli S!^ f.^No- %^p'uu ,kvv-t ^y^Vtsoi ^-giaJll'tll,^
^Ya ,tsoi V^fr chi' hai^ ^ii ^16 <kwa 'kom yeuny^ ,ni6 ^Jc sl^h^ffiM^V
Am 1 only a <>'oui'd ? or : Do yon compare me only to a p'ourd ^
^ (M {^ 5^'f" «^l^ins' cts'eung mfn' ,i lap, ^ya iii ^ JgitJjg jgf ["/ij
Tsikj hai^ hennc>"' mi'n' ^mai jts'cung 'k'i cbii' 'k5in ^lo ^[1^^
As stupid as to stand with your face close to the wall (i. e. you know
iiothino- and can see nothing;').
-liiB pHo wai^ ;yan ,chi ,fong 7a 'f "^llt^yfy-feB
^Ya ^1' LTsau^ hai^ ,wai ,yan kc' M, 'tsz la> ^ f^ ^Sfc'll^T''''Jjt
Then it may be called a means of practicing virtue.
-HL M I^K'f yik, jing qieung 'ts'z fuk, 'ya ,ye ^ #]§ ^ ^t M^ W
'Yix ,ye VPun 'tang^h6ungk(>' ti^ fuk, fan^ Jo ^^^^Mil^I'IlSfii'lSS
He ought also to enjny this happiness.
^ H^ fShin- jChi wok, po- sun' -i Jsoi ^^^^W-it^ ^ ttfe
4 ,tsoi UWai shin^ tsau^^io 'kwo shat, hai^ hV S^fjCfeTSi S#^|-
Pr active virtue and you will reip the good fruit of it.
B ^ |Pat, yung' tsak; yik, H =i Jf^UP. ||lj >fr B ^
'I H t'M 'shai ^ni, ^ni tsvu^ pa' hV PSl9lJ4^,f4^J^'|i"|li
If he will not employ you, then you must drop the maiter.
^i ,u Vivom yeung' Hsz tsan^ ^mo ,lo Sl^t^^SftflSI
If so, thou tliere is n«» other way left {i.e. there is only one way
to give happiness to the peojdf).
^ 4$ fcl^^^-^i'^ ^tsz ,to ,u J soi g-y- ^ 7^ S!^
V tsoil Kwan 'tsz 'i ko' [i' kom k(? ,wai ,to ,m6 f]'^ Ji^i^)'iliL''^'i'ft
AVhy should the sup;n'ior mm trouble him:,olt al'out so many ?
(lOi)
OllAMMAR OF TUli: ClIIiNKSE LaNGUAGIC
Expletives.
So ! But is it so with biui .''
^M ^ f'U ,'n- ,,n6 kan' ,In H ^ ^ ffi P^l .^/fi ^:
Jn 'i LTai^ ^U ko' ,yan ^mo tan' ke' lok, ;^ ^ ^ Afl"5¥"i^''^
The o-rgat ^U is not a man deficient in virtue (no ci-evice found in him).
M # f Jn yik, pit, ,k'aa ,k'i shf' ,1 H Miy^^'>^'K-^\^^^
Jn yik> I Yik, iiV.k'aujk'i cbeuk, 'k5m tsau- 'bai lok, ^^S:>^^M
It so ; tlien let bim also seek for tbat ^diicb is rig-bt and nothing else.
M Wi r Jn a pat, sbing' ^cbe ^U^>P0^
Jn ,i |FIai^cbi, 'yan,'m,yino-takJce\nif^a^.^PgKfl''i^^'3^
Indeed ; bnt tbere are some which connor be overcome.
M ^ f Jn 'cb'e pat, 'bo MRl^^
Jn 'cb'e t Sb^unj.-^ 'cb'e ,t,6 .'m 'ho a' jpj JS. SPPg^JP^
Still it is not proper.
PM W I Jn tsak, Ju 'tsz ke' sbing' ^i ,u PMWl^J'^^M^^
Jntsak, (Hai' Ji, 'kom tsau- Ju Hsz bai- sbing^van Jo kwa^ l^rtfjL'f®
Tben Confucius was a sage, was be not ?
S M|.'M6yeuk,Snng>jan> M^^iAPM
Yeuk,/m ['Mai ko' 'bo 'ts'z Snng^ cyan 'kom yeung'^tsz iV Pyit^/iT-iEl
Not like tbe Sung ]teo]>le (who pulled up the i-ice, to make it look as
Inra'e as otber peoples).
1^^ JTsak, sbii^ ,u .k'i'pat, ,cb'a H Wil\f:^ }iX^M^
s'li.V ,u 1 'Kom ,ni sbiV .ki ^nio mat, ts'o' lok, ^S^^jji iff, 11 "(i^ia^^f
If so, tben be is almost without fault.
S^ f JCwan 'tsz yik, ^yau u' ai ^J-TffWB^'
U^ ,u i ,Kwan 'tsz ^au ,tsang ,yan k6' ^m^ ,m #-?• W ft" A^^fyi: fj ^jH
Does then the superior man id:>o dislike (or balo) peojjle f
Rft Pf- r ,U ,fu hot, ,kwat Rif'jf ^ ^
^U ,fu I Jlai ,ho pat, ,fan hii' ,kwai ,ni ^Pl^^MiU^Ji
Oh ! but why did he not return ?
^ ^ r Yik, ,k'au ,Vi ,sam ,chi ^sbing ,ln ,u H if>^<%i<^:<lMM ^
;(T 'i 1 Yik, in' ,sam ,sbing 'kom cbc' ^lY'^M'^^^^X^^ t-^
ShouM seek to make bis heart i-inccrc.
(io;>)
GhAMMAM OI-' TUK ClUMJSK LaNOMAOK.
Eu-pletices.
:zr^ fix "Soi' 0'«n c^^"«n yilv, ,^vnn 'i ^:^'^ A7T^:zr^
.Wau ^i I Fat, kwo' jan w;? =no„ ynu^ ua^ clie^ ^M AlS^I Ml^
_^ 1 eopie say so and I repeat it.
:zr K (Pole, 5U swan ^i ^f-^S'Nf
jWan 4 ( Pat kwo- tsui'jiino- tP ^clii ^'^i^^^'llHilin^
_ His crime is but trifling.
^ia ^i 1 K.,' ti^ ,to hni^ tsnn' tsy} ki ^chi t<V ke' clie= fiii-^Slitl^^iiL U
lliis is to do one's duty.
MM f 'Ch'e ,ii ,sz ,yan ^che RMDI A^'
H'li'6 ,u 1 Yau^ 'h6 ^ts'z 'ko ko^ ,yan 'koni ke' XklWl^ M AH^'ft
Just like this (or that) man.
jnfiO f ,Ho ,u ,k'i ,chi ^ya ff ^OSj^H-t^
,lio ,u IKo' (1^ hai^ mat, kin= shik, ^ni Mi^fM-^M^mi^
What manner of knowledge is it then?
finfwf f ,U ,ho <sz 4io wai* yeung^ H /iR^t^^fpf ||^^
,U dio I'Ti'm yenng^ 'tszki.Vtak, Uh' cheidc,,ni '§^, M'T^^^^i^-^^M^M
How then can 3'ou call this atteiidino- 011 your }a rents /
m M f JIo ,tsoi H ,sz wai^ tat, 'ch6 i^f^cMMm^M^
Jlo ,t.soi I^Pln ycuno^ hai^ -iii kiiV ts6^ tat, ke^ ^ni ^jJl^M M i^^ ^4 iHC
How then do you call this Tat, !
^ ^ f FiV hnb ,k'I shun^ 4 ,u 3c# J^HIH^ ^
U ,u 1 FiV 'wb ^kom tsau^ ,ou lok, ,lo 3c#®^^^-fl!-S
The parents will thus enjoy happiness.
^y< CsMiu ci pat, sau' 'che ^yau -i ,t'u ^ iTn^f* ^^ 'R ^^
'i ,fii LWo ,miu ,'m ,hoi ,fa ,t6 ^yau k6= lok, ^0 PSfi?j f^tPW
There are always some sproiits which do not flower.
^ ^ j ^ H i (it, ^yau ,chi ,wan .nMSM^li ^'
jWan cU ('Hi tan- -ii 'lid ^scung ,k;'iu 'kom wa' ,me :^'(SMteffl'?S
Hid he say that he only kept intercourse with his friend ?
^ iii f 'U ,t'in ,man ,chi ,sin kok, 'che ya ^%^^%^^i%
■C\ic 'y:'. I-N^^o ^'s"' ^<''" .^I'^n- sin 'hiu t.V =li kc- iV ^i^%^%^
^J^n^i^ I am born with knowledge^ hence must first know it.
(106)
GhAMMAU of the ClUNKSli Lasguage.
F.j-pletices.
^Vu 'Che blX.no q.iu t.k, h-.u^ tui^ ke.= ..ue tlK##f^ng^#
Does he understand filial aiiu traternal duties?
^^ ^ jj fong' ,u ,ts'an cliek, ,r.\d 'rbe ,u r(n^)tM§l^^f^^-
How nincli more, since he is always near him,
:$J ^fj Osiiai il tnk, la' ,i .nan- ^chenng- chi= 'ch6 ,ye t|i#fii'ftl!?n
'Che^yalg^fty&#]|P r.->r^^^
I s'M liai= 'ii.'i ,linn talt, kfini' f ai' i|.'ing ke' ,iiie Vami'M & ("f
Ll!t*¥''l'lt •• , , , ,,, ,
And those officers should not be j^'ood who can establish sncfi
great peace ?
^ Ifil r^Ts'z ,{-1 kau' fa' ,ehi 'sho k'ap^ 'che ,ye li^^frMitZ^)]!^
'Che eye j y^!^|J ^ _^
i Ko' 11= ;ni hai^ kail' fan' tak, .loi ke' ,m6 fl 6\1 Pa 1^ ^ rJ^I
wi#mat . . . , . ,
A.nd thisshouid not have hecn obtained by the reforming doctrine .
:^ ^ ( J ,hing ,wai ,yan i^ 'che ,tsoi M USt^f i-^l^
'Che tsoi \ cTTo 4 'tan toi^ pok, t.ik, ,shu .van ,ni ^ofj^.^f^ ftf]^^
How dare you in return treat literary men with disrespect !
fM rSc ^'^ 'lii yP'il^'a shi= '«iu Cheung^ ,fn /m ^tsoi ^•S:3S^:S^J'5t
cia.tsoi • ^^r^
j -Ngo 'lii ct'uno- ko' ti- -ino to- leung- ,van nna ^ ;^ loJ'J 'XiE
How dare von compare me to tliat mean iellow ^
11 ,u ['Tun yeung^ 'tsz chi' cheuk, ,ni fj^l^^M^f^
TIdw shall we then act to make things j)roiier i*
B ^ ^ ( 'Tsz iu, n 4 ,u -f- H B ^^
'I 4 u ) 'Hun2" 'tsz w;? -mo mat, 'seung mong- ke' ^^'^'j -^L"? H^^
Confucius said : All hope is lo^t !
B^^c(/Ngn4^fuPg-B#,-/c
4 'i ,tu N ^Ngo ,c]ii t.V /n. tak, -hang ,n shai' ke' lok, f:fe^ifiPn#
Jr is ;dl o\er (njy ducuine will not relurm the wo; id.)
(107)
fiRAAIMAn OF THi; C-HINKsl:: LAXOirAnF.
Explctiei's.
f?n Q ^ I Jvnno- 4 clung' ,nAm niin' J 'i M j|? tL jE^ \(\\ \i\\ Q ^
J 'i' 4 (L:i|>, chiin ri'n tso^ tin' Jai ^koin yeun;^' ,clii j!l ffjj ^-^ r^
He only sat on the throne and llie whole enipire was govern-
ed well.
J ^i ^yn U'M l.ai^ -hing Mcf 'kom tsau^ , io a' Pft# >S QiiSlM^lPf
The possessor of sincerity does not stop wiili tlu; perfection of
himself.
^%M r.'Ng ,hang ^yCv ,ii ,tsoi ^fi^%ti _^
'Yacii.tsoiVNgo Jiang hu' =kom tsau' 'hai ,uie ^ tl ^-R^^^lPJI^^
If I depart, will it then be all well?
^ja^j^fTsak, ,ho ^( ^tsoi mn)>j^^
Jio^f ,tsoi L4\i ^iai ]nat/pun HinghiT tscV <ni j/JvM'il4^'?^iffti]/S
What have you to take with y'>u ?
Shii%u,tsoilH<:'u tsan^ siin' 'ho lu? ,lo fef^^'Jit^'ll'tlS
He consi.lers him in every r!'5])err a goorl man.
SI 1-^ PiJ tak, ,yan ,fn ^i ,n iJCtf" A.'Blli^
cfii -1 jU \^Ni tak, ko' 'ho jan ^seung ii ;'m ^ts'ang ,ni f^j^flj-'jlil.^TA.
Are there any virtuous men there (with whom you can hold intercourse?)
M il^ fTsun^ ,sam ,in 4 4 ^.Ao^flM^
Jn 4 H VNgo,t^aiMsun\samkeV]a' ^*aSff^j\!i.^ni^/^"ll|
With all my heart (1 ex'?rt myself to the utmost).
•tfe B ^f ,K'i =ho wai^ chi= tak, Sa i .' ;)4; ^f ti^iitfe B ^
^Ya ^i 4 l_^K'iisuu'ohP4ir)tak, JmngkuMok, tg|4Mi^)'litT''tt
He considers the practice ol superior virtue the only thing
worth speaking of.
grSa^f,^^mwk'i,;han,'m/, M- i f#i^#,lr?nB^
ja ,i ^i 4 )jTh -H tsz^ 'ki ko' ,slian (sau^ 'liai lok, tl ^.^' U B fi
Cultivate personal virtue and nothing else.
B ^ B ^ f cKM .nang 4 .u -> .u \l ^l B ^^ B ^
^J ,u 4 ,u C<Timtak,w{i'pa\loi)a\lo,ni ^J^HMll'li^ivS^
ilow dare von ahvays '^uv, Desist ! Desist I
(108)
Grammar of tub Chinksk LANorAOR.
Ej-ph'tives in Canton CoUoqviat.
—. -, , _^ Pl ji ^i i^ M^m ,clii sts'uno- clung' 'cbe ^t'oi /i B» tSl B rS
i ii 'i ji j PiV > pfi' ,lo, J Jci'i t? ,kan /m 'ho tso^ ke^ ,lo jj^l^a
Stop! Stop! for peril awaits those who engage in politics,
cChi iU 'die 'ya ^i jln ^tsoi -2 ^' ^ iB ^ i§ ^
Ts'at, is,} ,nang- ,fan shl^ sau' ^ts'oi -t^'Ife^y^S^^
If YOU know well how to use the words from ^Chi to ^Tsoi.
Yon are a "Tadiiate, yea a San jts'oi.
The foliowinfi' expletives are those in common use in Pmiti Colloquial.
A thoroup,-h kMow]e(lj>;"e or" them is as necess;irv for intellipihle conversa-
tion as the Tones juid Aspirates; for they supply the place of the ex-
pression of our emotions, hy which either a wish, a command or a ques-
tion is im))liiHl accoi-din<^' to the modulation of our voice. Most foreig-
ners learning- Chinese have hitherto paid too little attention to this sul)-
ject. The couseqnence has been, that many, after having- studied for
eight or ten years, discovered too late, that they were not understood,
whilst others, with less education and talent, and among- them several
ladies, have acquired so tlioronjj-h a knowledge of the spoken lan^uag-e as
to he able to converse in it with an ease, almost ai)proaching- to that of
their mother tong'ue.
OJ' Interrogation.
,A ny.— Mat, ^ye ,a -^,^^3 What ?
A' Pf .-^Ni 'kn ^ngo 'ho tak, ,hun :V -f^^f^flilflfllPf
Do you think I have aiuch leisure {
Che' 0^.— ^K^ii ^chi 'kom ke^ che' tEll:RSii^[^/[P^' Has he ordy that ?
'M(i R>f .— Chan ching' hai^ lok, ^ma SlEi%P#R>^ Is i'^ so '"^"1<'^'1 ^
,Me If .— 'Kom wa^ .'m hai^ ,me i@i:|fSP§f^3f Did he say so or urn ?
,Ma Jf, for ,'m /i PgP^. Mat, Vi S-au 'ho ke\ma -fef^^t WM^f/tff
Have you anything- nice there .''
^Ni ^._Mat, ,'m 'pi ^ngo 't'ai ^lia ,nl -fe. Pg ^ Hc g^ iffi PjS Why
do yon not let me have a look at it ?
,Me n^.— ^iNi c'm ,chi to\me f^tPg-^P ^l|ni^ Do yon not know it?
^0 It^.— Mat, ^ni man^ tak, kmn' ch'ut. ,k'i ,a ,o 4lf^ M tl PU' |i|
"pj^Sfi'^*^] W'hy do you )uil so sti'ange a question ?
PiV t^-£.-,Fong- mat, 70 piV tel^it^fiu What have you to fear?
0/ Command.
L;V BfjL.-Ki,V 'hi tsa.i^ iiV hii' hV l^'f feWC 'SinJ^ii If he call, then
you must be oft'.
(100)
GuAMMAn OF THK ClIINKSE LaNOI'AOK,
E.cpletives in Canton Collocjmal. Interjections.
La' oil.— 416 fai' H' liu' hV :jtf 'l^ltfei^ Be very quick !
,La P^!')— Cliik, hu\la itiftti Go strai-ht on I
Le ^Jj.—Tsik, liilk, hii' le' iP SJielJ Go instantly !
Of Affirmation and Response.
Che' ^. Tsau' hai' 'k6m wa^ che' ^#I®:|SB^ Then speak in that
ChiO^. ,Tr, hai' 'k6in ,chi ^-l^lllir^^ Matters stand thus. [war.
,Chi ^. Pat, kwo' yo hai^ 'kom ,chi ^® ftil^RStllll: Not different
,Lo %%. ^K'ii to' ,lo tB^l]i|i He has arrived. [from that.
,Le #J. ,Chanchi'hai\Ie^^^^J It is so indeed.
,Le Kl. Mat, > hai^ ,le H^PSf^Pfl Why should it not be so ?
.Lopo'PHPS. 'No-o hii'.lo po' ^^I^Pg Idog-o.
Lok.Pff. ^Alo tsV lok, fl^Pg- So it is. ^^ a^4
Of doubt.
Kwa'biP. P'^' ,'m hai' kwii^ ^I^Pg^nlf I doubt it.
A little careful attention paid to this subject will soon help the student
to acquire a proper knowledge of the .application of tkese important
particles.
Interjections!.
1. Of Sorrow.
,0i ,oi fu- ^mo M^3cW Oh ! Ah ! or Alas, my parents !
,0i 4soi ^^ Alas! How sad! 'Ho sik, Pf*!^ What a pity !
^Ai ja ^fJtfi Ah me ! ,Ai ,va r'.mo-' ^^'|f| Qh, how painful !
,Ai ja ^ho ,ts'ai ^leun-j^ ^^^^1^W> Oh I what misery ! what suf-
feiings!
,0 ,a ^ho sik, 'ho sik, |5^^ RTIS RTI^ Oh, how lamentable 1 how la-
mentable !
<U cfu H^P? Oh ! how sad !
2. Of Jojt.
,Hi ^hi P^P^ Joy (A Trmther ])layirig- with her infant).
."Niln tak, .nan tak, H fW'Iflf^ Fortiiniitp ! Fortunate !
•S. Of Acchntuition.
J cii ^!K : <i tt«e <f§BM I'lavo!
Miu\tsoi ^^Sc Well done! AdiuimMe! Excellent! dear!
• ' 4. Of Admiration.
Muk, kwui', mok, kw-ii' ^.g^f^ No wonder! No wonder!
(110)
Grammar of tiik Chinese Lanouaoe.
Interjections.
TAi^k'i, tai^k'i iX.'^-k'^ Woriflerful! Woudevful! ,0i ,u ^^3^ do.
X^ Aha! ,Yau,tsoi ^^ How exquisite! ,Yau ,tsoi j^^ do.
5. Of Anger and JRidicnle.
Jli 5^ Pogh! Fool! ,tse ,chi P^^"^ Pshaw!
6. Of Contempt.
Fong-' p'P, fong-' p'P iJtJSlS^B fie! fie!
,Hi, ,hi n^q^ or ,Hi ,hi P^P§ Fie! Fie!
J f^ Shame!
0/" Threatening and Warning.
Hii'p^'-ifl Begone! ^Tsan pa' ;$|| do.
cL5 ki' Jo ki' -^mE-^^rE I^o not forget ! Do not forget 1
8. Of Imitation.
^Hi^hi! P§PS Imitation of lanohf(.r.
1'i|)^ tip, tap, tai)j ^"i^^^^^^m 'J^'''P "'^'^<^ "^' '''I'" fidling on li,ii-d snb-
^"Mh 0£ The voice of b^hies wlien orvi'ig (cnlled ,nie ^shinu'.) [st;uu!<\s.
There are many more Interjections met with in l)()oks ; but as they aie
easily recognised, they do nut reijuire to be noticed here.
c^-X??lC50^^''cr..«
INDEX TO PART I.
Preface, page T to IV
Afiinity and Difference of Races, „ V
Different Dialects in China, ,, YI
t^iniilarity of (^'hinese, Jajianese and American
Indian Dialects, „ A^'II to IX
Origin and Character of the Written Lan-
guage „ IX to XII
Relatives, .. „ XII to XV
The Spidren Language. Verbs with certain
terminations &c., ,, XV to XXXV
Orthography, „ XXXV & XXXVII
Difference of Intonation, P'^n^ ■'•
Aspirates, ,, 3
Vowel Sounds, ,, 3
Dialectical Difference, „ -t
( 'otn])Ounds, ,, '^>
Classifiers, , ,, *> to IC)
Chinese Designation of the Parts of Speech, ,, 1(> it 17
Articles, „ 17 & 1^
TSoun, Gender, Number and Cases, „ 18 to 24:
Adjectives, Positive, Coniparative and Superlative, „ 24 to 30
Pronouns and their Substitutes, ,, 30 to 47
Numerals, „ 47 to 60
Verbs, „ GO to 75-
Adverbs ,, 75 to 8G
Prepositions, „ BO to 92
Conjunctions, „ 02 to 100
Expletives, „ 100 to 108
Interjections, „ 108 to 110
ADDITIONS AND COrtRECTIONS.
Pi]'^e y line 9 from beluw i'or inti-wdi-oduced read iu(n) !iici.ul.
,, ^'^f ,, 22 ,, ,, ip.iiiove the ( .) sifter I* & Cii.
,, IX ,, 20 „ ,, fur ;ihsiir(itnl read absorbed.
„ Xin ,, after Relative 8r» add y<?«i6'/'.
„ X\"III ,, 2 from above ibr idea's read ideas.
„ XIX „ 1 „ „ for ,kai ,, ^kai.
„ XX „ 5 „ „ fur jChau „ jCh'au.
„ XX „ 13 „ „ for toi „ ct'ui.
,, XX ,, 8 ., below for persiie ,, pursue.
„ XXI „ 11 „ „ adda(—) after fbi^-.
,,2 V "^ ?) » ^01' chill read ,Cniiu
,, 5 „ 7 „ above for uniuelli^ible read unintelligible.
„ 7 „ 10 ,, below put of before stockiui^s.
„ 8 j> 2 » above and elsewhere for hig-an n];< read 'ngan.
„ 9 „ lo „ „ for (kwan read ^kwan.
„ 9 „ 16 „ „ for Jm „ =Im.
„ 10 „ 8 „ „ for fat, „ fat,
„ 15 for hatches „ hatchets.
„ 18 „4&5„ „ for £wai „ c^ai.
„ 19 „ 2 „ „ for ,kia „ ^k'm.
„ 19 „ 6 „ ,, for famale „ female.
„ 21 ,, 17 „ „ inclose very good m a ( ).
„ 21 ,, lo ,, „ for Ham^ pang- lang^ ve;ul llaiu- })ang- lang-.
„ 24 „ 14 „ „ for 116 read 4I().
„ 24 and elsewhere for oi* i-^ ,, o!'.
„ 28 „ „ for 1= ^ „ i^
,, ?>3 line 4 from above ior t'ai^ J^ „ t'ai'.
,, 34 ,, lu ,, „ for JIam ,, Hani'.
,, ;!.") ,, 2 & 8 and elsewhere for ^ts'fn f{^ icad tbiu^
,, iJi) „ 8 from above for tak, read tak,
,„VS „ 11 „ „ for yeukj „ y6uk,
„ 87 • „ li „ „ iov ji6 „ ].-o\
,. 89 „ 4 „ „ for hai, „ hai^
„ 44 „ 4 „ „ for kin' „ kiu^
„ 44 „ 18 „ „ for ,kun „ ,kun.
„ 45 ,, 7 „ „ fur fail* „ .fi'm.
.. 46 ,, 10 ,, ,, f.)r rcsuursc read r<!Sonive.
.. ."•) ,, 11 ,, ,, fur benatv ,, beaiitv.
1(5 & 17 „ ,, lur tukj ^1:J „ ink.
;V.> ,, 11 ,, ,, for 'C'liau ,, 'Ch"au.
(il „ 4 ,, ,, fur ,kwai „ ^kw'ai.
.<J4 ,, 15 ,, ,, for (yhi, „ Chi'.
G4 ,, 2 ., btdow fur iV ,u
Page
(57
74
76
78
} •)
81
?>
83
82
83
85
;?
87
^5
88
88
90
?!
91
ADDITIONS AND COEEECTIONS.
line 12 from above for 'NAi read -Niii.
14 „ „ for k'.\-o' ,, 'kwo.
1 ^% 8 „ ,, remove the ( . ) after Optative and 31ood.
liur.
liin^
,, „ for jiun
1 ,, ,, for jiin'
1^2 below for tsni^
1'2 from below for ttdc.
tfdc.
o
above
for k'ii'
>)
n^'ii.
10
for -mh
V
cHlO
11
fov (ff
It
3
f )r ficquaduct
reful aqnaduct
M
for kak,
>)
kak,.
IH
for ,Ni
)>
,Ni.
9
for mai^
mui".
(^
UNI\TERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Los Angeles
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.
:0 o ■
r'e'c^! V t D
MAIN LOAN DE:^K
MAY --
P.M.
JAN 28 1959
4
Form L9-75m-7,'61(C1437B4)444
161970
4.1/
RENEW/
LOUi
MAY 17 1971 •
■iiwr,
1 will 23 1978 I
URL
3^
CD^UBi
P *^,
AUG 7l9tU
fi
iVIAY 1 ' 1984
UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
AA 001 281 278
:i:ll
*:^™lT58'' 00282 0099 >q^
v.l
r